Kia 2017 Sorento Owner Manual

Kia, THE COMPANY

Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.

As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehicles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.

All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can be carried out.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applicable to your specific Kia vehicle.

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

F o r e w o r d

Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.

When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replacement parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfaction.

Because subsequent owners require this important information as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is sold.

This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual that provides important information on all warranties regarding your vehicle.

We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle.

Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment described in this manual, along with the various illustrations, may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this manual were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.

We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.

© 2016 Kia Canada Inc.

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Kia Canada Inc..

Printed in U.S.A

i

table of contents

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety features of your vehicle

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications & Consumer information

Index

ii

7

8

5

6

I

3

4

1

2

Introduction

How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-3

• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

• Operation in foreign countries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders. . 1-6

1

Introduction

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you in many ways. We strongly recommend that you read the entire manual. In order to minimize the chance of death or injury, you must read the WARNING and CAU-

TION sections in the manual.

Illustrations complement the words in this manual to best explain how to enjoy your vehicle. By reading your manual, you will learn about features, important safety information, and driving tips under various road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents.

Use the index when looking for a specific area or subject; it has an alphabetical listing of all information in your manual.

Sections: This manual has eight sections plus an index. Each section begins with a brief list of contents so you can tell at a glance if that section has the information you want.

You will find various WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this manual. These WARNINGs were prepared to enhance your personal safety.You should carefully read and follow

ALL procedures and recommendations provided in these WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTICEs.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in which harm, serious bodily injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which damage to your vehicle could result if the caution is ignored.

✽

NOTICE

A NOTICE indicates interesting or helpful information is being provided.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Your new vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having a pump octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87

(Research Octane Number 91) or higher. (Do not use methanol blended fuels.)

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with

UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.

Never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified. (Consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.)

• Tighten the cap until it clicks one time, otherwise the Check Engine light will illuminate.

1 2

Introduction

WARNING

- Refueling

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off.

Attempts to force more fuel into the tank can cause fuel overflow onto you and the ground causing a risk of fire.

• Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage, especially in the event of an accident.

Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol (also known as wood alcohol) are being marketed along with or instead of leaded or unleaded gasoline.

Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol may be used in your vehicle.

Do not use gasohol containing more than 15 percent ethanol, and do not use gasoline or gasohol containing any methanol. Ethanol provides less energy than gasoline and it attracts water, and it is thus likely to reduce your fuel efficiency and could lower your MPG results.

Methanol may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or drivability problems may not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty if they result from the use of:

1. Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.

2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

3. Gasohol containing more than 15 percent ethanol

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel comprised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 percent gasoline, and is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible

Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with your vehicle. Use of “E85” may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle's engine and fuel system. Kia recommends that customers do not use fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 15 percent.

✽

NOTICE

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cover damage to the fuel system or any performance problems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.

✽

NOTICE

Never use any fuel containing methanol. Discontinue use of any methanol containing product which may inhibit proper drivability.

1 3

Introduction

Other fuels

Using fuels that contain Silicone (Si),

MMT (Manganese, Mn), Ferrocene

(Fe), and Other metalic additives, may cause vehicle and engine damage or cause misfiring, poor acceleration, engine stalling, catalyst melting, clogging, abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction, etc.

Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) may illuminate.

✽

NOTICE

Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the use of these fuels may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains harmful manganese-based fuel additives Such as

M M T ( M e t h y l c y c l o p e n t a d i e n y l

Manganese Tricarbonyl). Kia does not recommend the use of gasoline containing MMT. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and affect your emission control system. The

Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the cluster may come on.

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your vehicle.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.

Fuel Additives

Kia recommends that you use good quality gasolines treated with detergent additives such as TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline, which help prevent deposit formation in the engine.

These gasolines will help the engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control System. For more information on TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline, please go to the website (www.toptiergas.com)

For customers who do not use TOP

TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly, additives that you can buy separately may be added to the gasoline.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive should be added to the fuel tank at every

12,000 km (7,500 miles) or every engine oil change is recommended.

Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

1 4

Introduction

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle in another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

VEHICLE HANDLING

INSTRUCTIONS

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover.

Specific design characteristics (higher ground clearance, track, etc.) give this vehicle a higher center of gravity than other types of vehicles. In other words they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles.

Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. Again, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover. Be sure to read the

“Reducing the risk of a rollover” driving guidelines, in section 5 of this manual.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN

PROCESS

No special break-in period is needed. By following a few simple precautions for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.

• While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and

4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time, either fast or slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.

• Don't tow a trailer during the first

2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.

1 5

Introduction

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The

EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/ fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data

(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

1 6

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2

Your vehicle at a glance

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW

■

Front view

2 2

❈

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Hood......................................................4-43

2. Head lamp..................................4-116, 7-83

3. Fog lamp ....................................4-119, 7-83

4. Wheel and tire................................7-52, 8-4

5. Outside rearview mirror.........................4-69

6. Panoramic sunroof ................................4-49

7. Front windshield wiper blades....4-123, 7-47

8. Windows ................................................4-39

OUMA014001


■

Rear view

❈


9. Door locks .............................................4-22

10. Fuel filler lid .........................................4-45

11. Rear combination lamp .......................7-88

12. High mounted stop lamp .....................7-90

13. Rear window wiper blade.........4-121, 7-47

14. Liftgate.................................................4-28

15. Rearview camera ..............................4-113

16. Parking assist system .......................4-109

OUMA014002

2 3


INTERIOR OVERVIEW

2 4

❈


1. Inside door handle ...................................4-23

2. Power window switch...............................4-40

3. Central door lock switch ..........................4-24

4. Power window lock button .......................4-42

5. Outside rearview mirror control ...............4-70

6. Outside rearview mirror folding ...............4-72

7. Fuel filler lid open button .........................4-45

8. Power liftgate open/close button ................4-28

9. Instrument panel illumination control ......4-74

10. BSD On/Off button.................................5-85

11. LDWS On/Off button..............................5-92

12. AC inverter button................................4-165

13. ESC off button .......................................5-42

14. Steering wheel.......................................4-55

15. Tilt and telescopic steering control lever ...........................................4-56

16. Inner fuse panel.....................................7-67

17. Brake pedal............................................5-27

18. Hood release lever.................................4-43

19. Seat..........................................................3-2

OUMA014003

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

❈



1. Driver’s front air bag ............................3-57

2. Horn.....................................................4-58

3. Instrument cluster................................4-73

4. Wiper and washer control lever .........4-121

5. Ignition switch or

Engine start/stop button .................5-6, 5-9

6. Cruise control / Advanced smart cruise control..............................5-62, 5-66

7. Hazard warning flasher .........................6-2

8. Climate control system...........4-130, 4-141

9. Shift lever.............................................5-13

10. Front seat warmer /

Seat cooler ...........................4-163, 4-164

11. Heated steering wheel button ...........4-57

12. Drive mode button .............................5-81

13. AWD Lock button...............................5-20

14. 360° camera monitoring system

On/Off button ...................................4-114

15. Rear parking assist system

On/Off button ...................................4-109

16. Electronic parking brake

(EPB) button ......................................5-30

17. AUTO HOLD button...........................5-37

18. USB charger....................................4-167

19. Power outlet.....................................4-164

20. AC inverter ......................................4-165

21. Glove box ........................................4-159

22. Passenger’s front air bag ..................3-57

23. Center console storage box ............4-159

OUMA014004

2 5


ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.4L) - GDI

2 6

❈

The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-36

2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-35

3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-39

4. Air cleaner.........................................7-42

5. Fuse box ...........................................7-69

6. Negative battery terminal..................7-49

7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-49

8. Radiator cap .....................................7-38

9. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-34

10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ...7-40

OUM074100L


Gasoline Engine (THETA 2.0L) T-GDI

❈

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.




4. Air cleaner.........................................7-42

5. Fuse box ...........................................7-69



8. Radiator cap .....................................7-38



OUM074115L

2 7


Gasoline Engine (Lambda 3.3L) - GDI

2 8

❈





4. Air cleaner.........................................7-42

5. Fuse box ...........................................7-69



8. Radiator cap .....................................7-38



OUMA074001

Safety features of your vehicle

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

• Front seat adjustment - manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

• Front seat adjustment - power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

• Driver position memory system (for power seat). . . . 3-9

• Headrest (for front seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

• Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

• Headrest (for rear seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

• Child restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

• Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

• Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Air bag

- advanced supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . 3-44

• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

• Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

• Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

• Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

• Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

3

Safety features of your vehicle

SEATS

■

Manual seat

■

Power seat

OUMA034001

Front seat

(1) Forward and backward

(2) Seatback angle

(3) Seat cushion height

(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*

(5) Cushion extension (Driver's seat)*

(6) Driver position memory system

(7) Headrest

2nd row seat

(8) Forward and backward

(9) Seatback angle and folding

(10) Walk-in seat lever*

(11) Headrest

(12) Armrest

(13) Remote folding*

3rd row seat*

(14) Seatback folding

(15) Headrest

* : if equipped

3 2


WARNING

- Loose objects

Do not place anything in the driver's foot well or under the front seats. Loose objects in the driver's foot area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals.

WARNING

- Uprighting seat

Do not press the release lever on a manual seatback without holding and controlling the seatback. The seatback will spring upright possibly impacting you or other passengers.

WARNING

- Driver responsibility for passengers

1KMN3662

The driver must advise the passenger to keep the seatback in an upright position whenever the vehicle is in motion. If a seat is reclined during an accident, the occupant's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt, applying great force to the unprotected abdomen.

WARNING

- Seat cushion

Occupants should never sit on aftermarket seat cushions or sitting cushions.

The passenger's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop.

3 3


WARNING

- Driver’s seat

• Never attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control of your vehicle.

• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position of the seatback and seatback adjustment.

• Sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining comfortable control of the your vehicle. A distance of at least 10" from your chest to the steering wheel is recommended. Failure to do so can result in air bag inflation injuries to the driver.

WARNING

- Rear seatbacks

Always lock the rear seatback before driving. Failure to do so could result in passengers or objects being thrown forward injuring vehicle occupants.

WARNING

- Cargo Area

Do not allow passengers to ride in the cargo area under any circumstance. The cargo area is solely for the purpose of transporting luggage or cargo.

WARNING

- Luggage and

Cargo

Do not stack pile or stack luggage or cargo higher than the seatback in the cargo area. In an accident the cargo could strike and injury a passenger.

If objects are large, heavy or must be piled, they must be secured in the cargo area.

WARNING

- Unexpected

Seat Movement

After adjusting a manual seat, always check that it is locked by shifting your weight to the front and back. Sudden or unexpected movement of the driver's seat could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

3 4


WARNING

- Seat adjustment

• Do not adjust the seat while wearing seat belts. Moving the seat forward will cause strong pressure on the abdomen.

• Do not place your hand near the seat while adjusting the seat. Your hand could get caught in the seat mechanism.

Front seat adjustment - manual

Forward and backward

Seatback angle

WARNING

- Small objects

Use extreme caution when picking small objects trapped under the seats or between the seat and the center console. Your hands might be cut or injured by the sharp edges of the seats mechanism.

OUM034002

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make sure the seat is locked securely by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

OUM034004

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the seatback recline lever.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place.

(The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock.)

3 5


Seat height (if equipped) Lumbar support (if equipped)

OUM034003

To change the height of the seat, push the lever upwards or downwards.

• To lower the seat cushion, push the lever down several times.

• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever up several times.

OUM034068

The lumbar support can be adjusted by pressing the lumbar support switch on the side of the seat.

1. Press the front portion of the switch to increase support, or the rear portion of the switch, to decrease support.

2. Release the switch once it reaches the desired position.

Front seat adjustment - power

(if equipped)

The front seat can be adjusted by using the control switches located on the outside of the seat cushion.

Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper position so you can easily control the steering wheel, pedals and switches on the instrument panel.

WARNING

- Unattended children

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. Children might operate features of the vehicle that could injure them.

CAUTION

- Power seat adjustments

The power seating controls function by electronic motor.

Excessive operation may cause damage to the electrical equipment.

3 6


CAUTION

- Power Seating

Do not operate two or more power seat control switches at the same time. Doing so may damage the power seat motor or electrical components.

Forward and backward Cushion extension

(for driver's seat, if equipped)

When in operation, the power seatconsumes a large amount of electrical power. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, don’t adjust the power seat longer than necessary while the engine is not running.

OUM034006

Push the control switch forward or backward to move the seat to the desired position. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.

OUM034072L

Press the front portion of the switch to raise the cushion extension, or the rear portion of the switch to lower it.

Release the switch once the cushion extension reaches the desired position.

3 7


Seatback angle Seat height (if equipped) Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)

■

Type A

OUM034007

Push the control switch forward or backward to move the seatback to the desired angle. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.

OUM034008

Pull the front portion of the control switch up to raise or press down to lower the front part of the seat cushion. Pull the rear portion of the control switch up to raise or press down to lower the rear part of the seat cushion. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.

OUM034068

The lumbar support can be adjusted by pressing the lumbar support switch on the side of the seat.

Type A

1. Press the front portion of the switch to increase support, or the rear portion of the switch, to decrease support.

2. Release the switch once it reaches the desired position.

3 8

■

Type B


Driver position memory system

(if equipped, for power seat)

WARNING

Never attempt to operate the driver position memory system while the vehicle is moving.

This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, serious injury.

OUM034073L

Type B

1. Press the front portion of the switch (1) to increase support, or the rear portion of the switch (2), to decrease support.

2. Move the support position up and down by pressing the switch (3) or

(4).

3. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.

OUM034032

A driver position memory system is provided to store and recall the driver seat and outside rearview mirror position with a simple button operation. By saving the desired position into the system memory, different drivers can reposition the driver seat based upon their driving preference.

If the battery is disconnected, the desired seat position memory will need to be re-saved.

3 9


Storing positions into memory using the buttons on the door

Storing driver’s seat positions

1. Shift the shift lever into P while the engine start/stop button is ON or ignition switch ON.

2. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside rearview mirror comfortable for the driver.

3. Press SET button on the control panel. The system will beep once.

4. Press one of the memory buttons

(1 or 2) within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button. The system will beep twice when memory has been successfully stored.

When recalling an adjustment memory button while sitting in the vehicle, you can be surprised by the setting chosen if the memory has been adjusted by someone else. If that occurs, immediately push the seat position control knob in the direction of the desired position to stop further undesired movement.

Recalling positions from memory

1. Shift the shift lever into P while the engine start/stop button is ON or ignition switch ON.

2. To recall the position in the memory, press the desired memory button (1 or 2). The system will beep once, then the driver’s seat will automatically adjust to the stored position.

Adjusting the control switch for the driver’s seat while the system is recalling the stored position will cause the movement to stop and move in the direction that the control switch is moved.

3 10


Easy access function

(if equipped)

The system will move the driver's seat automatically as follows:

• Without smart key system

- It will move the driver’s seat rearward when the ignition key is removed.

- It will move the driver’s seat forward when the ignition key is inserted.

• With smart key system

- It will move the driver’s seat rearward when the engine start/stop button is changed to the OFF position.

- It will move the driver’s seat forward when the engine start/stop button is changed to the ACC or

START position.

You can activate or deactivate this feature. Refer to "User settings" in chapter 4.

Headrest (for front seat)

OHM038048N

The driver's and front passenger's seats are equipped with a headrest for the occupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfort for the driver and front passenger, but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a rear collision.

For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant's head. Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the height of the top of their eyes.

Also, adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended.

WARNING

- Headrest removal/adjustment

• Do not operate the vehicle with the headrests removed.

Headrests can provide critical neck and head support in a crash.

• Do not adjust the headrest height while the vehicle is in motion. Driver may lose control of the vehicle.

3 11


Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the

■

Type A desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2) on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position (3).

OUM034011

■

Type B

OYFH034205

✽

NOTICE

If you recline the seatback towards the front with the headrest and seat cushion raised, the head rest may come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of the vehicle.

OUM034011L

■

Type C

OUMA036011

3 12

Removal and reinstallation

■

Type A

■

Type C

OUM034013L


3. Press the headrest release button

(3) or press the release button with slim tool (3) (for Type C and Type

D) while pulling the headrest up

(4).

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to ride in a seat with the headrest removed.

OUM034012

■

Type D

■

Type B

OUM034013

OUMA036012

To remove the headrest:

1. Recline the seatback (2) with the recline lever or switch (1).

2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.

3 13


■

Type A

■

Type C

■

Type B

OUM034014

■

Type D

OUM034015L

2. Recline the seatback (4) with the recline lever or switch (3).

3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate height.

OUM034015

OUMA036015

To reinstall the headrest :

1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the holes while pressing the release button (1) or pressing the release button with slim tool (1).

3 14


WARNING

- Headrest

Reinstallation

To reduce the risk of injury to the head or neck, always make sure the headrest is locked into position and adjusted properly after reinstalling.

Seatback pocket (if equipped)

WARNING

- Seatback pockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pockets.

In an accident they could come loose from the pocket and injure vehicle occupants.

OUM034083L

The seatback pocket is provided on the back of the front passenger’s and driver’s seatbacks.

3 15


Rear seat adjustment

Forward and backward

(2nd row seat)

Seatback angle (2nd row seat) Walk-in seat (2nd row passenger side, if equipped)

OUM034022/H

OUM034076L

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make sure the seat is locked securely by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

3 16

OUM034077L

To recline the seatback:

1. Pull up the seatback recline lever

(for 2nd row outboard seat) or strap (for 2nd row center or 3rd row seat).

2. Hold the lever or strap and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever or strap and make sure the seatback is locked in place. (The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock.)

OUM034023L

To get in or out of the 3rd row seat,

1. Route the seat belt webbing through the rear seat belt guide clip. After inserting the seat belt, tighten the belt webbing by pulling it up.

2. Pull up the walk-in lever (1) on the

2nd row seatback.


OUM034024L

3. Fold the 2nd row seatback and push the seat to the farthest forward position.

After getting in or out, slide the 2nd row seat to the farthest rearward position and pull the seatback firmly backward until it clicks into place.

Make sure that the seat is locked in place.

WARNING

Never attempt to adjust the 2nd row seat while the vehicle is moving or the seat is occupied as the seat may suddenly move and cause the passenger on the seat to be injured.

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle.

WARNING

- Objects

Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.

WARNING

Never allow passengers to sit on top of the folded down seatback while the vehicle is moving. This is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use. This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sudden stop.

3 17


■

2nd row seat

■

3rd row seat (if equipped)

To fold down the rear seatback

1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion, and insert the rear seat belt webbing in the guide to prevent the seat belt from being damaged.

2. Set the front seatback to the upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward.

3. Lower the rear headrests to the lowest position.

Turn off the rear seat warmer (if equipped) when you fold the 2nd row seatback.

OUM034036/OUM034022 OUM034037/OUM034035

3 18

■

2nd row seat

■

3rd row seat (if equipped)


4.Pull on the seatback folding lever or strap, then fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle. When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback.

5.To use the rear seat, lift and pull the seatback backward by pulling on the folding lever or strap.

Pull the seatback firmly until it clicks into place.

Make sure the seatback is locked in place.

6.Return the rear seat belt to the proper position.

OUM034025L/OUM034026L OUMA034027/OUMA034028

3 19


2nd row seat folding

(from outside, if equipped)

WARNING

- Rear seat folding

Do not fold the rear seats (2nd &

3rd row seats), if passengers, pets or luggage are in the rear seats.

It may cause injury or damage to passengers, pets or luggage.

To fold down the rear center seatback (for 2nd row seat)

OUMA034030

Pull the 2nd row seat back folding lever out.

The 2nd row seat back will be folded.

If you pull the left side lever (1) out, left side seat back and center seat back will be folded.

If you pull the right side lever (2) out, right side seat back will be folded.

OUM034031L

1. Lower the rear headrests to the lowest position.

2. Push the center seatback folding lever up, then fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle.

When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback.

3 20


Remember to return the rear shoulder belts to their proper position. Routing the seat belt webbing through the rear seat belt guides will help keep the belts from being trapped behind or under the seats.

WARNING

- 2nd row center seat folding

• Do not fold the 2nd row center seat, if there are occupants in the 3rd row seats, as this may result in injury to occupants if the seat moves during a collision. If occupants in the 3rd row seats, fix the 2nd row center seat in its upright and locked position.

• The 2nd row center seat back does not lock into position when it is folded toward the front of the vehicle. If you use the 2nd row center seat back folding function to carry long objects, you should fix the long object to prevent it from being thrown about the vehicle in a collision and causing injury to vehicle occupants.

CAUTION -

Damaging rear seat belt buckles

When you fold the rear (2nd and/or 3rd row) seatback, insert the buckle in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion.

Doing so can prevent the buckle from being damaged by the rear seatback.

WARNING

- Cargo

Do not place objects in the rear

(2nd and/or 3rd row) seats, since they cannot be properly secured and may hit the front seat occupants in a collision.

Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from being thrown around in the vehicle in a collision causing injuries to vehicle occupants.

OUN026140

WARNING

- 3rd row seat

3rd row occupants should always remain in the center of the seat cushion so the occupants head is protected by the headrest.

If not, the tailgate may hit the occupant's head, which could cause injury.

3 21


Armrest (2nd row seat)

OUM034021L

To use the armrest, pull it forward from the seatback.

Headrest (for rear seat)

*

*

* : if equipped

OHM038049N

The rear seat(s) is equipped with headrests in all the seating positions for the occupant's safety and comfort.

The headrests not only provide comfort for passengers, but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a collision.

For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height as the center of gravity of an occupant's head.

Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the height of the top of their eyes.

Also adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended.

3 22


Adjusting the height up and down

(for 2nd row seats)

■

Outside

To lower the headrest :

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the headrest support

2. Lower the headrest to the desired position (3).

Removal and reinstallation

(for 2nd row seats)

■

Outside

■

Center

OUM034019L

■

Center

OUM034087L

OUMA034092

To raise the headrest :

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

OUMA034093

3 23


To remove the headrest :

1. Raise it as far as it can go then press the release button (1) while pulling the headrest up (2).

3rd row headrest (if equipped)

To reinstall the headrest :

1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1).

2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.

OUMA034091

WARNING

• Make sure the headrest locks in position after adjusting it to properly protect the occupants.

• After installing the headrest, make sure that it is installed in the right direction.

A headrest installed reversely could increase whiplash injury during rear impact.

OXM039061N

The headrest will fold down automatically when folding the seatback.

To fold the headrest manually :

Pull the strap.

To unfold the headrest :

Raise the headrest manually.

Always be sure the headrest has locked into position after you return the seatback.

3 24


SEAT BELTS

Seat belt restraint system

• For maximum restraint system protection, the seat belts must always be used whenever the vehicle is moving. A properly positioned shoulder belt should be positioned midway over your shoulder across your collarbone.

• Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. See child restraint system section for further discussion.

WARNING

- Twisted seat belt

Make sure your seat belt is not twisted when worn. A twisted seat belt may not properly protect you in an accident and could even cut into your body.

WARNING

- Shoulder Belt

• Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back. An improperly positioned shoulder belt cannot protect the occupant in a crash.

• Always wear both the shoulder portion and lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING

- Damaged seat belt

Replace the entire seat belt assembly if any part of the webbing or hardware is damage as you can no longer be sure that a damage seat belt will provide protection in a crash.

Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body, and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have been designed.

A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer.

Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water. The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.

3 25


• No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.

• When you fasten the seat belt, be careful not to latch the seat belt in buckles of other seat. It's very dangerous and you may not be protected by the seat belt properly.

• Do not unfasten the seat belt and do not fasten and unfasten the seat belt repeatedly while driving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, serious injury, or property damage.

• When fastening the seat belt, make sure that the seat belt does not pass over objects that are hard or can break easily.

WARNING

- Seat belt buckle

Do not allow foreign material

(gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to obstruct the seat belt buckle.

This may prevent the seat belt from fastening securely.

Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)

1GQA2083

The driver's seat belt warning light and chime will activate according to the following table when the ignition switch is in "ON" position.

3 26


Conditions

Seat Belt

Vehicle

Speed

Unbuckled

Buckled

Below

5 km/h

Buckled

→

Unbuckled

5 km/h ~

10 km/h

Above

10 km/h

Unbuckled

Above

10 km/h

↓

Below

5 km/h

Warning Pattern

Light-Blink

Chime-

Sound

6 seconds

6 seconds None

6 seconds None

6 seconds

6 sec. on / 24 sec. off

(11 times)

6 seconds *

↓

Stop * 2

1

* 1 Warning pattern repeats 11 times with an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's seat belt is buckled, the light will stop within 6 seconds and chime will stop immediately.

* 2 The light will stop within 6 seconds and chime will stop immediately.

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system with emergency locking retractor

B180A01NF-1

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab

(1) into the buckle (2). There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

B200A02NF

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

✽

NOTICE

If you are not able to pull out the seat belt from the retractor, firmly pull the belt out and release it. Then you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

3 27


Front seat

OLM039026

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the 3 positions for maximum comfort and safety.

The height of the adjusting seat belt should not be too close to your neck.

The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder near the door and not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button

(2).

Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position.

WARNING

- Shoulder belt positioning

Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face.

WARNING

- Seat belt replacement

Replace your seat belts after being in an accident. Failure to replace seat belts after an accident could leave you with damaged seat belts that will not provide protection in the event of another collision.

Seat belts - Front passenger and rear seat 3-point system with combination locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

Combination retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat positions to help accommodate the installation of child restraint systems.

Although a combination retractor is also installed in the front passenger seat position, it is strongly recommended that children always be seated in the rear seat. NEVER place any infant restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.

This type of seat belt combines the features of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There will be an audible

"click" when the tab locks into the buckle. When not securing a child restraint, the seat belt operates in the same way as the driver's seat belt

(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).

3 28


It automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips.

When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system, the seat belt operation changes to allow the belt to retract, but not to extend

(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).

Refer to “Using a child restraint system” in this section.

✽

NOTICE

Although the combination retractor provides the same level of protection for seated passengers in either emergency or automatic locking modes, have the seated passengers use the emergency locking feature for improved convenience. The automatic locking function is intended to facilitate child restraint installation. To convert from the automatic locking feature to the emergency locking operation mode, allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully retract.

CAUTION

Do NOT fold down the left portion of the rear seat back when the rear center seat belt is buckled. ALWAYS UNBUCKLE the rear center seat belt before folding down the left portion of the rear seat back. If the rear center seat belt is buckled when the left portion of the rear seat back is folded down, distortion and damage to the top portion of the seat back and seat belt garnish may result, causing the seat back to lock into the folded down position.

B210A01NF-1

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing the release button (1) on the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

3 29


Stowing the rear seat belt

■

2nd row seat

■

2nd row seat

■

3rd row seat

OUM034036

■

3rd row seat

OUM034037

OUM034022

The rear seat belt buckles can be stowed in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion when not in use.

Routing the seat belt webbing through the rear seat belt guides will help keep the belts from being trapped behind or under the seats.

After inserting the seat belt, tighten the belt webbing by pulling it up.

CAUTION

- Seatbelt Guide

Remove the seat belt from the guides before using. If you pull on the seat belt when it is stored in the guides, it may damage the guides and/or belt webbing.

OUM034035

3 30


Pre-tensioner seat belt

OXMA033101

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts (retractor pretensioner and

EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)).

The pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated, when a frontal collision is severe enough, together with the air bags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor may lock into position. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.

(1) Retractor Pretensioner

The purpose of the retractor pretensioner is to make sure that the shoulder belts fit in tightly against the occupant's upper body in certain frontal collisions.

(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)

The purpose of the EFD is to make sure that the pelvis belts fit in tightly against the occupant's lower body in certain frontal collisions.

If the system senses excessive tension on the driver or passenger's seat belt when the pre-tensioner system activates, the load limiter inside the retractor pre-tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt.

3 31


ODMESA2024

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in the illustration:

(1) SRS air bag warning light

(2) Retractor pre-tensioner assembly

(3) SRS control module

(4) Emergency fastening device

(EFD)

WARNING -

Skin Irritation

Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated. The fine dust from the pre-tensioner activation may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods.

✽

NOTICE

• Both the driver's and front passenger's seat belt pre-tensioner system may be activated not only in certain frontal collision but also in certain side collisions or rollovers, if the vehicle is equipped with a side or curtain air bag.

• Because the sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt, the

SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position, and then it should turn off.

3 32


If the pre-tensioner seat belt system are not working properly, this warning light will illuminate even if there is not a malfunction with, the SRS air bag. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, or if it remains illuminated after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag system as soon as possible.

WARNING

- Hot pretensioner

Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated. When the pre-tensioner seat belt mechanism fires during a collision the pretensioner becomes hot and can burn you.

Pre-tensioners are designed to operate only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced. If the pre-tensioner must be replaced, contact an authorized

Kia dealer.

Seat belt precautions

Infant or small child

You should be aware of the specific requirements in your country. Child and/or infant seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat.

For more information about the use of these restraints, refer to “Child restraint system” in this section.

✽

NOTICE

Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the requirements of the safety standards of your country. Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets the safety standards of your country.

The restraint must be appropriate for your child's height and weight. Check the label on the child restraint for this information. Refer to “Child restraint system” in this section.

3 33


Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should be fastened and snugged on the hips and as low as possible. Check if the belt fits periodically. A child's squirming could put the belt out of position. Children are given the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. If a larger child (over age

12) must be seated in the front seat, the child should be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position.

Children age 12 and under should be restrained securely in the rear seat.

NEVER place a child age 12 and under in the front seat. NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child’s neck or face, try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck they need to be returned to a child restraint system.

Restraint of pregnant women

Pregnant women should wear lap/shoulder belt assemblies whenever possible according to specific recommendations by their doctors.

The lap portion of the belt should be worn AS SECURELY AND LOW AS

POSSIBLE.

WARNING

- Small children

Do not allow small children to ride in the vehicle without an appropriate child restraint system. If the shoulder belt comes in contact with your child's neck or face your child is too small to ride in the vehicle. In a crash the seat belt will inflict injury to your child's neck, throat and face.

WARNING

- Pregnant women

Pregnant women must never place the lap portion of the seat belt above or on the abdomen where the fetus is located. The force of the seat belt during a collision will crush the fetus.

3 34


Injured person

A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported.

When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for recommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the front and rear seats should be in an upright position when the vehicle is moving.

A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front and rear seats are in a reclined position.

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING

- Pinched seat belt

Make sure that the webbing and/or buckle does not get caught or pinched in the rear seat when returning the rear seatback to its upright position.

A caught or pinched webbing/ buckle may become damaged and could fail during a collision or sudden stop.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts

The entire in-use seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to an authorized Kia dealer.

3 35


CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Children riding in the vehicle should sit in the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger children not in a child restraint should use one of the seat belts provided.

You should be aware of the specific requirements in your country. Child and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system that meets the requirements of the safety standards of your country.

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or by a tether anchor and/or LATCH anchors (if equipped).

Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured. For small children and babies, a child seat or infant seat must be used. Before buying a particular child restraint system, make sure it fits your vehicle seat and seat belts, and fits your child.

Follow all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child restraint system.

WARNING

- Restraint location

Never install a child or infant seat on the front passenger's seat. A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflating airbag.

WARNING

- Hot child restraint

A child restraint system can become very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle on a sunny day.

Be sure to check the seat cover, buckles and latches before placing a child in the restraint system.

When the child restraint system is not in use, store it in the luggage area or fasten it with a seat belt so that it will not be thrown forward in case of a sudden stop or an accident.

3 36


WARNING

- Holding children

Never hold a child in your arms or lap when riding in a vehicle.

The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the car’s interior.

Always use a child restraint system which is appropriate for your child's height and weight.

WARNING

- Seat belt use

Do not use one seat belt for two occupants at the same time.

This will eliminate any safety benefit provided by the seat belt to the occupants.

Using a child restraint system

Rearward-facing child restraint system

CRS09

Forward-facing child restraint system

WARNING

- Unattended

Children

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. The car can heat up very quickly, resulting in serious bodily injury or death to the child in the vehicle.

OUN026150

For small children and babies, the use of a child seat or infant seat is required. The child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3 37


For safety reasons, we recommend that the child restraint system be used in the rear seats.

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, because of the danger an inflating passenger-side air bag could impact the rear-facing child restraint and kill the child.

Since all passenger seat belts move freely under normal conditions and only lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency lock mode), you must manually change these seat belts to the auto lock mode to secure a child restraint.

If the seat belt does not operate as described in this section, have the system checked immediately by your authorized Kia dealer.

Placing a passenger seat belt into the auto lock mode

E2MS103005

The auto lock mode will help prevent the normal movement of the child in the vehicle from causing the seat belt to loosen and compromise the child restraint system. To secure a child restraint system, use the following procedure.

OEN036101

To install a child restraint system on the outboard or center rear seats, do the following:

1. Place the child restraint system in the seat and route the lap/shoulder belt around or through the restraint, following the restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click” sound.

Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency.

3 38


If the vehicle headrest prevents proper installation of a child seat (as described in the child seat system manual), the headrest of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.

OEN036102

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat belt all the way out. When the shoulder portion of the seat belt is fully extended, it will shift the retractor to the “Auto Lock” (child restraint) mode.

OEN036103

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of the seat belt to retract and listen for an audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound. This indicates that the retractor is in the “Auto Lock” mode. If no distinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

3 39


OEN036104

5. Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the child restraint system while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraint system to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place. If it is not, release the seat belt and repeat steps 2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is in the “Auto Lock” mode by attempting to pull more of the seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is in the “Auto

Lock” mode.

The lap/shoulder belt automatically returns to the “emergency lock mode” whenever the belt is allowed to retract fully. Therefore, the preceding seven steps must be followed each time a child restraint is installed.

To remove the child restraint, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the restraint and allow the seat belt to retract fully.

WARNING

- Auto lock mode

Set the retractor to Automatic

Lock mode when installing any child restraint system. If the retractor is not in the Automatic

Locking mode, the child restraint can move when your vehicle turns or stops suddenly.

When the seat belt is allowed to retract to its fully stowed position, the retractor will automatically switch from the “Auto Lock” mode to the emergency lock mode for normal adult usage.

3 40


Securing a child restraint seat with tether anchor system

■

2nd row seat

WARNING

- Tether strap

Never mount more than one child restraint to a single tether or to a single lower anchorage point.

The increased load caused by multiple seats may cause the tethers or anchorage points to break.

OUM034038

Child restraint hook holders are located on the back of the rear cushions.

OUM034039L

1.Route the child restraint seat strap over the seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable headrests, route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback. In case of interference between the child restraint seat and the headrest remove the particular head restraint for better fitment of the child restraint seat.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the appropriate child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the child restraint seat.

Check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Incorrectly fitted child restraints may swing, twist, tip or separate causing death or serious injury.

3 41


Securing a child restraint seat with child seat lower anchor system

Lower Anchor

Position Indicator

WARNING

- Unused rear seatbelts

Always fasten the seatbelts behind the child restraint seat when they are not used to secure the child seat. Failure to do so may result in child strangulation.

OXM039035

Some child seat manufacturers make child restraint seats that are labeled as LATCH or LATCH-compatible child restraint seats. LATCH stands for "Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children". These seats include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two

LATCH anchors at specific seating positions in your vehicle. This type of child restraint seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat in the rear seats.

Lower Anchor

OUM034078L

Child restraint symbols are located on the left and right 2nd row seat backs to indicate the position of the lower anchors for child restraints.

Install the child restraint seat fully rearward against the seatback with the seatback reclined two positions from the most upright latched position.

3 42

LATCH anchors have been provided in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are located in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations are shown in the illustration. There is no LATCH anchor provided for the center rear seating position.

The LATCH anchors are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the 2nd row seat left and right outboard seating positions.

Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install child restraint seats with LATCH or

LATCH-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the LATCH child restraint, assure that the seat is properly attached to the LATCH and tether anchors.

Also, test the child restraint seat before you place the child in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place.

WARNING

- LATCH lower anchors

Never attempt to attach a

LATCH equipped seat in the center seating position. LATCH lower anchors are only to be used with the left and right rear outboard seating positions. You may damage the anchors or the anchors may fail and break in a collision.


3 43


AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(1) Driver’s front air bag

(2) Passenger’s front air bag

(3) Side air bag

(4) Curtain air bag

Even in vehicles with air bags, you and your passengers must always wear the safety belts provided in order to minimize the risk and severity of injury in the event of a collision or rollover.

3 44

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OXMA032101


How does the air bag system operate?

• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if necessary) only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or START position.

• The appropriate air bags inflate instantly in the event of a serious frontal collision or side collision in order to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which the air bags will inflate.

Generally, air bags are designed to inflate based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/ inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle hits in the collision. The determining factors are not limited to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant.

It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an accident.

It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.

• In addition to inflating in serious side collisions, side and/or curtain air bags will inflate if the sensing system detects a rollover.

• When a rollover is detected, side and/or curtain air bags will remain inflated longer to help provide protection from ejection, especially when used in conjunction with the seat belts.

• In order to help provide protection, the air bags must inflate rapidly.

The speed of the air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time in which to inflate the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life-threatening injuries and is thus a necessary part of the air bag design.

However, air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal of force.

• There are even circumstances under which contact with the steering wheel or passenger air bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the steering wheel or passenger air bag.

3 45


WARNING

- Airbag inflation

Sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining comfortable control of your vehicle. A distance of at least 10" from your chest to the steering wheel is recommended. Failure to do so can result in airbag inflation injuries to the driver.

Noise and smoke

When inflated, the air bags make a loud noise and leave smoke and powder in the air inside the vehicle.

This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing due to the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. Open your doors and/or

windows as soon as possible after impact in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder.

Though smoke and powder are nontoxic, it may cause irritation to the skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the case, wash and rinse with cold water immediately and consult a doctor if the symptom persists.

WARNING

- Hot components

Do not touch the air bag storage area's internal components immediately after airbag inflation. The air bag related parts in the steering wheel, instrument panel and the roof rails above the front and rear doors are very hot. Hot components can result in burn injuries.

3 46


Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger’s seat.

1JBH3051

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the air bag deploys, it would impact the rear-facing child restraint, causing serious or fatal injury.

In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.

WARNING

- Air bag deployment

When children are seated in the rear outboard seats of a vehicle equipped with side and/or curtain air bags, install the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible.

Inflation of the side and/or curtain air bags could impact the child.

Air bag warning light

W7-147

The purpose of air bag warning light in your instrument panel is to alert you of a potential problem with your air bag system, which could include your side and/or curtain air bags used for rollover protection.

3 47


SRS components and functions

(10) PASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF” indicator (Front passenger’s seat only)

(11) Occupant detection system

(Front passenger’s seat only)

(12) Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buckle sensors

(13) Emergency fastening device

(EFD)

OXM033200L

The SRS consists of the following components:

(1) Driver's front air bag module

(2) Passenger's front air bag module

(3) Side air bag modules

(4) Curtain air bag modules

(5) Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies

(6) Air bag warning light

(7) SRS control module (SRSCM)/

Rollover sensor

(8) Front impact sensors

(9) Side impact sensors

The SRSCM continually monitors all

SRS components while the ignition switch is ON to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment.

W7-147

If the air bag warning light is illuminated for more than 6 seconds after the ignition is turned on, or of it illuminates during vehicle operation, an

SRS component may not be functioning properly and you should have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

3 48


If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction in the air bag system. Have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the air bag system as soon as possible.

• The light does not turn on briefly when you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the ignition switch is in ON position.

Driver’s front air bag (1)

B240B01L

The front air bag modules are located both in the center of the steering wheel and in the front passenger's panel above the glove box. When the

SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags.

Driver’s front air bag (2)

B240B02L

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the air bags.

3 49


Driver’s front air bag (3) Passenger’s front air bag

WARNING

- Flying objects

Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door and the front seat.

Such objects may become dangerous projectiles if the side airbag inflates.

B240B03L

A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other controls.

WARNING

- Air bag obstructions

Do not install or place any accessories on the steering wheel, instrument panel, or on the front passenger's panel above the glove box in a vehicle. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles if the air bag deploys.

B240B05L

• If an air bag deploys, there may be a loud noise followed by a fine dust released in the vehicle. These conditions are normal and are not hazardous - the air bags are packed in this fine powder. The dust generated during air bag deployment may cause skin or eye irritation as well as aggravate asthma for some persons. Always wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly with cold water and a mild soap after an accident in which the air bags were deployed.

3 50


• The SRS can function only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on after illuminating for about 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or after the engine is started, comes on while driving, the SRS is not working properly. If this occurs, have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

✽

NOTICE

Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the ignition switch.

Never remove or replace the air bag related fuse(s) when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Failure to heed this warning will cause the

SRS air bag warning light to illuminate.

Occupant Detection System

(ODS)

OUMA034090

Your vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system in the front passenger's seat.

The occupant detection system is designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated front passenger and determine if the passenger's front air bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. Only the front passenger front air bag is controlled by the Occupant

Detection System.

Do not put anything in front of the passenger air bag indicator.

3 51


Main components of the occupant detection system

• A detection device located within the front passenger seat cushion.

• An electronic system which determines whether the passenger air bag systems should be activated or deactivated.

• A indicator light located on the instrument panel which illuminates the words PASSENGER AIR BAG

“OFF” indicating the front passenger air bag system is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag warning light is interconnected with the occupant detection system.

If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person that the system determines to be of appropriate size, and he/she sits properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor), the PASSENGER

AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will turn off and the front passenger's air bag will be able to inflate, if necessary, in frontal crashes.

You will find the PASSENGER AIR

BAG “OFF” indicator on the center facia panel. This system detects the conditions 1~4 in the following table and activates or deactivates the front passenger air bag based on these conditions.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly (sitting upright with the seat in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended, feet on the floor, and wearing the safety belt properly) for the most effective protection by the air bag and the safety belt.

• The ODS (Occupant Detection

System) may not function properly if the passenger takes actions which can defeat the detection system.

These include:

(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.

(2) Leaning against the door or center console.

(3) Sitting towards the sides or the front of the seat.

(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or resting them on other locations which reduce the passenger weight on the front seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.

(6) Reclining the seat back.

3 52


Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system

Devices

Condition detected by the occupant detection system

1. Adult or child* 1

2. Child restraint system*

3. Unoccupied

4. There is a malfunction in the system

2

Indicator/Warning light

"PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF" indicator light

Off

SRS warning light

Off

On Off

On Off

Off On

Front passenger air bag

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

Activated

* 1 : The ODS system uses a field to evaluate a person's size to determine whether the air bag should deploy. It is possible for a child to be detected and activate the ODS, thus allowing the air bag to deploy. To maximize safety, do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat.

* 2 : Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

✽

NOTICE

Do not modify or replace the front passenger seat. Don't place anything on or attach anything such as a blanket, front seat cover or after market seat heater to the front passenger seat. This can adversely affect the occupant detection system.

WARNING

- ODS System

Riding in an improper position adversely affects the Occupant

Detection System and may result in the deactivation of the front passenger airbag. It is important for the driver to instruct the passenger as to the proper seating instructions as contained in this manual.

(Continued)

3 53


(Continued)

OVQ036013N

- Never put a heavy load or an active electronic device on the front passenger seat or seatback pocket.

1KMN3663

- Never sit with hips shifted towards the front of the seat.

1KMN3665

- Never place feet on the dashboard.

3 54

OVQ036014N

- Never place feet on the front passenger seatback.

1KMN3662

- Never excessively recline the front passenger seatback.

1KMN3664

- Never lean on the door or center console.

- Never sit on one side of the front passenger seat.


Proper position

B990A01O

When an adult is seated in the front passenger seat, if the PASSENGER

AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and ask the passenger to sit properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). Restart the engine and have the person remain in that position. This will allow the system to detect the person and to enable the passenger air bag.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear seat.

WARNING

- “AIR BAG

OFF” light

Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front seat when the

PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is illuminated, because the air bag will not deploy in the event of a crash.

The driver must instruct the passenger to reposition himself in the seat.

Failure to properly position yourself may lead to air bag deactivation resulting in air bag non-deployment in a collision. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG

“OFF” indicator remains illuminated after the passenger repositions themselves properly and the car is restarted, it is recommended that passenger move to the rear seat because the passenger's front air bag will not deploy.

✽

NOTICE

The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or after the engine is started. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the occupant detection sensor will then classify the front passenger after several more seconds.

3 55


• Even though your vehicle is equipped with the occupant detection system, never install a child restraint system in the front passenger's seat. A deploying air bag can forcefully strike a child resulting in serious injuries or death. Any child age 12 and under should ride in the rear seat. Children too large for child restraints should use the available lap/shoulder belts. No matter what type of crash, children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat.

• If the PASSENGER AIR BAG

“OFF” indicator is illuminated when the front passenger's seat is occupied by an adult and he/she sits properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor), have that person sit in the rear seat.

Any child age 12 and under should ride in the rear seat. Children too large for child restraints should use the available lap/shoulder belts. No matter what type of crash, children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat.

WARNING

- Replacement

/ modifications

The front passenger seat, dashboard or door should not be replaced except by an authorized

Kia dealer using original Kia parts designed for this vehicle and model. Any other such replacement or modification could adversely affect the operation of the occupant detection system and your advanced air bags.

If the occupant detection system is not working properly, the SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate because the passenger's front air bag is connected with the occupant detection system. If there is a malfunction of the occupant detection system, the PAS-

SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will not illuminate and the passenger's front air bag will inflate in frontal impact crashes even if there is no occupant in the front passenger's seat.

3 56


Driver's and passenger's front air bag

■

Driver’s front air bag

Your vehicle is equipped with an

Advanced Supplemental Restraint

(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating position.

The indication of the system's presence are the letters "AIR BAG" located on the air bag pad cover on the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.

These sensors provide the ability to control the SRS deployment based on whether or not the seat belts are fastened, and how severe the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the air bag inflation with two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts.

A second stage level is provided for more severe impacts.

■

Passenger’s front air bag

OUMA034041

OUM034042

The SRS consists of air bags installed under the pad covers in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel above the glove box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity. The SRS uses sensors to gather information about the driver's and front passenger's seat belt usage and impact severity.

The seat belt buckle sensors determine if the driver and front passenger's seat belts are fastened.

The passenger’s front air bag is designed to help reduce the injury of children sitting close to the instrument panel in low speed collisions.

However, children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat.

According to the impact severity and seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS

Control Module) controls the air bag inflation. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

3 57


Additionally, your vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system in the front passenger's seat. The occupant detection system detects the presence of a passenger in the front passenger's seat and will turn off the front passenger's air bag under certain conditions. For more detail, see

"Occupant detection system" in this chapter.

Modification to the seat structure can cause the air bag to deploy at a different level than should be provided.

Manufacturers are required by government regulations to provide a contact point concerning modifications to the vehicle for persons with disabilities, which modifications may affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag system. However, Kia does not endorse nor will it support any changes to any part or structure of the vehicle that could affect the advanced air bag system, including the occupant detection system.

✽

NOTICE

The front passenger seat, dashboard or door should not be replaced except by an authorized Kia dealer using original Kia parts designed for this vehicle and model. Any other such replacement or modification could adversely affect the operation of the occupant detection system and your advanced air bags.

Advanced air bags are combined with pre-tensioner seat belts to help provide enhanced occupant protection in frontal crashes. Front air bags are not intended to deploy in collisions in which sufficient protection can be provided by the pre-tensioner seat belt.

Front air bags are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. However, when frontal deployment threshold is satisfied at side-impact, front air bags may deploy. In addition, front air bags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deployment threshold.

3 58


WARNING

- SRS Wiring

Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring or other components of the SRS system.

Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental deployment of the air bags or by rendering the

SRS inoperative.

WARNING

- No attaching objects

No objects (such as crash pad cover, cellular phone holder, cup holder, perfume or stickers) should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, windshield glass, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box. Such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy. Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself.

Side air bag

OUMA034095

• The side air bags are designed to deploy during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. However, when side deployment threshold is satisfied at frontimpact, side air bags may deploy.

• The side air bags may deploy on the side of the impact or on both sides.

• The side and/or curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle will deploy if a rollover or possible rollover is detected.

• The side air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

OUM034044

Your vehicle is equipped with a side air bag in each front seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone.

WARNING

- Unexpected deployment

Avoid impact to the side impact airbag sensor when the ignition switch is ON to prevent unexpected deployment of the side air bag.

3 59


• The side air bag is supplemental to the driver's and the passenger's seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in operation.

• For best protection from the side air bag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side air bag, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passenger's arms and hands should be placed on their laps.

WARNING

- Deployment

Do not install any accessories including seat covers, on the side or near the side air bag as this may affect the deployment of the side air bags.

• If seat or seat cover is damaged, have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer. Inform the dealer that your vehicle is equipped with side air bags and an occupant detection system.

WARNING

- Flying objects

Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door and the front seat.

Such objects may become dangerous projectiles if the side airbag inflates.

WARNING


• Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar.

• Do not place any objects between the door and the seat. They may become dangerous projectiles if the side air bag inflates.

• Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side air bags.

3 60


Curtain air bag

OUM034045

OUM034046

Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors.

They are designed to help protect occupants in certain side impacts and to help prevent them from ejecting out of the vehicle as a result of a rollover, especially when the seatbelts are also in use.

• The curtain air bags are designed to deploy during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. However, when side deployment threshold is satisfied at frontimpact, side air bags may deploy.

• The curtain air bags may deploy on the side of the impact or on both sides.

• Also, the curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle will deploy in certain rollover situations.

• The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies against the doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side impact and/or curtain air bags.

✽

NOTICE

Never try to open or repair any components of the side and curtain air bag system. This should only be done by an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING


• Do not place any objects over the air bag. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar, roof side rail.

• Do not hang hard or breakable objects on the clothes hanger.

3 61


Why didn’t my air bag go off in a collision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag)

There are many types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection.

These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts.

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module/

Rollover sensor

(2) Front impact sensor

OUMA034047/OUM034048/OUMA034049/OUM034050/OUM034051

(3) Side impact sensor

(4) Side pressure sensor

3 62


WARNING

- Air bag sensors

• Do not hit or allow any objects to impact the locations where air bags or sensors are installed.

This may cause unexpected air bag deployment, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

• If the installation location or angle of the sensors is altered in any way, the air bags may deploy when they should not or they may not deploy when they should.

Therefore, do not try to perform maintenance on or around the air bag sensors.

Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.

Problems may arise if the sensor installation angles are changed due to the deformation of the front bumper, front end module, body or front doors where side collision sensors are installed. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.

Installing bumper guards (or side step or running board) or replacing a bumper (or front door module) with non-genuine parts may adversely affect your vehicle’s collision and air bag deployment performance.

Air bag inflation conditions

OUM034052

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision.

3 63


OUM034053

OUM034054

Side and/or curtain air bags

Side and/or curtain air bags are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the strength, speed or angles of impact resulting from a side impact collision.

Also, the side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate when a rollover is detected by a rollover sensor.

Although the front air bags (driver’s and front passenger’s air bags) are designed to inflate in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient frontal force in another type of impact. sides and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions. They may inflate in other types of collisions where a side force is detected by the sensors. Side air bag and/or curtain air bags may also inflate where rollover sensors indicate the possibility of a rollover occurring (even if none actually occurs) or in other situations, including when the vehicle is tilted while being towed. Even where side and/or curtain air bags would not provide impact protection in a rollover, however, they will deploy to prevent ejection of occupants, especially those who are restrained with seat belts.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment.

3 64


Air bag non-inflation conditions

OUM034055

• In certain low-speed collisions the air bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts in such collisions.

OUM034056

• Air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit.

OUM034057

• Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions, because occupants move to the direction of the collision, and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.

3 65


1VQA2089

• In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags.

OUM034058

• Just before impact, drivers often brake heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to “ride” under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance.

Air bags may not inflate in this

"under-ride" situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly reduced by such “under-ride” collisions.

OUM034059

• Front air bags may not inflate in all rollover accidents where the

SRSCM indicates that the front air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.

3 66


OUM034060

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenancefree and so there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on, have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel, the front passenger’s panel, front seats and roof rails must be performed by an authorized Kia dealer. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.

For cleaning the air bag pad covers, use only a soft, dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water.

Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deployment of the system.

If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. An authorized Kia dealer knows these precautions and can give you the necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal injury.

3 67


WARNING

- Tampering with SRS

Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system.

Doing so could result in the accidental inflation of the air bags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.

Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicle's air bag system.

Air bag warning label

OUM034094C

WARNING

- Towing Vehicle

Always have the ignition off when your vehicle is being towed. The side air bags may inflate if the vehicle is tilted such as when being towed because of the rollover sensors in the vehicle.

OUMA034061

Air bag warning labels, some required by the Canada Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS), are attached to the sunvisor to alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.

3 68

Features of your vehicle

Folding key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-22

• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-23

• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

• Child-protector rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Liftgate (for manual liftgate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

• Opening the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

• Closing the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

• Emergency liftgate safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Power liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

• Opening the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

• Closing the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

• Smart power liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

• Emergency liftgate safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

• Emergency fuel filler lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

• Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

• Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

4

4

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

• Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

• Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

• Outside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

• Instrument cluster control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

• LCD display control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75

• Transaxle shift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

• Icy Road Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

• LCD modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

Trip modes (trip computer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

• Trip Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

• Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

• Digital speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

• One time driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

• Turn by turn mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

• ASCC/LDWS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

• A/V mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

• Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

• User settings mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86

• Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

• Indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105

Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109

• Operation of the rear parking assist system. . . . . . 4-109

• Non-operational conditions of rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110

• Rear parking assist system precautions . . . . . . . . . 4-111

• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112

Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113

360° camera monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

• Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

• High beam operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117

• Turn signals and lane change signals. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118

• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119

• Check headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119

• Headlight leveling device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120

• AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) . . . . . . . . 4-120

Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121

• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121

• Front windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123

• Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . 4-124

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

• Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126

• Luggage lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

• Headlight (headlamp) escort function. . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

• Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

• Pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

• 3rd row air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137

• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139

• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . 4-139

Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141

• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-143

• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

• 3 rd row air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149

• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150

• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152

• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . 4-153

Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-154

• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154

• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155

• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156

Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158

Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159

• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159

• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159

• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160

• Luggage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160

Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161

• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161

• Bottle holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162

• Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162

• Seat cooler (air ventilation seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163

• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164

• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164

4

4

• AC inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165

• USB charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167

• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168

• Floor mat anchor (s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168

• Side curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169

• Luggage net holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169

Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171

• Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171

Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172

• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172

• Steering wheel remote controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173

• AUX, USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174

• How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175

• Using the USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179

• Using iPod ® device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180

Features of your vehicle

FOLDING KEY

Record your key number

The key code number is stamped on the key code tag attached to the key set.

Should you lose your keys, this number will enable an authorized Kia dealer to duplicate the keys easily. Remove the key code tag and store it in a safe place. Also, record the key code number and keep it in a safe place.(not in the vehicle)

Key operations

OUM045429MX

• Used to start the engine.

• Used to lock and unlock the doors.

• Used to lock and unlock the glove box.

• To unfold the key, press the release button then the key will unfold automatically. To fold the key, fold the key manually while pressing the release button.

CAUTION

Do not fold the key without pressing the release button.

This may damage the key.

WARNING -

Aftermarket key

Use only Kia original parts for the ignition key in your vehicle.

If an aftermarket key is used, the ignition switch may not return to ON after START. If this happens, the starter will continue to operate causing damage to the starter motor and possible fire due to excessive current in the wiring.

4 5


WARNING

- Ignition key

(smart key)

Never leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children.

Leaving children unattended in a vehicle with a manual ignition key or a smart key is dangerous. Children copy adults and they could place the key in the ignition switch or press the start button. The key would enable children to operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious bodily injury or death.

Door Lock (1)

OXMA043317

1. Close all doors, engine hood and liftgate.

2. Press the lock button(1).

3. All doors and liftgate will lock. The hazard warning lights will blink once.

4. If the lock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds, the hazard warning lights will blink and the horn will sound once.

5. Make sure that doors are locked by checking the door lock button inside or pulling the outside door handle.

Door Unlock (2)

1. Press the unlock button(2).

2. The driver's door will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

3. Press the unlock button(2) twice within 4 seconds and all doors and liftgate will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

✽

NOTICE

You can activate or deactivate the

Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to

"User settings" in this chapter.

4 6


Liftgate unlock (3)

The liftgate is unlocked if the button is pressed for more than 1 second.

Also, once the liftgate is opened and then closed, the liftgate will be locked automatically.

• For Power Liftgate Only:

The Power Liftgate will open if the button is pressed for more than 1 second. Also, once the liftgate is opened and then closed, the liftgate will be locked again automatically.

Panic (4)

The horn sounds and hazard warning lights flash for about 27 seconds if this button is pressed for more than

0.5 second. To stop the horn and lights, press any button on the transmitter.

If the power liftgate is switched ‘Off’ using the button in the overhead console, the liftgate unlock button will operate to unlock the liftgate as described above.

Transmitter precautions

• The transmitter will not work if any of following occur:

- The ignition key is in the ignition switch.

tance limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).

- The battery in the transmitter is weak.

- Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.

- The weather is extremely cold.

- The transmitter is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio substation or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

For detailed information refer to the

"Power liftgate" in this chapter.

4 7


• When the transmitter does not work correctly, open and close the door with the ignition key. If you have a problem with the transmitter, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

• If the transmitter is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal could be blocked by your mobile phones normal operational signals.

This is especially important when the phone is active such as making and receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the transmitter and your mobile phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and always try to maintain an adequate distance between the two devices.

CAUTION

Keep the transmitter away from water or any liquid as it can become damaged and not function properly.

✽

NOTICE

If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

Battery replacement

OYDDCO2005

The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery which will normally last for several years. When replacement is necessary, use the following procedure.

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently pry open the transmitter center cover.

2. Replace the battery with a new battery (CR2032). When replacing the battery, make sure the battery is positioned correctly.

3. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.

4 8


For replacement transmitters, see an authorized Kia dealer for transmitter reprogramming.

• The transmitter is designed to give you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use your transmitter or replace the battery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

• Using the wrong battery can cause the transmitter to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery.

•

• To avoid damaging the transmitter, don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it to heat or sunlight.

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and may cause harm of to human health. Dispose of the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

CAUTION -

Transmitter damage

Do not drop, wet or expose the keyless entry system transmitter to heat or sunlight.

IC WARNING

This device complies with

Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer system

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer system to reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle use.

Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the ignition key and electronic devices inside the vehicle.

With the immobilizer system, whenever you insert your ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it to ON, the system verifies if the ignition key is valid.

If the key is determined to be valid, the engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid, the engine will not start.

4 9


To activate the immobilizer system:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid ignition key for your vehicle, the engine will not start.

✽

NOTICE

When starting the engine, do not use the key with other immobilizer keys around. Otherwise the engine may not start or may stop soon after it starts. Keep each key separate in order to avoid a starting malfunction.

To deactivate the immobilizer system:

Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position.

In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle.Your Immobilizer password is a customer unique password and should be kept confidential. Do not leave this number anywhere in your vehicle.

Do not put metal accessories near the ignition switch.

Metal accessories may interrupt the transponder signal and may prevent the engine from being started.

✽

NOTICE

If you need additional keys or lose your keys, contact an authorized

Kia dealer.

CAUTION

- Immobilizer damage

Do not expose your immobilizer system to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. This may damage your immobilizer.

CAUTION

- Immobilizer alterations

Do not change, alter or adjust the immobilizer system because it could cause the immobilizer system to malfunction.

4 10



Industry Canada licence-exempt

RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

✽

NOTICE

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

Limp home (override) procedure

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON position, if the immobilizer indicator ( ) goes off after blinking 5 times, your transponder equipped in the ignition key is out of order. You cannot start the engine without the limp home procedure. To start the engine, you have to input your password by using the ignition switch. Your password is only available from an authorized Kia dealership. Contact an authorized dealer for more information.

The following procedure is how to input your password of “2345” as an example.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

( position. The immobilizer indicator

) will blink 5 times and go off indicating the beginning of the limp home procedure.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position.

3. To enter the first digit (in this example “2”), turn the ignition switch to the ON and ACC position twice. Perform the same procedure for the next digits between 3 seconds and 10 seconds (for example, for “3”, turn the ignition

ON and ACC 3 times).

4. If all of the digits have been input successfully, you have to start the engine within 30 seconds. If you attempt to start the engine after 30 seconds, the engine will not start and you will have to input your password again.

After performing the limp home procedure, you have to see an authorized Kia dealer immediately to inspect and repair your ignition key or immobilizer system.

4 11


SMART KEY

Record your key number

The key code number is stamped on the bar code tag attached to the key set. Should you lose your keys, this number will enable an authorized Kia dealer to duplicate the keys easily. Remove the bar code tag and store it in a safe place. Also, record the code number and keep it in a safe and handy place, but not in the vehicle.

Smart key function

OUM045428MX

To remove the mechanical key, press and hold the release button(1) and remove the mechanical key (2).

To reinstall the mechanical key, put the key into the hole and push it until a click sound is heard.

With a smart key, you can lock or unlock a door (and Liftgate) and start the engine.

Refer to the following for more details.

WARNING

- Ignition key

(smart key)

Never leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children.

Leaving children unattended in a vehicle with a manual ignition key or a smart key is dangerous. Children copy adults and they could place the key in the ignition switch or press the start button. The key would enable children to operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious bodily injury or death.

4 12

Door Lock


Using the door handle button

- Carry the smart key.

- Close all doors, engine hood and liftgate.

- Press the button of the outside door handle.

- The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once.

- Make sure that doors are locked by pulling the outside door handle.

OYDDCO2004

OUM044001

✽

NOTICE

• The button will only operate when the smart key is within 0.7~1m

(28~40in.) from the outside door handle.

• Even though you press the outside door handle button, the doors will not lock and the chime will sound for 3 seconds if any of following occur:

- The smart key is in the vehicle.

- The engine start/stop button is in ACC or ON position.

- Any door except the liftgate is open.

Using the button on the smart key

- Close all doors, engine hood and liftgate.

- Press the lock button(1).

- The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once.

- Make sure that doors are locked by pulling the outside door handle.

4 13


Unlocking

Using the door handle button

1. Carry the smart key.

2. Press the button of the driver's outside door handle.

3. The driver’s door will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound two times.

4. Press the button twice within 4 seconds and all doors and the liftgate will unlock and the hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound two times.

✽

NOTICE

• The button will only operate when the smart key is within 0.7~1m

(28~40in.) from the outside door handle.

• When the smart key is recognized in the area of 0.7~1m (28~40in.) from the front outside door handle, other people can also open the doors.

• After unlocking the driver’s door or all doors, the door(s) will lock automatically unless the door is opened.


1. Press the unlock button(2) of the smart key.

2. The driver’s door will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound two times.

3. Press the unlock button(2) twice within 4 seconds and all doors and the liftgate will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound two times.

✽

NOTICE

After pressing the button, the doors will lock automatically unless any door is opened within 30 seconds.

✽

NOTICE

You can activate or deactivate the

Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to

"User settings" in this chapter.

Liftgate unlocking

Using the liftgate handle button

1. Carry the smart key.

2. Press the liftgate handle button.

3. When all doors are locked, the hazard warning lights will blink two times.

Once the liftgate is opened and then closed, the liftgate will lock automatically.

✽

NOTICE

The button will only operate when the smart key is within 0.7~1m

(28~40in.) from the liftgate handle.

4 14



1. Press the liftgate unlock button (3) for more than 1 second.

2. When all doors are locked, the hazard warning lights will blink two times.

• For Power Liftgate Only:

The Power Liftgate will open if the button is pressed for more than 1 second. Also, once the liftgate is opened and then closed, the liftgate will be locked again automatically.

Panic

1. Press the panic button (4) for more than 1 second.

2. The horn sounds and hazard warning light flash for about 27 seconds.

✽

NOTICE

To stop the horn and lights, press any button on the smart key.

Start-up

You can start the engine without inserting the key. For detailed information refer to the “Engine start/stop button” in chapter 5.

For detailed information refer to the

"Power liftgate" in this chapter.

4 15


Loss of the smart key

A maximum of 2 smart keys can be registered to a single vehicle.

If you happen to lose your smart key, you will not be able to start the engine. You should immediately take the vehicle and remaining key to your authorized Kia dealer(tow the vehicle, if necessary) to protect it from potential theft.

Smart key precautions

• The smart key will not work if any of the following occur:

- The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the smart key.

- The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cellular phone.

- Another vehicle’s smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.

• When the smart key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key and contact an authorized Kia dealer.

• If the smart key is in close proximity to your cell phone or smart phone, the signal from the smart key could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smart phone.

This is especially important when the phone is active such as making a call, receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the smart key and your cell phone or smart phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and maintain adequate distance between the two devices.

CAUTION -

Transmitter

Keep the transmitter away from water or any liquid as it can become damaged and not function properly.

✽

NOTICE

If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

4 16


Battery replacement

OUM045427MX

A smart key battery should last for several years, but if the smart key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one. If you are unsure how to use your smart key or replace the battery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

1. Remove the mechanical key.

2. Pry open the rear cover.

3. Replace the battery with a new battery (CR2032). When replacing the battery, make sure the battery is in the correct position.

4. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.

• The smart key is designed to give you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use or replace the battery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

• Using the wrong battery can cause the smart key to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery.

• To avoid damaging the smart key, don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it to heat or sunlight.

• An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

CAUTION -

Smart key damage

Do not drop, get wet or expose the smart key to heat or sunlight, or it will be damaged.

IC WARNING


Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

4 17


Smart key immobilizer system

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer system to reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle use.

Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the smart key and electronic devices inside the vehicle.

With the immobilizer system, whenever you turn the engine start/stop button to the ON position by pressing the button while carrying the smart key, it verifies if the smart key is valid or not.

If the key is determined to be valid, the engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid, the engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizer system:

Turn the engine start/stop button to the ON position by pressing the button while carrying the smart key.

In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle.

To activate the immobilizer system:

Turn the engine start/stop button to the OFF position. The immobilizer system activates automatically.

Without a valid smart key for your vehicle, the engine will not start.

✽

NOTICE

When starting the engine, do not use the key with other immobilizer keys around. Otherwise the engine may not start or may stop soon after it starts. Keep each key separate in order to avoid a starting malfunction.

✽

NOTICE

If you need additional keys or lose your keys, contact an authorized

Kia dealer.







✽

NOTICE

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

4 18


THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

Disarmed stage

Armed stage

Theft-alarm stage

This system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the vehicle. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the

"Armed" stage, the second is the

"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible alarm with blinking of the hazard warning lights.

Armed stage

Park the vehicle and stop the engine.

Arm the system as described below.

1. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle.

2. Make sure that all doors (and liftgate) and engine hood are closed and latched.

3. Lock the doors using the transmitter of the keyless entry system (or smart key) or ignition key.

After completion of the steps above, the hazard warning lights will blink

(for smart key, the chime also sounds) once to indicate that the system is armed.

If any door (or liftgate) or engine hood remains open, the hazard warning lights and the chime will not operate and the theft-alarm will not arm. If all doors (and liftgate) and engine hood are closed after the lock button is pressed, the hazard warning lights blink once.

The system can also be armed by locking the doors with the key from the front doors; however, the hazard warning lights will not blink using this method.

✽

NOTICE

The theft-alarm system can be deactivated by an authorized Kia dealer.

If you want this feature, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

4 19


Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the system is armed while a passenger(s) remains in the vehicle, the alarm may be activated when the remaining passenger(s) leave the vehicle. If any door (or liftgate) or engine hood is opened within

30 seconds after the system enters the armed stage, the system is disarmed to prevent an unnecessary alarm.

Theft-alarm stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the following occurs while the system is armed.

• A front or rear door is opened without using the ignition key or transmitter (or smart key).

• The liftgate is opened without using the transmitter (or smart key).

• The engine hood is opened.

The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will blink continuously for approximately 27 seconds, and repeat the horn 3 times unless the system is disarmed. To turn off the system, unlock the doors with the ignition key or transmitter (or smart key).

Disarmed stage

The system will be disarmed when

• The doors (and liftgate) are unlocked with the transmitter (or smart key) or the ignition key.

After depressing the unlock button, the hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound twice (in smart key) to indicate that the system is disarmed.

After depressing the unlock button, if any door (or liftgate) is not opened within 30 seconds, the system will be rearmed.

4 20

✽

NOTICE

• Avoid trying to start the engine while the alarm is activated. The vehicle starting motor is disabled during the theft-alarm stage.

- If the system is not disarmed with the transmitter, insert the key into the ignition switch, turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for 30 seconds. Then the system will be disarmed.

- If the system is not disarmed with the smart key, press the engine start/stop button with smart key.

The side with the lock button should contact the engine start/stop button directly.

• If you lose your keys, consult your authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION -

Adjusting alarm system

Do not change, alter or adjust the theft-alarm system because it could cause the theft-alarm system to malfunction and should only be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.

✽

NOTICE

Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or modifications to the theft-alarm system are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty.


4 21


DOOR LOCKS

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle

■

Type A

Lock Unlock

■

Type B

Unlock

• Doors can also be locked and unlocked with the transmitter.

• Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.

• When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure the doors are closed securely.

Lock

OUM044002

• Turn the key counterclockwise to lock and clockwise to unlock.

• If you lock the driver’s door with a key, all vehicle doors will lock automatically.

• From the driver’s door, turn the key to the right once to unlock the door and once more within 4 seconds to unlock all doors.

✽

NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

OUM044003

• To lock a door without the key, push the inside door lock button (1) or central door lock switch (2) to the “Lock” position when the ignition switch is

OFF position and close the door (3).

• If you lock the door with the central door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors will lock automatically.

✽

NOTICE

Always remove the ignition key, engage the parking brake, close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.

4 22


Operating door locks from inside the vehicle

With the door lock button

OUM044004

• To unlock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The red mark (2) on the button will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door is locked properly, the red mark (2) on the door lock button will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle

(3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of the driver’s (or front passenger’s) door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position, the button will unlock and the door will open. (if equipped)

• Front doors cannot be locked if the ignition key is in the ignition switch and any front door is opened.

If a power door lock ever fails to function while you are in the vehicle, try one or more of the following techniques to exit:

• Operate the door unlock feature repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks and handles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use the key to unlock the door from outside.

• Move to the cargo area and open the liftgate.

4 23


With central door lock switch

Driver’s door

Passenger’s door

OUM044005

• When pressing the rear portion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors will unlock.

• If the key is in the ignition switch and any front door is opened, the doors will not lock even though the front portion (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed.

WARNING -

Doors

The doors should always be fully closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the door.

Impact sensing door unlock system

In the event of air bag deployment resulting from a vehicle impact, all doors will automatically unlock.

✽

NOTICE

You can select some auto door lock/unlock features in “User Settings”

For more information, refer to

“User Settings” in this chapter.

OUM034082L

Operate by pressing the central door lock switch.

• When pressing the front portion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

WARNING -

Unattended children/animals

Never leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle. An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or severe injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape the vehicle

4 24

Child-protector rear door lock

OUM044006

The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle. The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

1. Open the rear door.

2. Turn the child safety lock (1) located on the rear edge of the door to the lock ( ) position. When the child safety lock is in the lock position, the rear door will not open even when the inner door handle is pulled.

3. Close the rear door.

To open the rear door, pull the outside door handle.

Even though the doors may be unlocked, the rear door will not open by pulling the inner door handle until the rear door child safety lock is unlocked.

WARNING

- Rear door locks

Use the rear door safety locks whenever children are in the vehicle. If a child accidently opens the rear doors while the vehicle is moving, they may fall out.


4 25


LIFTGATE (for manual liftgate)

Opening the liftgate

The liftgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the liftgate.

✽

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

Closing the liftgate

OUMA044007

• The liftgate is locked or unlocked when all doors are locked or unlocked with the key, transmitter

(or smart key) or central door lock switch.

• If unlocked, the liftgate can be opened by pressing the handle switch and then pulling the handle up.

• Only the liftgate is unlocked if the liftgate unlock button on the smart key is pressed (if equipped). Once the liftgate is opened and then closed, the liftgate is locked automatically.

CAUTION -

Liftgate lift

Make certain that you close the liftgate before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur to the liftgate lift cylinders and attached hardware if the liftgate is not closed prior to driving.

OUMA045008MX

To close the liftgate, lower and push down the liftgate firmly. Make sure that the liftgate is securely latched.

Make sure your hands, feet and other parts of your body are safely out of the way before closing the liftgate.

4 26


WARNING

- Exhaust fumes

Driving with the liftgate open is not advisable.

Dangerous exhaust fumes can enter the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the liftgate opened, keep the air vents and all windows open so that additional outside air can enter.

Emergency liftgate safety release

WARNING

- Rear cargo area

Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no restraints are available.

Occupants should always be properly restrained.

OUMA044009

Your vehicle is equipped with an emergency liftgate safety release lever located on the bottom of the liftgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the cargo area, the liftgate can be opened by pushing the release lever and pushing open the liftgate.

WARNING

• No one should be allowed to occupy the cargo area of the vehicle at any time. The cargo area is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.

• Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use with extreme caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion.

4 27


POWER LIFTGATE

(1) Power liftgate open / close button

(2) Power liftgate handle switch

(3) Power liftgate close button

OUMA044010

✽

NOTICE

If IGN is ON, the power liftgate operates when :

• Automatic shift lever is in P (Park).

• Manual shift lever is in N (Neutral).

✽

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, power liftgate may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

✽

NOTICE

Do not attach heavy objects to the power liftgate when you operate the power liftgate. Additional weight on liftgate could cause damage to the system.

OUMA044011

WARNING -

Unattended children/pets

Never leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle.

Children or animals might operate the power liftgate in such a way that could result in injury to themselves or others or damage to the vehicle.

OUM044012L

4 28


WARNING

OUM044014

Make sure that there are no people or objects in the path of the power liftgate (or smart power liftgate) prior to use. Serious injury, damage to the vehicle or damage to surrounding objects may result if contact with the power liftgate (or smart power liftgate) occurs.

CAUTION

Do not close or open the power liftgate manually during automatic operation. This may cause damage to the power liftgate or to the vehicle.

If it is necessary to close or open the power liftgate manually when the battery is discharged or disconnected, make sure the liftgate is not in operation. Switch the power liftgate to the off position. Do not apply excessive force.

Opening the liftgate

OUM044300L

The power liftgate will open automatically by doing one of the following:

• Press and hold the liftgate unlock button on the transmitter or smart key until power liftgate operates.

• While power liftgate operating, you can stop it if you shortly press the unlock button on the transmitter or smart key.

4 29


Closing the liftgate

OUMA044010

• Press the power liftgate open/close button for approximately one second.

• For emergency stop while power liftgate operating, press the power liftgate open/close button shortly.

OUMA044011

• Press the liftgate handle switch carrying the smart key with you.

OUMA044010

OUM044300L

• Press the power liftgate close button for approximately one second when the liftgate is opened.

The liftgate will close and lock automatically.

4 30


• For emergency stop while power liftgate operating, press the power liftgate open/close button shortly.

Power liftgate non-opening conditions

The power liftgate will not open automatically, when the vehicle is moving more than 3km/h (2mph) or the automatic shift lever is not in P(Park) position. The power liftgate will not open automatically, when the automatic shift lever is not in P(Park) position or the manual shift lever is not in

N(Neutral) position.

✽

NOTICE

The chime will sound continuously if you drive over 3km/h (2mph) with the liftgate opened. Stop your vehicle at a safe place as soon as possible to check if your liftgate is opened.

CAUTION

Do not operate the power liftgate more than 5 times continuously.

It may damage the power liftgate system. If you operate the power liftgate more than 5 times continuously, the chime will sound 3 times and the power liftgate will not operate. At this time, stop operating the liftgate and leave it for more than 1 minute.

✽

NOTICE

• The power liftgate can be operated when the engine is not running.

However the power liftgate operation consumes large amounts of vehicle electric power. To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate it excessively.

• To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the power liftgate in the open position for a long time.

• Do not modify or repair any part of the power liftgate by yourself.

This must be done by an authorized Kia dealer.

• When jacking up the vehicle to change a tire or repair the vehicle, do not operate the power liftgate.

This could cause the power liftgate to operate improperly.

(Continued)

4 31


(Continued)

• In cold and wet climates, the power liftgate may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

• It is recommended to wait until the power liftgate is fully closed before starting the vehicle. The power liftgate may not close fully if the vehicle is started during automatic closing.

CAUTION

Never operate the power lift gate with any heavy objects attached (e.g. bicycles) as it could become damaged.

Automatic reversal

OUMA044013

During power opening and closing if the power liftgate is blocked by an object or part of the body, the power liftgate will detect the resistance.

• If the resistance is detected while opening the liftgate, it will stop and move in the opposite direction.

• If the resistance is detected while closing the liftgate, it will stop and move in the opposite direction.

However, if the resistance is weak such as from an object that is thin or soft, or the liftgate is near the latched position, the automatic stop and reversal may not detect the resistance.

If the automatic reversal feature operates continuously more than twice during opening or closing operation, the power liftgate may stop at that position. At this time, close the liftgate manually and operate the liftgate automatically again.

WARNING

Never place any object or part of your body in the path of the power liftgate as it is operating.

Doing so could result in personal injury.

4 32


How to reset the power liftgate

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, or if the related fuse has been replaced or disconnected, for the power liftgate to operate normally, reset the power liftgate as follows:

1. Put the automatic shift lever in P

(Park) or the manual shift lever in

N (Neutral).

2. While pressing the liftgate close button, press the liftgate handle switch for more than 3 seconds.

(the chime will sound)

3. Close the liftgate manually.

✽

NOTICE

If the power liftgate does not operate normally, first check the following condition before using the power liftgate.

Make sure the automatic shift lever is in P (Park) or the manual shift lever is in N (Neutral).

Power liftgate opening height user setting

If the power liftgate does not work properly after the above procedure, have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

OUM044012L

The driver may set the height of a fully opened liftgate by following the below instruction.

1. Position the liftgate manually to the height you prefer.

2. Press the liftgate close button for more than 3 seconds.

3. You will hear the system beep twice indicating height has been set up.

The liftgate will open to the height the driver has set up.

4 33


Smart Power Liftgate

(if equipped)

OUMA044015

On a vehicle equipped with a smart key, the liftgate can be opened using the Smart Power Liftgate system.

How to use the Smart Power

Liftgate

The liftgate can be opened with notouch activation satisfying all the conditions below.

• After 15 seconds when all doors are closed and locked

• Positioned in the detecting area for more than 3 seconds.

✽

NOTICE

• The Smart Power Liftgate does not operate when:

- The smart key is detected within

15 seconds after the doors are closed and locked, and is continuously detected.

- The smart key is detected within

15 seconds after the doors are closed and locked, and within 1.5

m (60 inches) from the front door handles. (for vehicles equipped with Welcome Light)

- A door is not locked or closed.

- The smart key is in the vehicle.

1. Setting

To activate the Smart Power Liftgate, go to User Settings Mode and select

Smart Power Liftgate on the LCD display.

For more information, refer to the

"LCD Display" section in this chapter.

4 34


OUM044016

2. Detect and Alert

If you are positioned in the detecting area (50 ~100 cm (20~40 inches) behind the vehicle) carrying a smart key, the hazard warning lights will blink and chime will sound for about

3 seconds to alert you the smart key has been detected and the liftgate will open.

✽

NOTICE

Do not approach the detecting area if you do not want the liftgate to open. If you have unintentionally entered the detecting area and the hazard warning lights and chime starts to operate, leave the detecting area with the smart key. The liftgate will stay closed.

OUMA044017

3. Automatic opening

The hazard warning lights will blink and chime will sound 2 times and then the liftgate will open.

4 35


Make sure you close the liftgate before driving your vehicle.

Make sure there are no people or objects around the liftgate before opening or closing the liftgate. Make sure objects in the liftgate do not come out when opening the liftgate on a slope. It may cause serious injury. Make sure to deactivate the

Smart Power Liftgate when washing your vehicle. Otherwise, the liftgate may open inadvertently. The key should be kept out of reach of children. Children may inadvertently open the Smart Power Liftgate while playing around the rear area of the vehicle.

CAUTION

-

Liftgate lift

Make certain that you close the liftgate before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur to the liftgate lift cylinders and attached hardware if the liftgate is not closed prior to driving.

How to deactivate the Smart

Power Liftgate function using the smart key

OXM043001

1. Door lock

2. Door unlock

3. Liftgate open

4. Panic

If you press any button of the smart key during the Detect and Alert stage, the Smart Power Liftgate function will be deactivated.

Make sure to be aware of how to deactivate the Smart Power Liftgate function for emergency situations.

4 36


✽

NOTICE

• If you press the door unlock button (2), the Smart Power Liftgate function will be deactivated temporarily. But, if you do not open any door for 30 seconds, the smart

Power liftgate function will be activated again.

• If you press the liftgate open button (3) for more than 1 second, the liftgate opens.

• If you press the door lock button

(1) or liftgate open button (3) when the Smart Power Liftgate function is not in the Detect and

Alert stage, the smart Power liftgate function will not be deactivated.

• In case you have deactivated the

Smart Power Liftgate function by pressing the smart key button and opened a door, the smart Power liftgate function can be activated again by closing and locking all doors.

Detecting area

OUM044019

• The Smart Power Liftgate operates with a welcome alert if the smart key is detected within 50~100 cm

(20~40 inches) from the liftgate.

• The alert stops once the smart key is positioned outside the detecting area during the Detect and Alert stage.

✽

NOTICE

• The Smart Power Liftgate function will not work if any of the following occurs:

- The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

- The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cellular phone.

- Another vehicle’s smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.

• The detecting range may decrease or increase when :

- One side of the tire is raised to replace a tire or to inspect the vehicle.

- The vehicle is parked on a slope or unpaved road, etc.

4 37


Emergency liftgate safety release

OUMA044009

Your vehicle is equipped with an emergency liftgate safety release lever located on the bottom of the liftgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the cargo area, the liftgate can be opened by pushing the release lever and pushing open the liftgate.

WARNING

• No one should be allowed to occupy the cargo area of the vehicle at any time. The cargo area is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.

• Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use with extreme caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion.

4 38

WINDOWS

OUMA044020


(1) Driver’s door power window switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power window switch

(3) Rear door (left) power window switch

(4) Rear door (right) power window switch

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window up/down* (Driver's and

Passenger's window)

(7) Power window and rear sunroof* lock switch

* if equipped

In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

4 39


Power windows

The ignition switch must be in the ON position for power windows to operate.

Each door has a power window switch that controls the door's window. The driver has a power window lock button which can block the operation of passenger windows. The power windows can be operated for approximately 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK (or OFF) position.

However, if the front doors are opened, the power windows cannot be operated even within the 30 second period.

✽

NOTICE

While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if equipped) in an open (or partially open) position, your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down, partially lower both front windows approximately one inch. If you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly reduce the size of the sunroof opening.

Window opening and closing

OYP044035K

The driver’s door has a master power window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle.

To open or close a window, press down or pull up the front portion of the corresponding switch to the first detent position (5).

4 40


Auto up/down window (if equipped)

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Close the driver's and passenger's window and continue pulling up the driver’s power window switch for at least 1 second after the window is completely closed.

OYP044033K

Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers or raises the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up or press down and release the switch.

If the power window does not operate normally, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:

OUN026013


(for Auto up/down window)

If the upward movement of the window is blocked by an object or part of the body, the window will detect the resistance and will stop upward movement. The window will then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8 in.) to allow the object to be cleared.

The distance may vary based on the size or position of the window. If the window detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop upward movement then lower approximately 2.5 cm. (1 in).

4 41


And if the power window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by the automatic window reversal feature, the automatic window reversal will not operate.

The automatic reverse feature for the driver’s window is only active when the “auto up” feature is used by fully pulling up the switch. The automatic reverse feature will not operate if the window is raised using the halfway position on the power window switch.

Always check for obstructions before raising any window to avoid injuries or vehicle damage. If an object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter is caught between the window glass and the upper window channel, the automatic reverse window may not detect the resistance and will not stop and reverse direction.

Power window lock button

OUM044021

• The driver can disable the power window switches on the passenger doors by pressing the power window lock button located on the driver’s door to the LOCK position

(pressed).

• When the power window lock

switch is pressed :

- The driver's master control can operate all the power windows.

- The front passenger's control can operate the front passenger's power window.

- The rear passenger's control cannot operate the rear passenger's power window.

CAUTION

- Opening /closing Window

To prevent possible damage to the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.

Always double check to make sure all arms, hands, head and other obstructions are safely out of the way before closing a window.

WARNING

- Power windows

Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the power window lock switch

(on the driver's door) in the

LOCK (pressed) position.

4 42

HOOD

Opening the hood

Open the hood after turning off the engine on a flat surface, shifting the shift lever to the P (Park) position and setting the parking brake.


OUM044022

1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood. The hood should pop open slightly.

OUM044023

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the hood slightly, pull the secondary latch (1) inside of the hood center and lift the hood (2).

3. Raise the hood. It will completely rise by itself after it has been raised about halfway.

4 43


Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the following:

• All filler caps in the engine compartment must be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed from the engine compartment.

2. Lower the hood halfway and push down to securely lock in place.

WARNING

- Hood obstruction

Before closing the hood, ensure that all obstructions are removed from the hood opening. Closing the hood with an obstruction present in the hood opening may result in severe personal injury.

WARNING

- Fire risk

Do not leave gloves, rags or any other combustible material in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause a heat-induced fire.

WARNING

- Unsecured engine hood

Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched, the hood could fly open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident.

4 44


FUEL FILLER LID

Opening the fuel filler lid

OUMA044024

The fuel filler lid must be opened from inside the vehicle by pressing the fuel filler lid opener button.

If the fuel filler lid does not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If necessary, spray around the lid with an approved de-icer fluid

(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

OUM044025

1. Stop the engine.

2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the fuel filler lid opener button.

3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1).

4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel filler cap (2) counterclockwise.

5. Refuel as needed.

Closing the fuel filler lid

1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until it “clicks” once. This indicates that the cap is securely tightened.

2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it in lightly making sure that it is securely closed.

✽

NOTICE

There may be an intermittent noise near the refueling hole while the engine is idling if the fuel cap is not closed securely. This occurs normally with the OBD system.

✽

NOTICE

When refueling on unlevel ground, the fuel gauge may not point to the F position.

It is not a malfunction. If you move your vehicle to a level ground, the fuel gauge will move to the full position.

4 45


WARNING

- Refueling

Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before completely removing the cap. If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can cover your clothes or skin and subject you to the risk of fire and burns.

Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

✽

NOTICE

Tighten the cap until it clicks once, otherwise the fuel cap open warning indicator light will illuminate

WARNING

- Fire/explosion risk

Read and follow all warnings posted at the gas station facility. Failure to follow all warnings may result in severe personal injury, severe burns or death due to fire or explosion.

WARNING

- Static electricity

• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching another metal part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source.

• Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refueling since you can generate static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fabric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.) capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors resulting in rapid burning. If you must reenter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source.

4 46


WARNING

- Portable fuel container

When using an approved portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

Once refueling has begun, contact with the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete. Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline.

WARNING

- Cell phone fires

Do not use cellular phones while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

WARNING

- Smoking

DO NOT use matches or a lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station especially during refueling. Automotive fuel is highly flammable and can, when ignited, result in fire.

WARNING

- Refueling &

Vehicle fires

When refueling, always shut the engine off. Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling is complete, check to make sure the filler cap and filler door are securely closed, before starting the engine.

Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the “Fuel requirements” suggested in chapter 1.

If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine Kia cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.

CAUTION

- Exterior paint

Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.

4 47


Emergency fuel filler lid release

OUM044026

If the fuel filler lid does not open using the remote fuel filler lid release, you can open it manually.

Remove the panel in the cargo area.

Pull the handle out slightly.

CAUTION

Do not pull the handle excessively, otherwise the luggage area trim or release handle may be damaged.

4 48


PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION -

Sunroof motor damage

To prevent damage to the sunroof, periodically remove any dirt that may accumulate on the guide rail.

OUM044027

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control lever located on the overhead console.

The sunroof can be operated for approximately 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK (or OFF) position.

However, if the front door is opened, the sunroof cannot be operated even within the 30 second period.

In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

After the vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.

CAUTION

-

Sunroof control lever

Do not continue to press the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is fully opened, closed, or tilted. Damage to the motor or system components could occur.

The sunroof cannot slide when it is in the tilt position nor can it be tilted while in an open or slide position.

WARNING

- Roof cargo

Do not operate the sunroof while using the roof rack to transport cargo. This may cause the cargo to come loose and distract the driver.

4 49


WARNING

• Never adjust the sunroof or sunshade while driving. This could result in loss of control and an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or property damage.

• Do not allow children to operate the sunroof.

Sunroof open warning

(if equipped)

CAUTION

Do not extend any luggage out side the sunroof while driving.

OUM044134

If the driver removes the ignition key

(smart key: turns off the engine) when the sunroof is not fully closed, the warning chime will sound for a few seconds and a message will appear on the LCD display or warning indicator will illuminate.

Close the sunroof securely when leaving your vehicle.

CAUTION

Make sure the sunroof is fully closed when leaving your vehicle. If the sunroof is opened, rain or snow may leak through the sunroof and wet the interior.

4 50


Sunshade

OUM044028

To open the sunshade

Pull the sunroof control lever backward to the 1st detent position.

To close the sunshade when the sunroof glass is closed

Push the sunroof control lever forward or pull it down to the 1st detent position.

To stop the sliding at any point, press the sunshade control switch momentarily.

✽

NOTICE

Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as material characteristic are normal.

CAUTION

- Automatic sunroof shade

• Do not pull or push the sunshade by hand as such action may damage the sunshade or cause it to malfunction.

• Close the sunroof when driving in dusty environments.

Dust may cause a malfunction of the vehicle system.

Sliding the sunroof

OUM044029

When the sunshade is closed

Pull the sunroof control lever backward to the 2nd detent position, both the sunshade and sunroof glass will slide all the way open. To stop the sunroof movement at any point, pull or push the sunroof control glass lever momentarily.

4 51


When the sunshade is opened

Pull the sunroof glass control lever backward to the 1st or 2nd detent position, the sunroof glass will be opened.

To stop the sunroof glass movement at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily.


WARNING

- Sunroof

Do not extend the face, neck, arms or body outside the sunroof while driving.

OXM049029

If an object or part of the body is detected while the sunroof is closing automatically, it will reverse the direction, and then stop.

The auto reverse function does not work if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash.

You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it.

WARNING

- Sunroof

Operation

When closing the sunroof, make sure there are no body parts in the movement range of the sliding roof. Parts of the body could become trapped or crushed.

4 52


CAUTION

• To avoid damage to the sunroof periodically remove any dirt that may accumulate on the guide rail.

• If you drive with the sunroof opened right after a vehicle wash or rain, water may get inside the vehicle and cause damage to the interior.

Tilting the sunroof

CAUTION

- Sunroof motor damage

If you try to open the sunroof when the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice, the glass or the motor could be damaged.

Closing the sunroof

To close the sunroof glass with the sunshade

Push the sunroof control lever forward or downward to the 2nd detent position. The sunroof glass and sunshade will close automatically.

To stop the sunroof movement at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily.

OUM044030

When the sunshade is closed

Push the sunroof control lever upward, the sunshade will slide halfway open then the sunroof glass will tilt.


To close the sunroof glass only

Push the sunroof control lever forward or downward to the 1st detent position. The sunroof glass will close automatically.


When the sunshade is opened

Push the sunroof control lever upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.


4 53


Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, you must reset your sunroof system as follows:


2. Close the sunshade and sunroof completely if opened.

3. Release the sunroof control lever.

4. Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close for about (5 ~10 seconds) until the sunroof operates as follows: SUN-

SHADE OPENS

→

GLASS TILTS

UP

→

SOUND OF MOTOR’S

‘CLICK’ and then release the button.

[Do not release the button on movement. (initialization of reset will fail)]

5. Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close for about (1 ~2 seconds), until the sunroof operates as follows: GLASS

CLOSE

→

GLASS OPEN

→

GLASS/SUNSHADE CLOSE and then release the button. [Do not release the button on movement.

(initialization failed)]

When this is complete, the sunroof system has been reset and one touch open and close should be restored.

✽

NOTICE

If you do not reset the sunroof, it may not work properly.

4 54


STEERING WHEEL

Electric power steering (EPS)

The power steering uses a motor to assist you in steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the vehicle may still be steered, but it will require increased steering effort.

The motor driven power steering is controlled by a power steering control unit which senses the steering wheel torque and vehicle speed to command the motor.

The steering becomes heavier as the vehicle’s speed increases and becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed decreases for optimum steering control.

Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, have the power steering checked by an authorized

Kia dealer.

• If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate normally, the warning light will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may require increased steering effort. Take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

• When you operate the steering wheel in low temperature, noise may occur. If temperature rises, the noise will likely disappear. This is a normal condition.

• When the vehicle is stationary, and the steering wheel is turned all the way to the left or right continuously, the steering wheel becomes harder to turn. The power assist is limited to protect the motor from overheating.

As time passes, the steering wheel will return to its normal condition.

✽

NOTICE

The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:

• The EPS warning light does not illuminate.

• The steering gets heavy immediately after turning the ignition switch on. This happens as the system performs the EPS system diagnostics. When the diagnostics are completed, the steering wheel will return to its normal condition.

• A click noise may be heard from the EPS relay after the ignition switch is turned to the ON or

LOCK (OFF) position.

• A motor noise may be heard when the vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed.

• If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate normally, the warning light will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may become difficult to control or operate abnormally.

Take your vehicle to an authorized

Kia dealer and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

(Continued)

4 55


(Continued)

• When you operate the steering wheel in low temperature, abnormal noise may occur. If temperature rises, the noise will likely disappear. This is a normal condition.

• When the charging system warning light comes on due to the low voltage (When the alternator or battery) does not operate normally or malfunctions), the steering wheel may require increased steering effort.

Tilt and telescopic steering

Tilt and telescopic steering allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positioned so that it is comfortable for you to drive, while permitting you to see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges.

WARNING

- Steering wheel adjustment

Never adjust the angle and height of the steering wheel while driving. You may lose steering control.

OUMA044031

To change the steering wheel angle, pull down the lock-release lever (1), adjust the steering wheel to the desired angle (2) and height (3, if equipped) then pull up the lockrelease lever to lock (4) the steering wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the steering wheel to the desired position before driving.

✽

NOTICE

After adjustment, sometimes the lock release lever may not lock the steering wheel. It is not a malfunction. This occurs when two gears are not engaged correctly. In this case, adjust the steering wheel again and then lock the steering wheel.

4 56


Heated steering wheel

(if equipped)

WARNING

If the steering wheel becomes too warm, turn the system off.

The heated steering wheel may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.

OUMA046032

With the ignition switch in the ON position, pressing the heated steering wheel button warms the steering wheel. The indicator on the button will illuminate.

To turn the heated steering wheel off, press the button once again. The indicator on the button will turn off.

✽

NOTICE

The heated steering wheel will turn off automatically approximately 30 minutes after the heated steering wheel is turned on.

CAUTION

• Do not install any type of grip cover for the steering wheel, it may impair the function of the heated steering wheel system.

• When cleaning the heated steering wheel, do not use an organic solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing so may damage the surface of the steering wheel.

• If the surface of steering wheel is damaged by sharp object, damage to the heated steering wheel components could occur.

4 57


Horn

OUMA044033

To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on your steering wheel.

Check the horn regularly to be sure it operates properly.

✽

NOTICE

To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.

4 58


MIRRORS

Inside rearview mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror so that the center view through the rear window is seen. Make this adjustment before you start driving.

Do not place objects in the rear seat or cargo area which would interfere with your vision through the rear window.

WARNING

- Mirror adjustment

Do not adjust the rearview mirror while the vehicle is moving.

This could result in loss of control.

Day/night rearview mirror

(if equipped)

Night

WARNING

Do not modify the inside mirror and don’t install a wide mirror. It could result in injury, during an accident or deployment of the air bag.

Day

OAM049023

Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day/night lever is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to reduce the glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

4 59


Electric chromatic mirror (ECM)

(if equipped)

The electric rearview mirror automatically controls the glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you in nighttime or low light driving conditions. The sensor mounted in the mirror senses the light level around the vehicle, and automatically controls the headlight glare from the vehicles behind you.

When the engine is running, the glare is automatically controlled by the sensor mounted in the rearview mirror.

Whenever the shift lever is shifted into reverse (R), the mirror will automatically go to the brightest setting in order to improve the drivers view behind the vehicle.

CAUTION -

Cleaning mirror

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner.

Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. It may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Indicator Sensor

OUMA044407

To operate the electric rearview mirror:

• The mirror defaults to the ON position whenever the ignition switch is turned on.

• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function off. The mirror indicator light will turn off.

Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function on. The mirror indicator light will illuminate.

4 60


Electric chromatic mirror (ECM) with compass (if equipped)

OUMA044407

1. Feature Control Button

2. Status Indicator LED

3. Rear Light Sensor

4. Compass Display Window

Automatic-Dimming Night Vision

Safety™ (NVS ® ) Mirror

The NVS

®

Mirror in your vehicle is the most advanced way to reduce annoying glare in the rearview mirror during any driving situation. For more information regarding NVS

® mirrors and other applications, please refer to the Gentex website: www.gentex.com

✽

NOTICE

The NVS ® Mirror automatically reduces glare during driving conditions based upon light levels monitored in front of the vehicle and from the rear of the vehicle. These light sensors are visible through openings in the front and rear of the mirror case. Any object that would obstruct either light sensor will degrade the automatic dimming control feature.

Automatic-dimming function

Your mirror will automatically dim upon detecting glare from the vehicles traveling behind you. The autodimming function can be controlled by pushing the ON/OFF Button:

1. Pressing the button turns the autodimming function OFF which is indicated by the green Status

Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing the button again turns the auto-dimming function ON which is indicated by the green

Status Indicator LED turning on.

✽

NOTICE

The mirror defaults to the ON position each time the vehicle is started.

4 61


Z-Nav™ Compass Display

The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is also equipped with a Z-Nav™

Compass that shows the vehicle

Compass heading in the Display

Window using the 8 basic cardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

Compass function

The Compass can be turned ON and

OFF and will remember the last state when the ignition is cycled. To turn the display feature ON/OFF:

1. Press and release the button to turn the display feature OFF.

2. Press and release the button again to turn the display back ON.

Additional options can be set with press and hold sequences of the button and are detailed in this section.

There is a difference between magnetic north and true north. The compass in the mirror can compensate for this difference when it knows the

Magnetic Zone in which it is operating. This is set either by the dealer or by the user. The operating Zone

Numbers for North America are shown in the figure on the following section.

4 62


B520C05NF

To adjust the Zone setting:

1. Determine the desired Zone

Number based upon your current location on the Zone Map.

2. Press and hold the button for more than 3 but less than 6 seconds, the current Zone Number will appear on the display.

3. Pressing and holding the button again will cause the numbers to increment (Note: they will repeat

…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing the button when the desired Zone

Number appears on the display will set the new Zone.

4. Within about 5 seconds the compass will start displaying a compass heading again.

There are some conditions that can cause changes to the vehicle magnets, such as installing a ski rack or a CB antenna. Body repair work on the vehicle can also cause changes to the vehicle's magnetic field. In these situations, the compass will need to be re-calibrated to quickly correct for these changes. To re-calibrate the compass:

4 63


1. Press and hold the button for more than 6 seconds. When the compass memory is cleared a "C" will appear in the display.

2. To calibrate the compass, drive the vehicle in 2 complete circles at less than 8 km/h (5 mph).

Electrochromic mirror with

HomeLink system (if equipped)

Indicator light

Glare detection sensor

OHD046025N

To operate the electric rearview mirror

Press the I button (1) to turn the automatic- dimming function on. The mirror indicator light will illuminate.

Press the O button (2) to turn the automatic- dimming function off. The mirror indicator light will turn off.

Homelink buttons

OHD046305N

HomeLink

®

Wireless Control System

Your new mirror comes with an integrated HomeLink Universal

Transceiver, which allows you to program the mirror to activate your garage door(s), estate gate, home lighting, etc. The mirror actually learns the codes from your various existing transmitters.

4 64


Retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (i.e., new vehicle purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes

(follow step 1 in the “Programming” portion of this text).

Programming

Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the ACC position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new battery be replaced in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to

HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radiofrequency.

Follow these steps to train your

HomeLink mirror:

Flashing

OHD046306N

1. When programming the buttons for the first time, press and hold the left and center buttons (

,

) simultaneously until the indicator light begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds. (This procedure erases the factory-set default codes. Do not perform this step when programming the additional

HomeLink buttons.)

4 65


✽

NOTICE

For non rolling code garage door openers, follow steps 2 - 3.

For rolling code garage door openers, follow steps 2 - 6.

For Canadian Programming, please follow the Canadian Programming section.

For help with determining whether your garage door opener is non-rolling code or rolling code, please refer to the garage door openers owner’s manual or contact

HomeLink customer service at 1-

800-355-3515.

Flashing

2-8 cm

Transmitter

OHD046307N

2. Press and hold the button on the

HomeLink system you wish to train and the button on the transmitter while the transmitter is approximately 2-8 cm (1 to 3 inches) away from the mirror. Do not release the buttons until step 3 has been completed.

3. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. (The rapid flashing light indicates successful programming of the new frequency signal.)

✽

NOTICE

Some gate and garage door openers may require you to replace step #3 with the “cycling” procedure noted in the “Canadian Programming” section of this document.

4 66


Rolling code programming

To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the “Programming” portion of this text. (A second person may make the following training procedures quicker

& easier.)

4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” button on the device’s motor head unit. Exact location and color of the button may vary by product brand. If there is difficulty locating the “learn” or “smart” button, reference the device’s owner’s manual or contact HomeLink at 1-800-

355-3515 or on the internet at www.homelink.com.

5. Press and release the “learn” or

“smart” button on the device’s motor head unit. You have 30 seconds to complete step number 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and release the programmed HomeLink button up to three times. The rolling code equipped device should now recognize the HomeLink signal and activate when the HomeLink button is pressed. The remaining two buttons may now be programmed if this has not previously been done. Refer to the “Programming” portion of this text.

Operating HomeLink

To operate, simply press the programmed HomeLink button.

Activation will now occur for the trained product (garage door, security system, entry door lock, estate gate, or home or office lighting). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. The HomeLink Wireless

Controls System (once programmed) or the original hand-held transmitter may be used to activate the device

(e.g. garage door, entry door lock, etc.). In the event that there are still programming difficulties, contact

HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet at www.homelink.com.

4 67


Erasing programmed HomeLink buttons

Flashing

OHD046306N

To erase the three programmed buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased):

• Press and hold the left and center buttons simultaneously, until the indicator light begins to flash

(approximately 20 seconds).

Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds.

HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time.

Reprogramming a single

HomeLink button

To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired

HomeLink button. Do NOT release until step 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter

2-8 cm (1 to 3 inches) away from the HomeLink surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button (or press and

“cycle” - as described in “Canadian

Programming”).

4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons.

The previous device has now been erased and the new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that has just been programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed

HomeLink buttons.

Canadian Programming

Garage & gate openers

During programming, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4 in the

“Programming” portion of this text) while you press and re-press

(“cycle”) your handheld transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training.

4 68


Accessories

If you would like additional information on the HomeLink Wireless

Control System, HomeLink compatible products, or to purchase other accessories such as the HomeLink

®

Lighting Package, please contact

HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet at www.homelink.com.

FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3

IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3







The transceiver has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry

Canada rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

Outside rearview mirror

Be sure to adjust the mirror angles before driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch. The mirror heads can be folded back to prevent damage during an automatic vehicle wash or when passing through a narrow street.

4 69


The right outside rearview mirror is convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.

Use your interior rearview mirror or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.

If the mirror is jammed with ice, do not adjust the mirror by force. Use an approved spray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) to release the frozen mechanism or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

Adjusting outside rearview mirror

CAUTION -

Rearview mirror

Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the surface of the glass. If ice should restrict the movement of the mirror, do not force the mirror for adjustment. To remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with very warm water.

WARNING

- Mirror adjustment

Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview mirrors while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control.

OUMA044034

Adjusting the rearview mirrors:

Press either the L (driver’s side) or R

(passenger’s side) button (1) to select the rearview mirror you would like to adjust when the ignition switch is ACC or ON position.

Use the mirror adjustment control (2) to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right.

After adjustment, press the L or R button (1) again to prevent inadvertent adjustment.

4 70


CAUTION -

Outside mirror

• The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is pressed.

Do not press the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand. Doing so may damage the parts.

Reverse parking aid function

(if equipped)

L/R : When the remote control outside rearview mirror switch is selected to the L (left) or R (right) position, both outside rearview mirrors will move downward.

Neutral : When the remote control outside rearview mirror switch is placed in the middle, the outside rearview mirrors will not operate while the vehicle is moving rearward.

OUMA044035

While the vehicle is moving rearward, the outside rearview mirror(s) will move downward to aid reverse parking. According to the position of the outside rearview mirror switch

(1), the outside rearview mirror(s) will operate as follows:

The outside rearview mirrors will automatically revert to their original positions under the following conditions:

1. The ignition switch is in the OFF position.

2. Shift lever is moved to any position except R (Reverse).

3. Remote control outside rearview mirror switch is placed in the middle.

4 71


Folding the outside rearview mirror

OUM044036

Electric type

The outside rearview mirror can be folded or unfolded by pressing the switch when the ignition switch is

ACC or ON position as below.

Left (1) : The mirror will unfold.

Right (2) : The mirror will fold.

Center (AUTO, 3) :

The mirror will fold or unfold automatically as follows:

• The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the folding key or smart key.

• The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the button on the outside door handle.

• The mirror will unfold when you approach the vehicle (all doors closed and locked) with a smart key in possession.

CAUTION -

Electric type outside rearview mirror

The electric type outside rearview mirror operates even though the engine start/stop button is in the

OFF position. However, to prevent unnecessary battery discharge, do not adjust the mirrors longer than necessary while the engine is not running.

In case it is an electric type outside rearview mirror, don’t fold it by hand. It could cause motor failure.

OUM044289L

Manual type

To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp the housing of the mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.

4 72

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

■

Type A

■

Type B


1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5. LCD display

6. Warning and indicator lights

❈

The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in this chapter.

OUMA044100C/OUMA044101C

4 73


Instrument Cluster Control

Adjusting Instrument Cluster

Illumination

LCD Display Control

■

Type A

■

Type B

OUMA044037

The brightness of the instrument panel illumination is changed by pressing the illumination control button

("+" or "-") when the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or the tale lights are turned on.

OUM044265L

• If you hold the illumination control button ("+" or "-"), the brightness will be changed continuously.

• If the brightness reaches to the maximum or minimum level, an alarm will sound.

OUMA044209

The LCD display modes can be changed by using the control buttons on the steering wheel.

(1) : MODE button for changing the LCD modes

(2)

▲

/

▼

: MOVE move scroll switch to select the items

(3) OK : SET/RESET button for set the items or reset the items

(Push scroll wheel switch : for Type B)

4 74

Gauges

Speedometer

■

Type A

Tachometer

■

Type B

OUM044103L

OYP044103N

The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.

OUM044102L

The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and is calibrated in kilometers per hour (km/h) and/or miles per hour (mph).


CAUTION -

Red zone

Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE.

This may cause severe engine damage.

4 75


Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge

■

Type A ■

Type B

OUM044105

This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop button is ON.

If the gauge pointer moves beyond the normal range area toward the “H” position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to “If the Engine

Overheats” in chapter 6.

Fuel Gauge

■

Type A

WARNING -

Hot radiator

Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could cause severe burns. Wait until the engine is cool before adding coolant to the reservoir.

■

Type B

OUM044106

This gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

✽

NOTICE

• The fuel tank capacity is given in chapter 8.

• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly empty.

• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the movement of fuel in the tank.

4 76


WARNING -

Fuel gauge

Stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible after the warning light comes on or when the gauge indicator comes close to the E level. Running out of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger.

Odometer

■

Type A

Outside Temperature Gauge

■

Type A

OYP044113K

■

Type B

OYP044114K

CAUTION

- Low fuel

Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the catalytic converter.

■

Type B

✽

NOTICE

Fuel display may not be accurate if you are filling in sloping places.

OUM044114

The odometer Indicates the total distance that the vehicle has been driven and should be used to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed.

- Odometer range : 0 ~ 1,599,999 kilometers or 999,999 miles.

OUM044115

This gauge indicates the current outside air temperatures by 1°C (1°F).

- Temperature range : -40°C ~ 60°C

(-40°F ~ 140°F)

The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately like a general thermometer to prevent the driver from being inattentive.

4 77


To change the temperature unit (from

°C to °F or from °F to °C)

The temperature unit can be changed by using the "User

Settings" mode of the LCD display.

Transaxle Shift Indicator

Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator

■

Type A

■

Type B

❈

For more details, refer to “LCD

Display” in this chapter.

Icy Road Warning Indicator

■

Type A

■

Type B

OUM04411

This indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift lever is selected.

• Park : P

• Reverse : R

• Neutral : N

• Drive : D

• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

OUMA044430

This warning light is to warn the driver the road may be icy.

When the following conditions occur, the warning light (including Outside

Temperature Gauge) blinks 10 times and then illuminates, and also warning chime sounds 3 times.

- The temperature on the Outside

Temperature Gauge is below approximately 4°C (40°F).

If the icy road warning light appears while driving, you should drive more attentively and safely refraining from over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.

4 78


LCD DISPLAY

LCD Modes

Modes

Trip Computer

Turn By Turn

(if equipped)

ASCC/LDWS

(if equipped)

A/V

(if equipped)

Information

Symbol Explanation

This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.

For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.

This mode displays the state of the navigation.

This mode displays the state of the Advanced Smart Cruise Control system (ASCC) and Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS).

For more details, refer to "Advanced Smart Cruise Control system (ASCC)" or

"Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)" in chapter 5.

This mode displays the state of the A/V system.

This mode informs of service interval (km or days).

This mode informs of warning messages related to washer fluid or malfunction of

Blind Spot Detection system (BSD) and so on.

When any door is not closed securely, this symbol is illuminated.

User Settings In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps and so on.

❈

For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.

4 79


TRIP MODES (TRIP COMPUTER)

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related to driving.

Trip Modes

FUEL ECONOMY

✽

NOTICE

Some driving information stored in the trip computer (for example

Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is disconnected.

• Range

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy

TRIP A

• Tripmeter [A]

• Average Vehicle Speed [A]

• Elapsed Time [A]

Fuel Economy

TRIP B

• Tripmeter [B]

• Average Vehicle Speed [B]

• Elapsed Time [B]

Digital speedometer

To change the trip mode, scroll the

TRIP scroll switch (

▲

/

▼

) in the trip computer mode.

OYP044147C

Range (1)

• The range is the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven with the remaining fuel.

- Distance range : 1 ~ 9,999 km or

1 ~ 9,999 mi.

• If the estimated distance is below

1km (1mi.), the trip computer will display “---” as range.

• If the vehicle is not on level ground or the battery power has been interrupted, the range function may not operate correctly.

4 80


• The range may differ from the actual driving distance as it is an estimate of the available driving distance.

• The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6 liters

(1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle.

• The fuel economy and range may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.

Average Fuel Economy (2)

• The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance and fuel consumption since the last average fuel economy reset.

- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9

MPG or L/100km

• The average fuel economy can be reset both manually and automatically.

Under “Auto Reset” mode, the average fuel economy will be cleared to zero (---) when the vehicle speed exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more than 6 liters (1.6 gallons).

✽

NOTICE

The average fuel economy is not displayed for more accurate calculation if the vehicle does not drive more than 10 seconds or 50 meters (0.03

miles) since the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button is turned to ON.

Manual reset

To reset average fuel economy manually, press the OK button (reset) on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average fuel economy is displayed.

Automatic reset

To make the average fuel economy be reset automatically whenever refueling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in

User Setting menu of the LCD display

(Refer to “LCD Display”).

Instant Fuel Economy (3)

• This mode displays the instant fuel economy during the last few seconds when the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).

- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 50 MPG or 0 ~ 30 L/100km

4 81


Trip A/B

OUMA044408C

Tripmeter (1)

• The tripmeter is the total driving distance since the last tripmeter reset.

- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 km or mi.

To reset the tripmeter, press the OK button (reset) on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the tripmeter is displayed.

Average Vehicle Speed (2)

• The average vehicle speed is calculated by the total driving distance and driving time since the last average vehicle speed reset.

- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 km/h or MPH

To reset the average vehicle speed, press the OK button (reset) on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average vehicle speed is displayed.

✽

NOTICE

• The average vehicle speed is not displayed if the driving distance is less than 50 meters (0.03 miles) or the driving time is less than 10 seconds since the ignition switch or Engine

Start/Stop button is turned to ON.

• Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the average vehicle speed keeps going while the engine is running.

Timer (3)

• The elapsed time is the total driving time since the last elapsed time reset.

- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59

To reset elapsed time, press the OK button (reset) on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the elapsed time is displayed.

✽

NOTICE

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the elapsed time keeps going while the engine is running.

4 82

Digital speedometer


One time driving information mode

If the estimated distance is below

1km, (1mi.) the range (3) will display as "---" and a refuel message will appear (4).

OUMA044423C

This mode displays the current speed of the vehicle.

OYP044193C

This display shows trip distance (1), average fuel economy (2) and the estimated distance that the vehicle can be driven with the remaining fuel

(3).

This information is displayed for a few seconds when you turn off the engine and then goes off automatically. The information provided is calculated according to each trip.

4 83


Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped) ASCC/LDWS Mode

(if equipped)

A/V Mode (if equipped)

OUMA057232

This mode displays the state of the navigation.

OUM054126L

This mode displays the state of the

Advanced Smart Cruise Control

(ASCC) and Lane Departure

Warning System (LDWS).

OYP044273N

This mode displays the state of the

A/V system.

For more information, refer to

"Advanced Smart Cruise Control

(ASCC)" and "Lane Departure

Warning System (LDWS)" in chapter

5.

4 84


Service Mode

Service Interval

OYP044314C

Service interval

It calculates and displays when you need a scheduled maintenance service (km or days).

If the remaining km or time reaches

1,500 km (900 mi.) or 30 days.

Service interval message is displayed for several seconds each time you set the ignition switch or Engine

Start/Stop Button to the ON position.

OYP044119C

Service required

If you do not have your vehicle serviced according to the preset service interval.

“Service required” message is displayed for several seconds each time you set the ignition switch or Engine

Start/Stop Button to the ON position.

OYP044122N

Service interval OFF

If the service interval is not set

"Service interval OFF” message is displayed on the LCD display.

If you want to activate Service interval function, set the service interval in the User setting mode.

For more details, refer to “User setting mode" in this chapter.

To reset the service interval to the km and days you preset before:

Press the OK button (reset) for more than 1 second.

4 85


✽

NOTICE

If any of the following conditions occur, the km and days may be incorrect.

- The battery cable is disconnected.

- The fuse switch is turned off.

- The battery is discharged.

Master Warning Mode

User Settings Mode

Description

• This warning light informs the driver of the following situations

- Low washer fluid

- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) malfunction (if equipped)

- Lane Departure warning system

(LDWS) malfunction (if equipped)

- Autonomous Emergency Braking

(AEB) malfunction (if equipped)

- Advanced smart cruise control system (ASCC) malfunction (if equipped)

- Service reminder (if equipped)

- Lamp malfunction and so on.

The Master Warning Light illuminates when more than one of the above warning situations occur. At this time, the LCD Modes Icon will change from ( ) to ( ).

If the warning situation is solved, the master warning light will be turned off and the LCD Modes Icon will be changed back to its previous icon ( ).

(ex : refill the washer fluid)

OYP044161N

In this mode, you can change setting of the doors, lights, and so on.

4 86


Driving Assist

Smart Cruise Control Response

(if equipped)

Choose the sensitivity of the smart cruise control.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (if equipped)

If this item is checked, rear cross traffic alert function will be activated.

Autonomous Emergency Braking

(AEB) (if equipped)

If this item is checked, Autonomous emergency braking function will be activated.

Door / Liftgate

Automatically lock

• Disable:

The auto door lock operation will be deactivated.

• Enable on speed:

All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).

• Enable on shift:

All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is shifted from the P

(Park) position to the R (Reverse),

N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.

Automatically unlock

• Disable:

The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.

• On Key out:

All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button is set to the OFF position.

• On shift to P:

All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position.

Forward Collision Warning

(if equipped)

If this item is checked, forward collision warning function will be activated.

4 87


Two Press Unlock

• Off:

The two press unlock function will be deactivated. Therefore, all doors will unlock if the door is unlocked.

• On:

The driver’s door will unlock if the door is unlocked. When the door is unlocked again within 4 seconds, all doors will unlock.

Power liftgate (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the power liftgate function will be activated.

Smart Power liftgate (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the smart power liftgate function will be activated.

Lights

One touch turn signal

If this item is checked, the lane change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7 times when the turn signal lever is moved slightly.

• On : You can set the one touch turn sginal function.

• Off : The One touch turn signal function will be deactivated.

Horn Feedback

• Off:

The Horn feedback operation will be deactivated.

• On:

After locking the door by pressing the lock button on the transmitter, if you press the lock button again within 4 seconds, the warning sound will operate once to indicate that all doors are locked.

Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the headlamp delay function will be activated.

Welcome Light (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the welcome light function of the pocket lamp will be activated.

4 88


Sound

Park assist system vol. (if equipped)

Adjust the Park Assist System volume. (Level 1~3).

Seat / Steering

Seat easy access (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the driver’s seat will automatically move forward or rearward for the driver to enter or exit the vehicle comfortably.

Blind spot detection Sound (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the blind spot detection sound function will be activated.

Welcome sound(if equipped)

If this item is checked, the welcome sound function will be activated.

Steering Position

If this item is checked, the warning function regarding the steering wheel alignment will be activated.

Service interval

On this mode, you can activate the service interval function with mileage

(mi. or km) and period (months).

• Off : The service interval function will be deactivated.

• On : You can set the service interval (km and months).

4 89


Other features

Fuel economy auto reset

• Off :

The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refueling.

• On (Auto Reset) :

The average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.

For more details, refer to “Trip modes" in this chapter.

Sub-Scale (for Type B cluster)

If this item checked, Sub-scale speedometer will be displayed in the cluster.

Fuel Economy Unit

Choose the fuel economy unit.

Temperature Unit

Convert the temperature unit from °C to °F or from °F to °C.

Wiper/Light Display (if equipped)

If this item checked, LCD display shows a selected wiper/light mode whenever you changed its mode.

Language

Choose the language you prefer within the LCD.

Warning Messages

Shift to P position

(for smart key system)

OYP044131N

• This warning message illuminates if you try to turn off the engine without the shift lever in P (Park) position.

• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop

Button turns to the ACC position (If you press the Engine Start/Stop

Button once more, it will turn to the

ON position).

4 90

Low Key Battery



Press start button while turn steering (for smart key system)

Press brake pedal to start engine


OYP044125N

• This warning message illuminates if the battery of the smart key is discharged when the Engine

Start/Stop Button changes to the

OFF position.

OYP044271N

• This warning message illuminates if the steering wheel does not unlock normally when the Engine

Start/Stop Button is pressed.

• It means that you should press the

Engine Start/Stop Button while turning the steering wheel right and left.

OYP044133N

• This warning message illuminates if the Engine Start/Stop Button changes to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal.

• It means that you should depress the brake pedal to start the engine.

4 91


Key not in vehicle


Key not detected


Press start button again


OYP044121N

• This warning message illuminates if the smart key is not in the vehicle when you press the Engine

Start/Stop Button.

• It means that you should always have the smart key with you.

OYP044123N

• This warning message illuminates if the smart key is not detected when you press the Engine

Start/Stop Button.

OYP044127N

• This warning message illuminates if you can not operate the Engine

Start/Stop Button when there is a problem with the Engine Start/Stop

Button system.

• It means that you could start the engine by pressing the Engine

Start/ Stop Button once more.

• If the warning illuminates each time you press the Engine

Start/Stop Button, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

4 92

Press start button with key


Check fuse BRAKE SWITCH



Shift to P or N to start engine


OYP044129N

• This warning message illuminates if you press the Engine Start/Stop

Button while the warning message

“Key not detected” is illuminating.

• At this time, the immobilizer indicator light blinks.

OYP044137N

• This warning message illuminates if the brake switch fuse is disconnected.

• It means that you should replace the fuse with a new one. If that is not possible, you can start the engine by pressing the Engine

Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in the ACC position.

OYP044145N

• This warning message illuminates if you try to start the engine with the shift lever not in the P (Park) or

N (Neutral) position.

✽

NOTICE

You can start the engine with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.

But, for your safety, we recommend that you start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

4 93


Door / Hood / liftgate Open Sunroof Open (if equipped) Align steering wheel (if equipped)

OUM044133

• It means that any door, hood, or liftgate is open.

OUM044134

• The warning message illuminates if you turn off the engine and then open the driver's door when the sunroof is open.

OYP044141N

• This warning message illuminates if you start the engine when the steering wheel is turned to more than 90 degrees to the left or right.

• It means that you should turn the steering wheel and make the angle of the steering wheel be less than

30 degrees.

4 94

Low Washer Fluid (if equipped) Turn on FUSE SWITCH Low Fuel


OYP044139N

• This warning message illuminates on the service reminder mode if the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty.

• It means that you should refill the washer fluid.

OYP044135N

• This warning message illuminates if the fuse switch on the fuse box is

OFF.

• It means that you should turn the fuse switch on.

For more details, refer to “Fuses” in chapter 7.

OYP044276N

This warning message illuminates if the fuel tank is nearly empty.

- When the low fuel level warning light is illuminated.

- When the trip computer displays

"--- km (or mile)" as range.

Add fuel as soon as possible.

4 95


Check high beam assist system

(if equipped)

Check headlight Check AEB system (if equipped)

OYP044180N

This warning message illuminates if there is a malfunction (burned-out bulb or circuit malfunction) with the headlamp. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized

Kia dealer.

OUM044271L

This warning message illuminates if there is a malfunction (burned-out bulb except LED lamp or circuit malfunction) with the headlamp. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

✽

NOTICE

When replacing the bulb, use the same wattage bulb.


“BULB WATTAGE” in chapter 8.

OUMA057225

• This warning message illuminates if there is a malfunction with the

Autonomous Emergency Braking

(AEB) system. In this case, have your vehicle be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

For more details, refer to

"Autonomous Emergency Braking

(AEB) system" in chapter 5.

4 96


WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning lights

Air bag Warning Light Seat Belt Warning Light

✽

NOTICE -

Warning lights

Make sure that all warning lights are OFF after starting the engine. If any light is still ON, this indicates a situation that needs attention.

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with the SRS.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

This warning light informs the driver that the seat belt is not fastened.

For more details, refer to the “Seat

Belts” in chapter 3.

4 97


Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Light




- It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds

- It remains on if the parking brake is applied.

• When the parking brake is applied.

• When the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low.

- If the warning light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates the brake fluid level in reservoir is low.

If the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required (For more details, refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7).

Then check all brake components for fluid leaks. If any leaks in the brake system are still found, the warning light remains on, or the brakes do not operate properly, do not drive the vehicle.

In this case, have your vehicle towed to an authorized Kia dealer and inspected.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dualdiagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail.

With only one of the dual systems working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the vehicle.

Also, the vehicle will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working.

If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

4 98


Driving the vehicle with a warning light ON is dangerous. If the Parking

Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light illuminates when the parking brake released, it indicates that the brake fluid level is low.


Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Warning Light





• When there is a malfunction with the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system).


Electronic

Brake force

Distribution

(EBD) System

Warning Light

These two warning lights illuminate at the same time while driving:

• When the ABS and regular brake system may not work normally.


4 99


WARNING -

Electronic

Brake force Distribution

(EBD) System Warning Light

When both ABS and Parking

Brake & Brake Fluid Warning

Lights are on, the brake system will not work normally and you may experience an unexpected and dangerous situation during sudden braking thereby increasing the risk of a crash.

In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking.

Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible thereby increasing the risk of a crash and injury.

✽

NOTICE

- Electronic Brake force Distribution

(EBD) System

Warning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is on or both ABS and Parking Brake &

Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, the speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter may not work. Also, the EPS

Warning Light may illuminate and the steering effort may increase or decrease.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

Electronic Power

Steering (EPS) Warning

Light




- It remains on until the engine is started.

• When there is a malfunction with the EPS.


4 100


Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL)





• When there is a malfunction with the emission control system.


CAUTION -

Malfunction

Indicator

Lamp (MIL)

Driving with the Malfunction

Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may cause damage to the emission control systems which could affect drivability and/or fuel economy.

CAUTION

- Catalytic

Converter Damage

If the Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage is possible which could result in loss of engine power.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

Charging System

Warning Light





• When there is a malfunction with either the alternator or electrical charging system.

If there is a malfunction with either the alternator or electrical charging system:


2. Turn the engine off and check the alternator drive belt for looseness or breakage.

If the belt is adjusted properly, there may be a problem in the electrical charging system.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

4 101


Engine Oil Pressure

Warning Light





• When the engine oil pressure is low.

If the engine oil pressure is low:


2. Turn the engine off and check the engine oil level (For more details, refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7). If the level is low, add oil as required.

If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION -

Engine damage

If the engine is not stopped immediately after the engine oil pressure warning light is illuminated and stays on while the engine is running, serious engine damage may result.

If the warning light stays on while the engine is running, it indicates that there may be serious engine damage or malfunction. In this case,

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

2. Turn off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level.

3. Start the engine again. If the warning light stays on after the engine is started, turn the engine off immediately. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

4 102


Low Fuel Level Warning

Light


When the fuel tank is nearly empty.

If the fuel tank is nearly empty:

Add fuel as soon as possible.

CAUTION -

Low Fuel

Level

Driving with the Low Fuel Level warning light on or with the fuel level below “0 or E” can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter (if equipped).

Electronic Parking Brake

(EPB) Warning Light

(if equipped)

EPB

Master Warning light

(if equipped)





• When there is a malfunction with the EPB.


✽

NOTICE

- Electronic Parking

Brake (EPB)

Warning Light

The Electronic Parking Brake

(EPB) Warning Light may illuminate when the Electronic Stability control (ESC) Indicator Light comes on to indicate that the ESC is not working properly (This does not indicate malfunction of the EPB).

• This warning light informs the driver of the following situations

- Low washer fluid (if equipped)

- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) malfunction (if equipped)

- Lane Departure warning system

(LDWS) malfunction (if equipped)

- Autonomous Emergency Braking

(AEB) malfunction (if equipped)

- Advanced smart cruise control system (ASCC) malfunction

(if equipped)

- High beam assist system (HBA) malfunction (if equipped)

- Service required

- Lamp malfunction and so on.

4 103


The Master Warning Light illuminates when more than one of the above warning situations occur. At this time, the LCD Modes Icon will change from ( ) to ( ).

If the warning situation is solved, the master warning light will be turned off and the LCD Modes Icon will be changed back to its previous icon ( ).

(ex : refill the washer fluid)

All Wheel Drive (AWD)

Warning Light

(if equipped)





• When there is a malfunction with the AWD system.


Autonomous Emergency

Braking (AEB) Warning light (if equipped)

Adaptive Front Lighting

System (AFLS) Warning

Light (if equipped)

AFLS


• Once you set the Engine Start/Stop

Button to the ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the AFLS.

If there is a malfunction with the AFLS:


2. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light remains on, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

This indicator light illuminates:

• When there is a malfunction with the AEB.

In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

4 104


Indicator Lights

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) Indicator

Light





• When there is a malfunction with the ESC system.


This indicator light blinks:

While the ESC is operating.

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) OFF

Indicator Light

Immobilizer Indicator

Light (Without Smart Key)





• When you deactivate the ESC system by pressing the ESC OFF button.


• When the vehicle detects the immobilizer in your key properly while the ignition switch is ON.

- At this time, you can start the engine.

- The indicator light goes off after starting the engine.

For more details, refer to “Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.


• When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system.


For more details, refer to “Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

4 105


Immobilizer Indicator

Light (With Smart Key)

This indicator light illuminates for up to 30 seconds:

• When the vehicle detects the smart key in the vehicle properly while the Engine Start/Stop Button is ACC or ON.

- At this time, you can start the engine.

- The indicator light goes off after starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks for a few seconds:

• When the smart key is not in the vehicle.

- At this time, you can not start the engine.

This indicator light illuminates for 2 seconds and goes off:

• When the vehicle can not detect the smart key which is in the vehicle while the Engine Start/Stop

Button is ON.


Turn Signal Indicator

Light


• When you turn the turn signal light on.


• When the battery of the smart key is weak.

- At this time, you can not start the engine. However, you can start the engine if you press the Engine

Start/Stop Button with the smart key. (For more details, refer to

“Starting the Engine” in section 5).

• When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system.


If any of the following occurs, there may be a malfunction with the turn signal system. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized

Kia dealer.

- The indicator light does not blink but illuminates.

- The indicator light blinks more rapidly.

- The indicator light does not illuminate at all.

4 106


High Beam Indicator

Light

Light ON Indicator Light Washer Fluid Warning



• When the headlights are on and in the high beam position

• When the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.

High beam assist indicator (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates :

• When the high-Beam is on with the light switch in the AUTO light position.

• If your vehicle detects oncoming or preceding vehicles, the High beam assist system will switch the high beam to low beam automatically.

For more details, refer to "High beam assist" in this chapter.


• When the tail lights or headlights are on.


• When the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty.

In this case, you should refill the washer fluid.

Front Fog Indicator



• When the front fog lights are on.

Cruise Indicator Light

(if equipped)

CRUISE


• When the cruise control system is enabled.

For more details, refer to “Cruise

Control System” in chapter 5.

4 107


Cruise SET Indicator


SET

AUTO HOLD Indicator


AUTO

HOLD

All Wheel Drive (AWD)

LOCK Indicator Light

(if equipped)


• When the cruise control speed is set.

For more details, refer to “Cruise

Control System” in chapter 5.


• [White] When you activate the auto hold system by pressing the AUTO

HOLD button.

• [Green] When you stop the vehicle completely by depressing the brake pedal with the auto hold system activated.

• [Yellow] When there is a malfunction with the auto hold system.






• When you select AWD Lock mode by pressing the AWD LOCK button.

- The AWD LOCK mode is to increase the drive power when driving on wet pavement, snow covered roads and/or off-road.

❈

For more details, refer to “Auto

Hold” in chapter 5.

CAUTION -

AWD Lock

Mode

Do not use AWD LOCK mode on dry paved roads or highway, it can cause noise, vibration or damage of AWD related parts.

4 108


REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING -

Rear parking assist system

Never rely solely on the rear parking assist system. Always perform a visual inspection to make sure the vehicle is clear of all obstructions before moving the vehicle in any direction. Stop immediately if you are aware of a child anywhere near your vehicle. Some objects may not be detected by the sensors, due to the object's size or material.

Sensors

OUMA044046

The rear parking assist system assists the driver during backward movement of the vehicle by chiming if any object is sensed within a distance of 120 cm (47 in.) behind the vehicle.

This system is a supplemental system and it is not intended to nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driver. The sensing range and objects detectable by the back sensors are limited. Whenever backing-up, pay as much attention to what is behind you as you would in a vehicle without a rear parking assist system.

Operation of the rear parking assist system

Operating condition

• This system will activate when the indicator on the rear parking assist

OFF button is not illuminated. If you desire to deactivate the rear parking assist system, press the rear parking assist OFF button again. (The indicator on the button will illuminate.) To turn the system on, press the button again. (The indicator on the button will go off.)

If the vehicle is moving at a speed over 5 km/h (3 mph), the system may not be activated correctly.

4 109


• This system will activate when backing up with the ignition switch

ON.

If the vehicle is moving at a speed over 5 km/h (3 mph), the system may not be activated correctly.

• The sensing distance while the back-up warning system is in operation is approximately 120 cm (47 in.) at the rear bumper center area,

60 cm (23.5 in.) at the rear bumper both side area.

• When more than two objects are sensed at the same time, the closest one will be recognized first.

Types of warning sound

• When an object is 120 cm to 61 cm

(47 in. to 24 in.) from the rear bumper: Buzzer beeps intermittently.

• When an object is 60 cm to 31 cm

(24 in. to 12 in.) from the rear bumper: Buzzer beeps more frequently.

• When an object is within 30 cm (12 in.) of the rear bumper:

Buzzer sounds continuously.

Non-operational conditions of rear parking assist system

The rear parking assist system may not operate properly when:

1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will operate normally when the moisture has been cleared.)

2. The sensor is covered with foreign matter, such as snow or water, or the sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate normally when the material is removed or the sensor is no longer blocked.)

3. Driving on uneven road surfaces

(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradient).

4. Objects generating excessive noise (vehicle horns, loud motorcycle engines, or truck air brakes) are within range of the sensor.

5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.

6. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones are within range of the sensor.

7. The sensor is covered with snow.

8. Trailer towing

4 110


The detecting range may decrease when:

1. The sensor is covered with foreign matter such as snow or water.

(The sensing range will return to normal when removed.)

2. Outside air temperature is extremely hot or cold.

The following objects may not be recognized by the sensor:

1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes, chains or small poles.

2. Objects which tend to absorb the sensor frequency such as clothes, spongy material or snow.

3. Undetectable objects smaller than

1 m (40 in.) in height and narrower than 14 cm (6 in.) in diameter.

Rear parking assist system precautions

• The rear parking assist system may not sound consistently depending on the speed and shapes of the objects detected.

• The rear parking assist system may malfunction if the vehicle bumper height or sensor installation has been modified or damaged. Any non-factory installed equipment or accessories may also interfere with the sensor performance.

• The sensor may not recognize objects less than 40 cm (15 in.) from the sensor, or it may sense an incorrect distance. Use caution.

• When the sensor is frozen or covered with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor may be inoperative until the material is removed using a soft cloth.

• Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor. Sensor damage could occur.

✽

NOTICE

This system can only sense objects within the range and location of the sensors. It cannot detect objects in other areas where sensors are not installed. Also, small or slim objects, such as poles or objects located between sensors may not be detected by the sensors.

Always visually check behind the vehicle when backing up.

Be sure to inform any drivers of the vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the system regarding the systems capabilities and limitations.

4 111


Self-diagnosis

If you don’t hear an audible warning sound or if the buzzer sounds intermittently when shifting the gear to the

R (Reverse) position, this may indicate a malfunction in the rear parking assist system. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

✽

NOTICE

Your new vehicle warranty does not cover any accidents or damage to the vehicle or injuries to its occupants due to a rear parking assist system malfunction. Always drive safely and cautiously.

4 112


REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

OUMA044049

OUMA046050

The rearview camera will activate with the ignition switch ON and the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.

This system is a supplemental system that shows behind the vehicle through the rearview display mirror while backing up unless equipped with a navigation system, then will display on the screen.

The rearview camera may be turned off by pressing the ON/OFF button when the rearview camera is activated.

To turn the camera on again, press the ON/OFF button again when the ignition switch is on and the shift lever in R (Reverse). Also, the camera will turn on automatically whenever the ignition switch is turned off and on again.

• This system is a supplementary function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the inside/outside rearview mirrors and the area behind the vehicle before and while backing up because there is a dead zone that can't be seen by the camera.

• Always keep the camera lens clean. If lens is covered with foreign matter, the camera may not operate normally.

❈

If your vehicle is equipped with

AVN(Audio, Video and Navigation) system, rearview display will show behind the vehicle through the

AVN monitor while backing-up.

Refer to a separately supplied manual for detailed information.

WARNING -

Backing & using camera

Never rely solely on the rear view camera when backing. You must always use methods of viewing the area behind you including looking over both shoulders as well as continuously checking all three rear view mirrors. Due to the difficulty of ensuring that the area behind you remains clear, always back slowly and stop immediately if you even suspect that a person, and especially a child, might be behind you.

4 113


360° CAMERA MONITORING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OUMA057230

The 360° camera monitoring system is not a substitute for proper and safe parking procedures. The 360° camera monitoring system may not detect every object surrounding the vehicle. Always drive safely and use caution when parking.

The 360° camera monitoring system can assist in parking by allowing the driver to see around the vehicle.

Push the button into the [ON] position to operate the system.

To cancel the system, push the button again.

Operating conditions

- When the Engine Start/Stop

Button is ON position

- When the transaxle is on D, N or R

- When the vehicle speed is not over

20km/h (12.4 mph)

• When the vehicle speed is over

20km/h (12.4mph), the 360° camera monitoring system is turned off. If the vehicle speed is not over 20km/h

(12.4mph) after turning off the 360° camera monitoring system by over speed, the 360° camera monitoring system is not turned on. To operate again, push the button.

• When the vehicle moves backwards, regardless of On/Off of button and vehicle speed, the 360° camera monitoring system is operated.

• When the liftgate and driver/passenger door are opened and the outside mirror is folded, the warning is illuminated in 360° camera monitoring system.

• If the 360° camera monitoring system is not operating normally, the system should be checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

• When the vehicle moves over

10km/h forward after moving backward, the 360° camera monitoring system screen will be turned off.

WARNING

This system is a supplementary function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the area around the vehicle before and while moving.

4 114


LIGHTING

Battery saver function

• The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged if the lights are left in the

ON position. The system automatically shuts off the parking lights 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed and the driver’s door is opened and closed.

• With this feature, the parking lights will turn off automatically if the driver parks on the side of the road at night and opens the driver’s side door.

If necessary, to keep the parking lights on when the ignition key is removed, perform the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parking lights OFF and

ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

Daytime running light

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.

DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, and it is especially helpful after dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will turn the dedicated lamp OFF when:

1. The headlight or fog lamp switch is

ON.

2. The engine is OFF.

Lighting control

OUM044055

The light switch has a Headlight and a Parking light position.

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the following positions:

(1) OFF position

(2) Auto light position (if equipped)

(3) Parking & Tail light

(4) Headlight position

4 115


Parking & Tail light ( )

Headlight position ( )

Auto light position (if equipped)

OUMA046056

When the light switch is in the parking light position, the tail, license and instrument panel lights will turn ON.

OUMA046054

When the light switch is in the headlight position, the head, tail, license lights will turn ON.

✽

NOTICE

The ignition switch must be in the ON position to turn on the headlights.

OUMA046057

It will operate when the ignition is in

"ON" or the engine is running.

Select the light switch to "AUTO", and the light will turn on or off depending on the ambient light detected by the sensor (1).

4 116


High beam operation

WARNING -

High beams

Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles. Using high beam could obstruct the other driver’s vision.

OUM044059

To turn on the high beam headlamp, push the lever away from you. The lever will return to its original position.

The high beam indicator will light when the headlight high beams are switched on.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on for a prolonged time while the engine is not running.

OUM044058

To flash the headlights, pull the lever towards you. It will return to the normal (low beam) position when released. The headlight switch does not need to be on to use this flashing feature.

4 117


Turn signals and lane change signals

To signal a lane change, move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position (B). The lever will return to the OFF position when released.

If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.

✽

NOTICE

If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or slow, a bulb may be burned out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit.

OUM044060

The ignition switch must be on for the turn signals to function. To turn on the turn signals, move the lever up or down (A). The green arrow indicators on the instrument panel indicate which turn signal is operating. They will self-cancel after a turn is completed. If the indicator continues to flash after a turn, manually return the lever to the OFF position.

One touch turn signal

When changing lanes, move the lane change switch to the direction you want briefly. The lane change switch will move back to the original position but the turn signal will flash three times. This function assists the driver when changing lanes without pressing down on the lane change signal.

Depending on the vehicle, the driver may select or deselect the one touch turn signal function. For more details, please refer to "vehicle settings" in chapter 4.

4 118

Front fog light (if equipped) Check headlight


✽

NOTICE

When replacing the bulb, use the same wattage bulb.


“BULB WATTAGE” in chapter 8.

OUM044061

Fog lights are used to provide improved visibility when visibility is poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn on when the fog light switch (1) is turned to the on position after the headlight is turned on.

To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog light switch (1) to the OFF position.

When in operation, the fog lights consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power. Only use the fog lights when visibility is poor.

OUMA044425

This warning message illuminates if there is a malfunction (burned-out bulb except LED lamp or circuit malfunction) with the headlamp. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

4 119


Headlight leveling device

(if equipped)

Automatic type

To ensure the proper headlight beam is used under various conditions, the headlight beam levels are automatically adjusted depending on the number of passengers, the weight in the trunk, and other driving conditions.

✽

NOTICE

If it does not work properly even though your car is inclined backward according to passenger's posture, or the headlight beam is irradiated to the high or low position, have the system be inspected by an authorized

Kia dealer.

Do not attempt to inspect or replace the wiring yourself.

AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting

System) (if equipped)

OUMA046057

Adaptive front lighting system uses the steering angle and vehicle speed, to keep your field of vision wide by swiveling and leveling the headlamp.

Change the switch to the AUTO position when the engine is running. The adaptive front lighting system will operate when the headlamp is ON.

To turn off the AFLS, change the switch to other positions. After turning the AFLS off, headlamp swiveling no longer occurs, but leveling operates continuously.

If the AFLS malfunction indicator comes on, the AFLS is not working properly. Drive to the nearest safe location and restart the engine. If the indicator continuously remains on, have system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

4 120


WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield wiper/washer

A : Wiper speed control (front)

· MIST – Single wipe

· OFF – Off

· INT – Intermittent wipe

· LO – Low wiper speed

· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent control wipe time adjustment

Rear window wiper/washer

OUMA044063/OUMA046340

D : Rear wiper/washer control*

· HI – Continuous wipe

· LO – Intermittent wipe*

· OFF – Off

E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)*

* if equipped

Windshield wipers

Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON.

MIST : For a single wiping cycle, move the lever to this (MIST) position and release it. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is held in this position.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation

INT : Wiper operates intermittently at the same wiping intervals. Use this mode in light rain or mist.

To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob.

LO : Normal wiper speed

HI : Fast wiper speed

✽

NOTICE

If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the windshield wipers to ensure proper operation.

C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*

4 121


Auto control (if equipped)

Rain sensor

OUMA044224

The rain sensor located on the upper end of the windshield glass senses the amount of rainfall and controls the wiping cycle for the proper interval. The more it rains, the faster the wiper operates. When the rain stops, the wipers stop.

To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob (1).

If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode when the ignition switch is ON, the wiper will operate once to perform a self-check of the system. Set the wiper to OFF position when the wiper is not in use.

CAUTION

When the ignition switch is ON and the windshield wiper switch is placed in the AUTO mode, use caution in the following situations to avoid any injury to the hands or other parts of the body:

• Do not touch the upper end of the windshield glass facing the rain sensor.

• Do not wipe the upper end of the windshield glass with a damp or wet cloth.

• Do not put pressure on the windshield glass.

CAUTION

• When washing the vehicle, set the wiper switch in the OFF position to stop the auto wiper operation.

• The wiper may operate and be damaged if the switch is set in the AUTO mode while washing the vehicle.

• Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the passenger side windshield glass. Damage to system parts could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.

(Continued)

4 122


(Continued)

• When starting the vehicle in winter, set the wiper switch in the OFF position. Otherwise, wipers may operate and ice may damage the windshield wiper blades. Always remove all snow and ice and defrost the windshield properly prior to operating the windshield wipers.

• When tinting the windshield, be careful of any fluid getting into the sensor located in the top center of the front windshield. It may damage the related parts.

Front windshield washers

OUMA044068

In the OFF position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers 1-3 cycles.

Use this function when the windshield is dirty.

The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not sufficient, you will need to add appropriate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid to the washer reservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side.

CAUTION -

Washer pump

To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.

WARNING -

Obscured visibility

Do not use the washer in freezing temperatures without first warming the windshield with the defrosters; the washer solution could freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision.

4 123


CAUTION -

Wipers & windshields

• To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

Rear window wiper and washer switch

OUMA044067

The rear window wiper and washer switch is located at the end of the wiper and washer switch lever. Turn the switch to the desired position to operate the rear wiper and washer.

HI : Continuous wipe

LO : Intermittent wipe

OFF : OFF

OUMA044069

Push the lever away from you to spray rear washer fluid and to run the rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.

4 124


INTERIOR LIGHTS

Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the engine is not running.

It may cause battery discharge.

WARNING -

Interior

Lights

Do not use the interior lights when driving in the dark.

Accidents could happen because the view may be obscured by interior lights.

Automatic turn off function

(if equipped)

The interior lights automatically turn off approximately 20 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off, if the lights are in the ON position.

If your vehicle is equipped with the theft alarm system, the interior lights automatically turn off approximately

3 seconds after the system enters armed stage.

Room lamp

■

Type A

■

Type B

OUM044071

•

OUM044072

: The light stays on at all times.

4 125


Map lamp

■

Type A

■

Type B

OUM046070

OUM044070

• Press the lens (A) to turn the map lamp on.

To turn the map lamp off, press the lens (A) again.

• (1) :

- The map lamp and room lamp come on when a door is opened.

The lamps go out after approximately 30 seconds.

- The map lamp and room lamp come on for approximately 30 seconds when doors are unlocked with a transmitter or smart key as long as the doors are not opened.

- The map lamp and room lamp will stay on for approximately 20 minutes if a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or

LOCK/OFF position.

- The map lamp and room lamp will stay on continuously if the door is opened with the ignition switch in the ON position.

- The map lamp and room lamp will go out immediately if the ignition switch is changed to the ON position or all doors are locked.

- To turn off the DOOR mode, press the DOOR button (1) once again

(not pressed).

✽

NOTICE

The DOOR mode and ROOM mode can not be selected at the same time.

• (2):

The map lamp stays on at all times.

• (3):

The map lamp of driver’s side stays on at all times.

• (4):

The map lamp of passenger’s side stays on at all times.

4 126

Luggage lamp (if equipped)


Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped) Glove box lamp

OUM044074

• : The light comes on when the liftgate is opened.

: The light stays off at all times.

•

• : The light stays on at all times.

OUMA044432

Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will automatically turn on the mirror light.

OUM044073

The glove box lamp comes on when the glove box is opened.

To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the glove box securely after using the glove box.

* The actual sunvisor lamp in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

CAUTION

- Vanity mirror lamp

If you use the vanity mirror lamp, turn off the lamp before returning the sunvisor to its original position, otherwise it could result in battery discharge and possible sunvisor damage.

4 127


WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Headlight (Headlamp) escort function

Interior light

The headlights (and/or taillights) remain on for approximately 5 minutes after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if the driver’s door is opened and closed, the headlights are turned off after 15 seconds.

The headlights can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the transmitter or smart key twice or turning off the light switch from the headlight or Auto light position.

When the interior light switch is in the

DOOR position and all doors (and liftgate) are locked and closed, the room lamp will come on for 30 seconds if any of the below is performed.

• Without smart key system

- When the door unlock button is pressed on the transmitter.

• With the smart key system

- When the door unlock button is pressed on the smart key.

- When the button of the outside door handle is pressed.

Pocket lamp (if equipped)

When all doors are locked and closed, the pocket lamp will come on for 15 seconds if any of the below is performed.

• With the smart key system

- When the door unlock button is pressed on the smart key.

- When the button of the outside door handle is pressed.

At this time, if you press the door lock button, the lamps will turn off immediately.

At this time, if you press the door lock button, the lamps will turn off immediately.

4 128


DEFROSTER

CAUTION -

Conductors

To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.

If you want to defrost and defog the front windshield, refer to “Windshield defrosting and defogging” in this section.

Rear window defroster

OUM044145

The defroster heats the window to remove frost, fog and thin ice from the rear window, while the engine is running.

To activate the rear window defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel. The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster is ON.

If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the defroster, press the rear window defroster button again.

Outside rearview mirror defroster

(if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the outside rearview mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.

Wiper de-icer (if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the wiper deicer, it will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.

4 129


MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

■

Type A

■

Type B

■

Type C

1. Fan speed control knob

2. Front windshield defroster button

3. Rear window defroster button

4. Air conditioning button

5. MAX A/C (Max air conditioning) button

6. Mode selection button

7. Air intake control button

8. Temperature control knob

9. 3rd row seat Air conditioning ON/OFF button*

10. 3rd row seat Air conditioning Fan speed control knob*

* If equipped

✽

NOTICE

Operating the blower when the ignition switch is in the ACC position could cause the battery to discharge. Only operate the blower when the ignition switch is in the ON position with the engine running.

OUMA044147/OUMA044146/OUM044177

4 130

Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position (if equipped).

5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.


OUM044149L

4 131


Mode selection

Face-Level (B, D)

Floor/Defrost-Level

(A, C, D, E, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)

Defrost-Level (A, D)

OUM044148

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five symbols are used to represent MAX

A/C, Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-

Defrost and Defrost air position.

The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside of the vehicle faster.

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

4 132


Temperature control MAX A/C selection

OUM044233L

To select the MAX A/C, turn the fan speed control knob to the right then press the MAX A/C button.

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face.

In this mode, the air conditioning and the recirculated air position will be selected automatically.

OUM044151

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumbwheel (if equipped).

Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

OUM044152

The temperature control knob allows you to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation system.

To change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to the right position for warm and hot air or left position for cooler air.

4 133


Air intake control

■

Type A

■

Type B

OUM044153

OUM044153L

The air intake control is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, press the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Sunroof inside air recirculation

(if equipped)

If the sunroof opens while the heater or Air Conditioning system is operating, the outside (fresh) air will be selected automatically for ventilating the car. Then, if you select the recirculated air position, the outside

(fresh) air will be selected automatically after 3 minutes.

If you close the sunroof, the intake mode will be changed to the previous selected mode.

✽

NOTICE

Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment may become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

WARNING

- Reduced visibilty

Continued use of the climate control system in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

4 134


WARNING

- Sleeping with AC on

Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on as this may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.

Fan speed control To turn off the blowers

WARNING

- Recirculated air

Continuous use of the climate control system in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

OUM044154

The ignition switch must be in the ON position for fan operation.

The fan speed control knob allows you to control the fan speed of the air flowing from the ventilation system.

To change the fan speed, turn the knob to the right for higher speed or left for lower speed.

OUMA044341

To turn off the blowers, turn the fan speed control knob to the "0" position.

4 135


Air conditioning

3

rd

row air conditioning

(if equipped)

OUM044155

Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

OUM044156

To turn on the third row air conditioning control system

1.You can operate the third row air conditioning system from the first row control panel. Changing the front row’s fan speed by turning the control knob will automatically change the third row’s fan speed as well.

When the front row air conditioning has been turned off and you want to stop the A/C in the third row, press the third row air conditioning select button one more time. Then, the third row’s A/C will also turn off.

4 136

2.The third row A/C system can be separately controlled by the control buttons in the third row. When the

A/C is ON or OFF, the third row A/C control button in the front row will turn ON or OFF, informing the front passengers of the situation.

3.The fan speed of the third row air conditioning can also be separately controlled by turning the fan speed control knob.


System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.



Heating





5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.


Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled with refrigerant*.

1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.


3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

• The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians to insure proper and safe operation.

• The refrigerant system should be serviced in a well-ventilated place.

• The air conditioning evaporator

(cooling coil) shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle and new replacement MAC evaporators shall be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

4 137


CAUTION -

Excessive AC

When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high.

Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

✽

NOTICE

When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture on the inside surface of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

4 138


Climate control air filter

(if equipped)

Outside air

Recirculated air

Blower

Climate control air filter

Evaporator core

Heater core

1LDA5047

The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system.

If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, we recommend that the climate control air filter be replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

✽

NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections and changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, we recommend that the system should be checked at an authorized Kia dealer.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a negative influence on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, have the system inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

4 139


WARNING

The oil and refrigerant in your vehicle's air conditioning system is under very high pressure. If proper service procedures are not followed an explosion may result. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, the air conditioning system in your vehicle should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

CAUTION

- AC Repair

It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used, otherwise damage to the vehicle may occur. To prevent damage, the air conditioning system in your vehicle should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

4 140


AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

■

Front climate control (Type A)

■

Front climate control (Type B)

1. Driver`s temperature control knob


3. Blower OFF button



6. Fan speed control button



9. Passenger`s temperature control knob

10. SYNC button

11. A/C display

12. 3 rd row air conditioning ON/OFF button*

* if equipped

✽

NOTICE

Operating the blower when the ignition switch is in the ACC position could cause the battery to discharge. Only operate the blower when the ignition switch is in the ON position with the engine running.

OUMA044157/OUMA044158

4 141


■

Front climate control (Type C)

■

Front climate control (Type D)

■

3 rd row air conditioning control

4 142

1. Driver`s temperature control knob


3. Blower OFF button



6. Fan speed control button



9. Passenger`s temperature control knob

10. SYNC button

11. Climate button

12. 3 rd row air conditioning ON/OFF button*

13. 3 rd row air conditioning fan speed control knob*

* if equipped

OUMA046234/OUMA046235/OUM044177


Automatic heating and air conditioning

■

Driver’s side

■

Passenger’s side

OUMA044159

1. Press the AUTO button. The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically by setting the temperature.

OUMA044162

2. Turn the temperature control knob to the desired temperature.

✽

NOTICE

• To turn the automatic operation off, select any button or switch of the following:

- Mode selection button

- Air conditioning button

- Front windshield defroster button

(Press the button one more time to deselect the front windshield defroster function. The ‘AUTO’ sign will illuminate on the information display once again.)

- Air intake control button

- Fan speed control switch

The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically.

• For your convenience and to improve the effectiveness of the climate control, use the AUTO button and set the temperature to

23°C (73°F).

4 143


OUM044075

✽

NOTICE

Never place anything over the sensor located on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

Manual heating and air conditioning

The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pressing buttons or turning knob(s) other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons or knob(s) selected.


2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:




6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.

Mode selection

OUM044160

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

The air flow outlet port is converted as follows:

Refer to the illustration in the

“Manual climate control system”.

4 144


Face-Level Floor-Level

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

Bi-Level Floor/Defrost-Level

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

OUM044161

Defrost-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

4 145


Temperature control

■

Driver’s side

■

Passenger’s side

OUM044151

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumbwheel (if equipped).

Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

OUMA044162

The temperature will increase to the maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the extreme right.

The temperature will decrease to the minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to the extreme left.

When turning the knob, the temperature will increase or decrease by

0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.

OUMA044163

Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature equally

• Press the “SYNC” button to adjust the driver and passenger side temperature equally.

The passenger side temperature will be set to the same temperature as the driver side temperature.

• Turn the driver side temperature control knob. The driver and passenger side temperature will be adjusted equally.

• When the third row’s seat heater button is turned ON, the third row’s climate and fan speed setting will automatically follow the first row settings.

4 146


Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature individually

• Press the “SYNC” button again to adjust the driver and passenger side temperature individually. The illumination of button turns off.

• Operate the driver side temperature control knob to adjust the driver side temperature.

• Operate the passenger side temperature control knob to adjust the passenger side temperature.

Air intake control

■

Type A, C

■

Type B, D

OUMA044165

Outside (fresh) air position

■

Type A, C With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Temperature conversion

You can switch the temperature mode from Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows:

While pressing the OFF button, press the AUTO button for 3 seconds or more.

The display will change from

Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from

Fahrenheit to Centigrade.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode display will reset to Fahrenheit.

OUMA044164

This is used to select the outside

(fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, push the control button.

Recirculated air position

■ Type B, D

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

4 147


✽

NOTICE

Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

Sunroof inside air recirculation

(if equipped)

If the sunroof opens while the heater or Air Conditioning system is operating, the outside (fresh) air will be selected automatically for ventilating the car. Then, if you select the recirculated air position, the outside

(fresh) air will be selected automatically after 3 minutes.

If you close the sunroof, the intake mode will be changed to the previous selected mode.

Fan speed control

OUM044166L

OUM044191L

The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by operating the fan speed control button.

To change the fan speed, press ( ) the button for higher speed, or push

( ) the button for lower speed. To turn the fan speed control off, press the front blower OFF button.


OUMA044168

Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate).

Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

4 148

OFF mode Climate information screen selection (if equipped)


3

rd

row air conditioning

(if equipped)

OUMA044169

Press the front blower OFF button to turn off the front air climate control system. However, you can still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

OUM044211L

Press the climate information screen selection button to display climate information on the screen.

OUM044156

To turn on the third row air conditioning control system

4 149


1.You can operate the third row air conditioning system from the first row control panel. Changing the front row’s fan speed by pressing the control button will automatically change the third row’s fan speed as well.

When the front row air conditioning has been turned off and you want to stop the A/C in the third row, press the third row air conditioning select button one more time. Then, the third row’s A/C will also turn off.

2.The third row A/C system can be separately controlled by the control buttons in the third row. When the

A/C is ON or OFF, the third row A/C control button in the front row will turn ON or OFF, informing the front passengers of the situation.

3.The fan speed of the third row air conditioning can also be separately controlled by turning the fan speed control knob.

System operation

Ventilation





Heating





5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.

4 150


Air conditioning (if equipped)

All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled with R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Press the air conditioning button.


3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, set the temperature control to the extreme left position, set the mode control to the MAX A/C position, then set the fan speed control to the highest speed.

CAUTION

- Excessive A/C

• When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating.

Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle.

Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

4 151


• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

Climate control air filter

(if equipped)

Outside air

Recirculated air

Blower

Climate control air filter

Evaporator

Heater core core

1LDA5047

The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

✽

NOTICE

• Replace the filter every 24,000 km

(15,000 miles) or once a year.

If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent air conditioner filter inspections and changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at an authorized Kia dealer.

4 152

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a negative impact on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, have the system inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING

The oil and refrigerant in your vehicle's air conditioning system is under very high pressure. If proper service procedures are not followed an explosion may result. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, the air conditioning system in your vehicle should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

CAUTION

It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used, otherwise damage to the vehicle may occur. To prevent damage, the air conditioning system in your vehicle should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.


4 153


WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

WARNING -

Windshield heating

Do not use the or position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection to the position and fan speed control to the lower speed.

• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the windshield.

Manual climate control system

To defog inside windshield

OUMA044170

1. Set the fan speed to the desired position.

2. Select desired temperature.

4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.

If the air conditioning and/or outside

(fresh) air position are not selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.

4 154

To defrost outside windshield

Automatic climate control system

To defog inside windshield


If the air conditioning and outside

(fresh) air position are not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button manually. If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

OUMA044171

1. Set the fan speed to the highest position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot position.

3. Select the position.

4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.

If the air conditioning is not selected automatically press the corresponding button manually.

OUMA044172

1. Set the fan speed to the desired position.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically and the air conditioning will turn on according to the detected ambient temperature.

4 155


To defrost outside windshield

Defogging logic

To reduce the possibility of fogging up the inside of the windshield, the air intake or air conditioning is controlled automatically according to certain conditions such as or position. To cancel or return to the defogging logic, do the following.

Manual climate control system

OUMA044173

1. Set the fan speed to the highest position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot (HI) position.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically and the air conditioning will turn on according to the detected ambient temperature.

OUMA044403


2. Turn the fan speed control knob to the OFF (0) position.

3. Turn the mode selection knob to the defrost position ( ).

4. Push the air intake control button

( ) at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.

4 156


Automatic climate control system

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.

Auto defogging system

(if equipped)

OUMA044404


2. Select the defroster position pressing the defroster button ( ).

3. While pressing the air conditioning button (A/C), press the air intake control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The recirculation indicator blinks 3 times with 0.5 second of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

OUMA044405

Auto defogging reduces the probability of fogging up the inside of the windshield by automatically sensing the moisture of inside the windshield.

The auto defogging system operates when the heater or air conditioning is on.

4 157


CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)

This indicator illuminates when the auto defogging system senses the moisture on the inside of the windshield and operates.

If more moisture is in the vehicle, higher steps operate as follow. For example if auto defogging does not defog inside the windshield at step 1

Outside air position, it tries to defog again at step 2 Blowing air toward the windshield.

To cancel or reset the Auto Defogging

System

Press the front windshield defroster button for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

When the Auto Defogging System is canceled, ADS OFF symbol will blink

3 times and the ADS OFF will be displayed on the climate control information screen.

When the Auto Defogging System is reset, ADS OFF symbol will blink 6 times without a signal.

Step 1 : Outside air position

Step 2 : Blowing air toward the windshield

Step 3 : Increasing air flow toward the windshield

Step 4 : Operating the air conditioning

Step 5 : Maximizing the air conditioning

✽

NOTICE

If the A/C off or recirculated air position is manually selected while the auto defogging system is on, the auto defogging indicator will blink 3 times to give notice that manual operation is canceled.

Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the passenger side windshield glass.

Damage to the system parts could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.

OUM044174L

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the clean air function turns on automatically.

Also, the clean air function turns off automatically, when the ignition switch turns to the OFF position.

4 158


STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

These compartments can be used to store small items required by the driver or passengers.

Center console storage Glove box

• To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment.

• Always keep the storage compartment covers closed while driving.

Do not attempt to place so many items in the storage compartment that the storage compartment cover can not close securely.

WARNING

-

Flammable materials

Do not store, propane cylinders or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.

OUM044076

To open the center console storage, pull up the lever.

OUM044077

The glove box can be locked and unlocked with a master key. (if equipped)

To open the glove box, push the button (1) and the glove box will automatically open. Close the glove box after use.

4 159


WARNING

To reduce the risk of injury in an accident or sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed while driving.

Sunglass holder Luggage box

■

Type A

✽

NOTICE

If the temperature control knob is in the warm or hot position, warm or hot air will flow into the glove box.

OUM044079

■

Type B (if equipped)

OUM044078

To open the sunglass holder, press the cover and the holder will slowly open. Place your sunglasses with the lenses facing out.

To close the sunglass holder push it up.

WARNING

- Sunglass holder

Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Heavier objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers.

OUM044181

You can place a first aid kit, a reflector triangle, tools, etc. in the box for easy access.

Grasp the handle on the edge of the cover and lift it.

4 160


INTERIOR FEATURES

Cup holder

WARNING

-

Hot liquids

Do not place uncovered cups with hot liquid in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion. If the hot liquid spills, you may burn yourself. Such a burn to the driver could lead to loss of control of the vehicle.

■

Front

Type A

■

Front

Type B

CAUTION

When cleaning spilled liquids, do not dry the cup holder at high temperature. This may damage the cup holder.

■

Center (if equipped)

OUMA054211

■

Rear (if equipped)

OUM044241L

OUM044240L

Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders.

OUM044242L

4 161


Bottle holder Seat warmer (if equipped)

■

Front seat

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the "OFF" position.

• Each time you press the switch, the temperature setting of the seat will change as follows :

OFF

→

HIGH( )

→

MIDDLE( )

→

LOW( )

OUM044243L

Bottles may be placed in the holder.

✽

NOTICE

Only bottles should be placed in the holder labeled "Bottles Only."

■

Rear seat

OUMA047175

• The seat warmer defaults to the

OFF position whenever the ignition switch is turned on.

✽

NOTICE

With the seat warmer switch in the

ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.

OUM044096

The seat warmer is provided to warm the front seats during cold weather.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat.

4 162


WARNING

- Seat heater burns

The seat warmer may cause burns, even at low temperatures, if used over a long period of time. Never allow passengers who may not be able to take care of themselves to be exposed to the risk of seat heater burns. These include:

1. Infants, children, elderly or disabled persons, or hospital outpatients

2. Persons with sensitive skin or those that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals

4. Intoxicated individuals

5. Individuals taking medication that can cause drowsiness or sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold tablets, etc.)

Seat cooler (Air ventilation seat)

(if equipped)

• The seat warmer (with air ventilation) defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is turned on.

OUMA047176

The temperature setting of the seat changes according to the switch position.

• If you want to cool your seat cushion, press the switch (blue color).

• Each time you press the button, the airflow will change as follows:

OFF

→

HIGH( )

→

MIDDLE( )

→

LOW( )

CAUTION

- Seat damage

• When cleaning the seats, do not use an organic solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline.

Doing so may damage the air ventilation seat.

• Do not place heavy or sharp objects on the seat. Those things may damage the air ventilation seat.

• Be careful not to spill liquid such as water or beverages on the seat. If you spill some liquid, wipe the seat with a dry towel.

Before using the air ventilation seat, dry the seat completely.

4 163


Sunvisor

OHG040168

Use the sunvisor to shield direct light through the front or side windows.

To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use the sunvisor for the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).

Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or backward (3).

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the visor and slide the mirror cover (4).

The ticket holder (5) is provided for holding a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)

* The actual sunvisor lamp in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Power outlet

■

Front

CAUTION

- Vanity mirror lamp

If you use the vanity mirror lamp, turn off the lamp before returning the sunvisor to its original position, otherwise it could result in battery discharge and possible sunvisor damage.

■

2nd row (if equipped)

OUM044084

OUM044085L

The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 10 amps with the engine running.

4 164


• Use the power outlet only when the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could cause the battery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 10A in electric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

• Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicle’s power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.

• Push the plug in as far as it will go.

If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat and the fuse may open.

• Plug in battery equipped electrical/electronic devices with reverse current protection. The current from the battery may flow into the vehicle’s electrical/electronic system and cause system malfunction.

WARNING -

Electric shock

Do not put a finger or a foreign element (pen, etc.) into a power outlet and do not touch with a wet hand. You may get an electric shock.

AC inverter (if equipped)

OUMA044179

OUMA046098

The AC inverter supplies 115V/150W electric power to operate electric accessories or equipment.

4 165


If you wish to use the AC inverter, press the AC inverter button while the engine is running. The light on the AC inverter button will illuminate.

If you press the AC inverter button again, the AC inverter will be deactivated and the light on the AC inverter button will turn off.

✽

NOTICE

After pressing the AC inverter button ON, the indicator lamp illumination will be delayed, while the system conducts a self-check.

OUMA046410

✽

NOTICE

• Rated voltage : AC 115V

• Maximum electric power : 150W

• In order to avoid an electrical system failure, electric shock, etc., be sure to read owner's manual before use.

• Be sure to close the cover except for when in use.

• To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the AC inverter while the engine is not running.

• When not using the AC inverter, make sure to turn off the AC inverter

(the indicator on the button does not illuminate) and close the AC inverter cover.

• After using an electric accessory or equipment, pull the plug out. Leaving the accessory or equipment plugged in for a long time may cause battery discharge.

• Do not use an electric accessory or equipment the power consumption of which is greater than 150W (115V).

• When the AC inverter input voltage is less than 11.3V, the LED light will blink and automatically turn off the power.

AC inverter will operate as normal when the voltage is increased.

• When the AC inverter input voltage is less than 10.7V, the LED light and power will turn off. The AC inverter will operate as normal when the voltage is increased after pressing AC inverter button again.

4 166


• While the power consumption of some electrical devices/appliances may be within the AC inverter’s electric power range, it may malfunction in below cases.

- If the device/appliance requires high electric power for initial start up

- If the device/appliance processes precise/very accurate data

- If the device/appliance requires very stable supply of electricity

USB charger (if equipped)

■

Front

■

Rear

OUMA044406

The battery charging state may be monitored on the electrical device.

Disconnect the USB cable from the

USB port after use.

• Some devices are not supported for fast charging but will be charged with normal speed.

• Use the USB charger when the engine is running to prevent battery discharge.

• Only devices that fit the USB port can be used.

• The USB charger can be used only for battery charging purposes.

• Battery chargers cannot be charged.

CAUTION -

Electric accessory devices

• Do not use broken electric accessories which may damage the AC inverter and electrical systems of the vehicle.

• Do not use two or more electric accessories at the same time. It may cause damage to the electrical systems of the vehicle.

OUM044178L

The USB charger is designed to recharge batteries of small size electrical devices using a USB cable. The electrical devices can be recharged when the Engine Start/Stop button is in ACC/ON/START position.

4 167


Clothes hanger (if equipped)

WARNING

Floor mat anchor (s)

(if equipped)

OUM044086

❈

This actual feature may differ from the illustration.

To use the hanger, pull down the upper portion of hanger.

CAUTION -

Hanging clothing

Do not hang heavy clothes, since those may damage the hook.

OPS046500

Do not hang other objects such as hangers or hard objects except clothes. Also, do not put heavy, sharp or breakable objects in the clothe pockets. In an accident or when the curtain air bag is inflated, it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.

OXM043309

When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps the floor mat from sliding forward.

4 168


The following must be observed when installing ANY floor mat to the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top of one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a single floor mat should be installed in each position.

IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was manufactured with driver's side floor mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floor mat in place.

To avoid any interference with pedal operation, Kia recommends that only the Kia floor mat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.

Side curtain (if equipped)

OUM044087

To use the side curtain:

1. Lift the curtain by the handle (1).

2. Hang the curtain on the hooks on both sides of the handle.

To avoid injury or damage to the side curtain and door moldings, lower side curtain by the handle all the way back to the stowed position. Do not release handle after disengaging from the hooks on the door.

Luggage net holder

(if equipped)

■

Type A

■

Type B

OUM044088

OUM044089

To keep items from shifting in the cargo area, you can use the holders located in the cargo area to attach the luggage net.

If necessary, we recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer.

4 169


CAUTION

To prevent damage to the vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compartment.

WARNING -

Luggage net

To avoid eye injury, DO NOT overstretch the luggage net.

ALWAYS keep your face and body out of the luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT use the luggage net when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.

4 170


EXTERIOR FEATURES

Roof rack (if equipped)

OUM044095

If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can load cargo on top of your vehicle.

✽

NOTICE

If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, be sure not to position cargo onto the roof rack in such a way that it could interfere with sunroof operation.

CAUTION -

Loading Roof

Rack

• When carrying large objects on the roof rack, make sure they do not exceed the overall roof length or width.

• When you are carrying cargo on the roof rack, do not operate the sunroof (if equipped).

WARNING

- Driving with roof load

Always drive slow and turn corners carefully when carrying items on the roof rack. The vehicle center of gravity will be higher when items are loaded onto the roof rack.

• The following specification is the maximum weight that can be loaded onto the roof rack.

Distribute the load as evenly as possible on the roof rack and secure the load firmly.

ROOF 100 kg (220 lbs.)

Loading cargo or luggage in excess of the specified weight limit on the roof rack may damage your vehicle.

• Always drive slowly and turn corners carefully when carrying items on the roof rack. Severe wind updrafts, caused by passing vehicles or natural causes, can cause sudden upward pressure on items loaded on the roof rack. This is especially true when carrying large, flat items such as wood panels or mattresses. This could cause the items to fall off the roof rack and cause damage to your vehicle or others around you.

• To prevent damage or loss of cargo while driving, check frequently before or while driving to make sure the items on the roof rack are securely fastened.

4 171


AUDIO SYSTEM

If you install aftermarket HID head lamps, your vehicle’s audio and electronic devices may malfunction.

Antenna

■

Pole Type

■

Shark fin type

CAUTION

- Antenna

Before entering a place with a low height clearance or a car wash, remove the antenna pole by rotating it counterclockwise.

If not, the antenna may be damaged.

OUM044339L/OANNMM2901

Pole antenna

Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to receive AM or/and FM broadcast signals.

This antenna pole is removable. To remove the roof antenna pole, turn it counterclockwise. To install the roof antenna pole, turn it clockwise.

• When reinstalling your roof antenna, it is important that it is fully tightened and adjusted to the upright position to ensure proper reception.

• When cargo is loaded on the roof rack, do not place the cargo near the antenna pole to ensure proper reception.

Shark fin antenna

The shark fin antenna will receive the

AM, FM broadcast signals and transmit data.

4 172


Steering wheel remote controller

OUMA046409

(1) VOLUME

Used to control volume.

(2) SEEK

When pressed shortly (under 0.8

seconds).

- FM, AM mode : Searches broadcast frequencies saved to presets.

- CD, USB, iPod

®

, My Music,

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology

Audio mode : Changes the track, file.

When pressed and held (over 0.8

seconds).

- FM, AM mode : Automatically searches broadcast frequencies and channels.

- CD, USB, iPod

®

, My Music mode :

Rewinds or fast forwards the track or file.

(3) MUTE

Mutes audio volume.

(4) MODE

Each time this key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of FM1,

FM2, AM, CD, USB (iPod), AUX, My

Music, BT Audio.

If the media is not connected or a disc is not inserted, corresponding modes will be disabled.

Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) to turn the audio system on/off.

When power is off, press the key to turn power back on.

When pressed shortly.

- When pressed in the phone screen, displays call history screen.

- When pressed in the dial screen, makes a call.

- When pressed in the incoming call screen, answers the call.

- When pressed while another incoming call is waiting, switches to waiting call (Call Waiting).

When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds).

- When pressed in the Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology Handsfree wait mode, redials the last call.

- When pressed during a

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology Handsfree call, switches call back to mobile phone (Private).

- When pressed while calling on the mobile phone, switches call back to

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology

Handsfree (Operates only when

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology

Handsfree is connected).

4 173


Ends phone call.

AUX, USB port

When pressed shortly.

- Starts voice recognition.

- When selected during a voice prompt, stops the prompt and converts to voice command waiting state.

When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds).

- Ends voice recognition.

❈

The Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth

®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A compatible

Bluetooth ® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology.

OUM044044L

If your vehicle has an AUX and/or

USB(universal serial bus) port, you can use the AUX port to connect audio devices and the USB port to plug in a USB device or iPod

®.

✽

NOTICE

When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device.

* iPod ® is a Registered trademark of

Apple Inc. iPod ® mobile digital device sold separately. Connectivity may require use of the Kia accessory cable.

WARNING

- Distracted driving

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

4 174

How vehicle audio works

FM reception


This can be due to factors, such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.

AM reception

JBM001

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then processed by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers.

However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear.

JBM002

AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long distance,low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight. In addition, they curve around obstructions resulting in better signal coverage.

4 175


FM radio station

JBM003

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade within short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, and obstructions. This can lead to undesirable or unpleasant listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

JBM004

• Fading - As your vehicle moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.

JBM005

• Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.

4 176


Using a cellular phone or a twoway radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio system. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, try to operate mobile devices as far from the audio equipment as possible.

When using a communication system such as a cellular phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted.

When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING

- Cell phone use

Do not use a cellular phone while driving. Stop at a safe location to use a cellular phone.

WARNING

- Driver

Distraction

• Do not stare at the screen while driving. Staring at the screen for prolonged periods of time could lead to traffic accidents.

• Using the phone while driving may lead to a lack of attention of traffic conditions and increase the likelihood of accidents. Use the phone feature after parking the vehicle.

WARNING

- Audio System

Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system.

Such acts could result in fire or electric shock.

WARNING

- Antenna

Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as such acts may lead to lightning induced electric shock.

CAUTION

Refrain from use if the screen is blank or no sound can be heard as these signs may indicate product malfunction.

4 177


• Adjust the volume to levels that allow the driver to hear sounds from outside of the vehicle. Driving in a state where external sounds cannot be heard may lead to accidents.

• Pay attention to the volume setting when turning the device on. A sudden output of extreme volume upon turning the device on could lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust the volume to a suitable levels before turning off the device.)

• Turn on the car ignition before using the audio system. Do not operate the audio system for long periods of time with the ignition turned off; such operations may lead to battery discharge.

• In case of product malfunction, please contact your place of purchase or After Service center.

• Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.

CAUTION

• Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact. Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause damage to the LCD or touch screen.

• When cleaning the device, make sure to turn off the audio system and use a dry and smooth cloth. Never use tough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents (alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) as such materials may damage the device panel or cause color/quality deterioration

• Do not place beverages close to the audio system. Spilling beverages may lead to system malfunction.

• Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil from contacting the dashboard because they may cause damage or discoloration.

4 178


USING THE USB DEVICE

• To use an external USB device, make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle. Connect the device after starting up.

• If you start the engine when the

USB device is connected, it may damage the USB device. (USB flashdrives are very sensitive to electric shock.)

• If the engine is started up or turned off while the external USB device is connected, the external USB device may not work.

• The System may not play unauthenticated MP3 or WMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files with the compression rate between

8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music files with the compression rate between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.

• Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB device.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not recognizable.

• Depending on the condition of the external USB device, the connected external USB device can be unrecognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sector setting of External USB device is not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then the device will not be recognized.

• Use only a USB device formatted to FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/F authentication may not be recognizable.

• Make sure the USB connection terminal does not come in contact with the human body or other objects.

• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a short period of time, it may break the device.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• You may hear a strange noise when connecting or disconnecting a USB device.

• If you disconnect the external USB device during playback in USB mode, the external USB device can be damaged or may malfunction. Therefore, disconnect the external USB device when the audio is turned off or in another mode. (e.g, Radio)

• Depending on the type and capacity of the external USB device or the type of the files stored in the device, there is a difference in the time for recognition the device.

• Do not use the USB device for purposes other than playing music files.

• Playing videos through the USB is not supported.

• Use of USB accessories such as rechargers or heaters using USB

I/F may lower performance or cause trouble.

(Continued)

4 179


(Continued)

• If you use devices such as a USB hub purchased separately, the vehicle’s audio system may not recognize the USB device. In that case, connect the USB device directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.

• If the USB device is divided by logical drives, only the music files on the highest-priority drive are recognized by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/

Cellular phone/Digital camera can be unrecognizable by standard

USB I/F can be unrecognizable.

• Charging through the USB may not be supported in some mobile devices.

• USB HDD or USB types liable to connection failures due to vehicle vibrations are not supported. (i-stick type)

• Some non-standard USB devices

(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be unrecognizable.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Some USB flash memory readers

(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or external-HDD type devices can be unrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM (DIGI-

TAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable.

• The data in the USB memory may be lost while using this audio.

Always back up important data on a personal storage device.

• Please avoid using

USB memory products which can be used as key chains or cellular phone accessories as they could cause damage to the USB jack.

Please make certain only to use plug type connector products.

USING iPod

®

DEVICE

iPhone

® is a registered trademark of

Apple inc.

• Some iPod

® models may not support communication protocol and files may not play properly.

Supported iPod

® models:

- iPhone

®

3GS/4 or latest model

- iPod

® touch 1st~4th generation

- iPod

® nano 1st~6th generation

- iPod

® classic

• The order of search or playback of songs in the iPod

® can be different from the order searched in the audio system.

• If the iPod

® is disabled due to its own malfunction, reset the iPod

®

.

(Reset: Refer to iPod

® manual)

• An iPod

® may not operate normally on low battery.

(Continued)

4 180


(Continued)

• Some iPod

® devices, such as the iPhone

®

, can be connected through the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology interface. The device must have audio

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology capability

(such as for stereo headphone

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology ).

The device can play, but it will not be controlled by the audio system.

• To use iPod

® features within the audio mode, use the cable provided upon purchasing an iPod

® device.

• Skipping or improper operation may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod

®

/iPhone

® device.

• If your iPhone

® is connected to both the Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology and USB, only iPod ® mode will be supported during

Bluetooth

®

Audio Streaming. To use

Bluetooth

®

Audio Streaming, disconnect iPod

® cable with iPhone

®

.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When connecting iPod

® with the iPod

®

Power Cable, insert the connector to the multimedia socket completely. If not inserted completely, communications between iPod

® and audio may be interrupted.

• When adjusting the sound effects of the iPod

® and the audio system, the sound effects of both devices will overlap and might reduce or distort the quality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer function of an iPod

® when adjusting the audio system’s volume, and turn off the equalizer of the audio system when using the equalizer of an iPod

®

.

• When not using iPod

® with car audio, detach the iPod

® cable from iPod

®

. Otherwise, iPod

® may remain in accessory mode, and may not work properly.

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology(if equipped)

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by

Bluetooth

®

SIG, lnc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license.

A

Bluetooth ® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

4 181


Before Using the Bluetooth

®


Handsfree

Precautions for Safe Driving

What is Bluetooth

®

?

• Bluetooth

® refers to a short-distance wireless networking technology which uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz

frequency to connect various devices within a certain distance.

• Supported within PCs, external devices, Bluetooth

® phones, PDAs, various electronic devices, and automotive environments, Bluetooth

® allows data to be transmitted at high speeds without having to use a connector cable.

• Bluetooth

®

Handsfree refers to a device which allows the user to conveniently make phone calls with

Bluetooth

® mobile phones through the audio system.

• Bluetooth

®

Handsfree may not be supported in some mobile phones.To

learn more about mobile device compatibility, visit http://www.kia.com/ us/en/content/owners/bluetooth.

• Bluetooth

®

Handsfree is a feature that enables drivers to practice safe driving. Connecting the head unit with a Bluetooth

® phone allows the user to conveniently make and receive calls and use contacts.

Before using Bluetooth

®

, carefully read the contents of this user’s manual.

• Excessive use or operations while driving may lead to negligent driving practices and result in accidents.

Refrain from excessive operations while driving.

• Viewing the screen for prolonged periods of time is dangerous and may lead to accidents. When driving, view the screen only for short periods of time.

When connecting a Bluetooth

®

Phone

• Before connecting the head unit with the mobile phone, check to see that the mobile phone supports Bluetooth

® features.

• Even if the phone supports Bluetooth

®

, the phone will not be found during device searches if the phone has been set to hidden state or the

Bluetooth

® power is turned off.

Disable the hidden state or turn on the Bluetooth

® power prior to searching/connecting with the Head unit.

• If you do not want an automatic connection with your Bluetooth

® device, turn off the Bluetooth

® feature within your mobile phone.

• The Handsfree call volume and quality may differ depending on the mobile phone.

4 182


• Park the vehicle when connecting the head unit with the mobile phone.

• Bluetooth

® connection may become intermittently disconnected in some mobile phones. Follow these steps to try again.

1. Within the mobile phone, turn the Bluetooth

® function off/on and try again.

2. Turn the mobile phone power

Off/On and try again.

3. Completely remove the mobile phone battery (if possible), reboot, and then try again.

4. Reboot the audio system and try again.

5. Delete all paired devices, pair and try again.

Voice Recognition

(if equipped)

• When using the voice recognition feature, only commands listed within the user's manual are supported.

• Be aware that during the operation of the voice recognition system, pressing any key other than the key terminate voice recognition mode.

• For optimal voice recognition performance, position your head below the microphone above the driver’s seat and maintain proper position when speaking voice commands.

• Within the following situations, voice recognition may not function properly due to external sound.

- When the windows and sunroof are open

- When the blower AC/heater is set to high

- When entering and passing through tunnels

(Continued)

(Continued)

- When driving on rugged and uneven roads

- During severe rain (heavy rains, windstorms)

• Phone related voice commands can be used only when a Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device is connected.

• When making calls by stating a name, the corresponding contact must be downloaded and stored within the audio system.

• After downloading the Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology phone book, it takes some time to convert the phone book data into voice information. During this time, voice recognition may not properly operate.

• Pronounce the voice commands naturally and clearly as if in a normal conversation.

4 183


Standard Audio System

4 184


SYSTEM CONTROLLERS

AND FUNCTIONS

Audio Head Unit

(1) (EJECT)

Ejects the disc.

(2)

RADIO

Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode.

Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟

FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟ SAT3.

❈

In Setup>Display, the radio pop up screen will be displayed when

[Mode Pop up] is turned

On

.

When the pop up screen is displayed, use the TUNE knob or

1 6 desired mode.

(3)

MEDIA

Changes to CD, USB(iPod

®

), AUX,

My Music, BT Audio mode.

Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of CD,

USB(iPod

®

), AUX, My Music, BT

Audio.

❈

In Setup>Display, the media pop up screen will be displayed when

[Mode Pop up] is turned

On

.

When the pop up screen is displayed, use the TUNE knob or

1 desired mode.

5

(4)

PHONE

Operates Phone Screen

❈

When a phone is not connected, the connection screen is displayed.

(5) POWER/VOL knob

Power : Turns power On/Off by pressing the knob

Volume : Sets volume by turning the knob left/right

SEEK

TRACK

(6) ,

Radio Mode : Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.

CD, USB, iPod

®

, My Music modes

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds): Moves to next or previous song

(file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.

BT Audio mode : Moves to next or previous song(file)

❈

The Play/Pause feature may operate differently depending on the mobile phone.

4 185


- Press and hold the key (over 0.8

seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset seconds each.

1

~

6 for 5

❈

Press the

SCAN key again to continue listening to the current frequency.

❈

SAT Radio does not support the

Preset scan feature.

CD, USB, My Music mode

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each song

(file) for 10 seconds each.

❈

Press the

SCAN key again to continue listening to the current song (file).

(7)

DISP

It sets the screen Off

➟

Screen On

➟

Screen Off

❈

Audio operation is maintained and only the screen will be turned Off.

In the screen Off state, press any key to turn the screen On again.

(9)

SETUP

CLOCK

Moves to the Display, Sound, Clock,

Phone, System setting modes.

(10)

MENU

Displays menus for the current mode.

❈ iPod

®

List : Move to parent category

(8)

SCAN

Radio Mode

- Shortly press the key : Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each.

4 186

Radio mode : Changes frequency by turning the knob left/right.

CD, USB, iPod

®

, My Music mode:

Searches songs (files) by turning the knob left/right.

❈

When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the song.

Moves focus in all selection menus and selects menus.

CAT

FOLDER

(12) ,

Radio Mode

- SiriusXM RADIO : Category Search

MP3 CD, USB mode : Folder Search

Radio Mode: Saves frequencies

(channels) or receives saved frequencies (channels)

CD, USB, iPod

®

, My Music mode

In the Radio, Media, Setup, and

Menu pop up screen, the number menu is selected.

SETUP

Display Settings

Press the

SETUP

CLOCK key Select

[Display] through TUNE knob or

1

RPT key Select menu through

TUNE knob

Mode Pop up

[Mode Pop up] Changes selection mode

On

/

Off

• During On state, press the or

MEDIA

RADIO key to display the mode change pop up screen.

Media Display

When playing an MP3 file, select the desired display info from ‘Folder/File’ or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.


4 187


SOUND SETTINGS

Press the

SETUP

CLOCK key Select [Sound] through TUNE knob or

2

RDM key

Select menu through TUNE knob

Speed Dependent Volume Control

This feature is used to automatically control the volume level according to the speed of the vehicle.

Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set

[Off/On] of TUNE knob

Tone

This menu allows you to set the

Bass, Middle, Treble.

Position

This menu allows you to set the

Fader, Balance.

Select [Tone] Select menu through

TUNE knob Turn TUNE knob left/right to set

Select [Position] Select menu through TUNE knob Turn

TUNE knob left/right to set

• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound tone.

• Default : Restores default settings.

❈

Return : While adjusting values, pressing the TUNE knob will restore the parent menu.

• Fader, Balance : Selects the sound fader and balance.

• Default : Restores default settings.

❈

Return : While adjusting values, pressing the TUNE knob will restore the parent menu.

Voice Recognition Volume

Adjusts voice recognition volume.

Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set volume of TUNE knob

4 188


CLOCK SETTINGS

Press the

SETUP

CLOCK key Select [Clock] through TUNE knob or

3 key

Select menu through TUNE knob

Clock Settings

This menu is used to set the time.

Select [Clock Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈

Adjust the number currently in focus to set the [hour] and press the tune knob to set the [minute] and [AM/PM].

Calendar Settings

This menu is used to set the date.

Select [Calendar Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈

Adjust the number currently in focus to make the settings and press the tune knob to move to the next setting.

Time Format

This function is used to set the 12/24 hour time format of the audio system.

Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr /

24Hr through TUNE knob.

Clock Display when Power is OFF

•

•

Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)] Set

On

/

Off through TUNE knob

On

Off

: Displays time/date on screen

: Turn off.

WARNING

- Clock Setting

Distraction

Do not adjust the clock while driving. You may lose your steering control and cause severe personal injury or accidents.

4 189


SYSTEM SETTINGS

Memory Information

Press the

SETUP

CLOCK key Select

[System] Select menu through

TUNE knob

Displays currently used memory and total system memory.

Select [Memory Information] OK

The currently used memory is displayed on the left side while the total system memory is displayed on the right side.

• Off : This mode is for expert users and omits some information during voice command operation. (When using Expert mode, guidance instructions can be heard through the [Help] or [Menu] commands.

Language

This menu is used to set the display and voice recognition language.

Select [Language]

Set through TUNE knob

Prompt Feedback

This feature is used to change voice command feedback between Normal and Expert modes.

Select [Prompt Feedback] Set through TUNE knob

• On : This mode is for beginner users and provides detailed instructions during voice command operation.

❈

The system will reboot after the language is changed.

❈

Language support by region

- English, Francais, Espanol

4 190


RADIO : FM, AM or SiriusXM

Preset SEEK

Press

1

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Plays the frequency saved in the corresponding key.

• Pressing and holding the key (over

0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding the desired key from

1

~

6 will save the currently playing broadcast to the selected key and sound a BEEP.

SEEK

,

TRACK

Press the

SEEK key


seconds): Automatically searches for the next station.


0.8 seconds): While holding the key, frequency changes without stopping. When the key is released, automatically searches for the next frequency from that point.

SCAN

Press the

SCAN key


seconds): The broadcast frequency increases and previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each. After scanning all frequencies, returns and plays the current broadcast frequency.


0.8 seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset

1

~

6 for 5 seconds each.

Selecting through manual search

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to adjust the frequency.

4 191


MENU

Within

MENU key are the A.Store

(Auto Store) and Info functions.

A.Store

Press the

MENU key Set [A.Store] through TUNE knob or

1

RPT key.

Saves broadcasts with superior frequencies are received, then the most recently received frequency will be broadcast.

4 192


SiriusXM

® information

Satellite Radio

Satellite Radio channels:

Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3month trial subscription to the Sirius

Select package. You’ll get over 140 channels, including commercial-free music, plus all your favorite sports, exclusive talk, entertainment, and a selection of premium programming. For more information and a complete list of

SiriusXM channels, visit siriusxm.com

in the United States, siriusxm.ca in

Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-

7474.

Satellite Radio reception factors:

To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance:

• Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice buildup and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible.

• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:

SiriusXM is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio receivers, which are available for installation in motor vehicles or factory installed, as well as for the home, portable and wireless devices, and through an

Internet connection on a personal computer.

Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SiriusXM Satellite Radio system include:

• Hardware and an introductory trial subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.

• For a small upgrade fee, access to

SiriusXM music channels, and other select channels over the Internet using any computer connected to the Internet (U.S. customers only).

For information on extended subscription terms, contact SiriusXM at

1-888-539-7474.

NOTE:

SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call SiriusXM at

1-866-635-2349.

See SiriusXM

Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com.

SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the

48 contiguous USA, DC and PR

(with coverage limitations).

SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm. ca. All fees and programming subject to change. Sirius,

XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM

Radio Inc.

4 193


SiriusXM RADIO

Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3month trial subscription to SiriusXM so you have access to over 140 channels of music, information, and entertainment programming.

Activation

In order to extend or reactivate your

Sirius Select subscription, you will need to contact SiriusXM Customer

Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your

12-digit RID (Radio Identification

Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial

Number) ready. To retrieve the RID /

ESN, turn on the radio, press the

RADIO key, and tune to channel zero.

Please note that the vehicle will need to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and have an unobstructed view of the sky in order for the radio to receive the activation signal.

SEEK

Press the

RADIO key

SEEK

,

TRACK


seconds): Select previous or next channel.


0.8 seconds): Continuously move to previous or next channel.

❈

If the “Category” icon is displayed, channels are changed within the current category.

SCAN

Press the

RADIO key

SCAN


seconds): Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each

❈

Press the

SCAN key again to continue listening to the current frequency

❈

If the “Category” icon is displayed, channels are changed within the current category.

Category

CAT

FOLDER

Press the , through the TUNE knob key Set

• The display will indicate the category menus, highlight the category that the current channel belongs to.

• In the Category List Mode, press the

CAT

,

FOLDER gate category list.

key to navi-

• Press the tune knob to select the lowest channel in the highlighted category.

❈

If channel is selected by selecting category, then the “CATEGORY” icon is displayed at the top of the screen.

4 194

Preset

Press the

RADIO key

1

~

6


seconds): Plays the frequency saved in the corresponding key.


0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding the desired key from

1

~

6 will save the current broadcast to the selected key and sound a

BEEP.

✽

Troubleshooting

1. Antenna Error

If this message is displayed, the antenna or antenna cable is broken or unplugged. Please consult with your Kia dealership.

2. No Signal

If this message is displayed, it means that the antenna is covered and that the SiriusXM Satellite

Radio signal is not available.

Ensure the antenna is uncovered and has a clear view of the sky.

Tune

• Rotate TUNE knob : Changes the channel number or scrolls category list.

• Press TUNE knob : Selects the menu.

Menu

Select category menu through the

TUNE knob Press the

MENU key Select [ Info] through the

TUNE knob or

1

RPT key

Info (Information)

Displays the Artist/Song info of the current song.


4 195


BASIC METHOD OF USE :

Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB / iPod ® / My Music

Press the

MEDIA key to change the mode in order of CD ➟ USB(iPod

®

) ➟

AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.

The folder/file name is displayed on the screen.

<USB>

<My Music>

Repeat

While song (file) is playing

(RPT) key

1

RPT

Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod

®

, My

Music mode: RPT on screen

• To repeat one song (press the key)

: Repeats the current song.

MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on screen

• To repeat folder (pressing twice): repeats all files within the current folder.

❈

Press the off repeat.

1

RPT key again to turn

<Audio CD>

❈

The CD is automatically played when a CD is inserted.

❈

The USB music is automatically played when a USB is connected.

Random


(RDM) key

2

RDM

Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on screen

• Random (press the key) : Plays all songs in random order.

<MP3 CD>

4 196


MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on screen

• Folder Random (press the key) :

Plays all files within the current folder in random order.

iPod

® mode: ALL RDM on screen

• All Random (press the key) : Plays all files in random order.

MP3 CD, USB : ALL RDM on screen

• All Random (pressing twice): Plays all files in random order.

❈

Press the off repeat.

2

RDM key again to turn


SEEK key

• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the next song.


0.8 seconds): Fast forwards the song.

Scan

While song (file) is playing key

SCAN

• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all songs from the next song for 10 seconds each.

❈

Press the off.

SCAN key again to turn

❈

The SCAN function is not supported in iPod

® mode.

Changing Song/File

TRACK

While song (file) is playing key

• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the current song from the beginning.

❈

If the

TRACK key is pressed again within 2 seconds, the previous song is played.


0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.

Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB

Mode

While file is playing

Up) key

CAT

• Searches the next folder.

FOLDER

While file is playing

Down) key

(Folder

(Folder

• Searches the parent folder.

❈

If a folder is selected by pressing the TUNE knob, the first file within the selected folder will be played.

❈

In iPod ® mode, moves to the

Parent Folder.

Searching Songs (File)

• Turning TUNE knob : Searches for songs (files)

• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays selected song (file).

4 197


MENU : Audio CD

Press the Audio CD mode

MENU key to set the Repeat, Random,

Information features.

Information

Press the

MENU key Set [ Info] through the TUNE knob or

3 key to display information of the current song.

❈

Press the info display.

MENU key to turn off

MENU : MP3 CD / USB

Press the MP3 CD/USB mode

MENU key to set the Repeat, Folder

Random, Folder Repeat, All

Random, Information, and Copy features.

Repeat

Press the

MENU key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or key to repeat the current song.

❈

Press RPT again to turn off.

1

RPT

Random

Press the

MENU key Set [ RDM] through the TUNE knob or

2

RDM key to randomly play songs within the current CD.

❈

Press RDM again to turn off.

4 198

Repeat

Press the

MENU key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or

1

RPT key to repeat the current song.

❈

Press RPT again to turn off.


Folder Random

Press the

MENU key Set [ F.RDM] through the TUNE knob or

2

RDM key to randomly play songs within the current folder.

❈

Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Folder Repeat

Press the

MENU key Set [ F.RPT] through the TUNE knob or

3 key to repeat songs within the current folder.

❈

Press F.RPT again to turn off.

All Random

Press the

MENU key Set [ A.RDM] through the TUNE knob or

4 key to randomly play all songs within the

CD/USB.

❈

Press A.RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the


5 key to display information of the current song.

❈



Copy

Press the

MENU key Set [ Copy] through the TUNE knob or

6 key.

This is used to copy the current song into My Music. You can play the copied Music in My Music mode.

❈

If another key is pressed while copying is in progress, a pop up asking you whether to cancel copying is displayed.

❈

If another media is connected or inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX) while copying is in progress, copying is canceled.

❈

Music will not be played while copying is in progress.

4 199


MENU : iPod

®

In iPod

® mode, press the

MENU key to set the Repeat, Random, Information and Search features.

Information

Press the


3 key.

Displays information of the current song.

❈



Repeat

Press the


1

RPT key to repeat the current song.

❈

Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Search

Press the

MENU key Set [ Search] through the TUNE knob or

4 key.

Displays iPod

® category list.

❈

Searching iPod ® category is

MENU key pressed, move to parent category.

Random

Press the


2

RDM key.

Plays all songs within the currently playing category in random order.

❈

Press RDM again to turn off.

4 200


MENU : My Music Mode

In My Music mode, press the

MENU key to set the Repeat, Random,

Information, Delete, Delete All, and

Delete Selection features.

Repeat

Press the


1

RPT key.

Repeats the currently playing song.

❈

Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random

Press the


2

RDM key.

Plays all songs in random order.

❈

Press RDM again to turn random off.

Information

Press the


3 key.

Displays information of the current song.

❈



➀

Select the file you wish to delete by using the TUNE knob.

➁

Press the

MENU key and select the delete menu to delete the selected file.

Delete All

Press the

MENU key Set [ Del.All] through the TUNE knob or

5 key.

Deletes all songs of My Music.

Delete

Press the

MENU key Set [ Delete] through the TUNE knob or

4 key.

Deletes currently playing file

In the play screen, pressing delete will delete the currently playing song.

Deletes file from list

Delete Selection

Press the

MENU key Set [ Del.Sel] through the TUNE knob or key.

6

Songs within My Music are selected and deleted.

➀

Select the songs you wish to delete from the list.

4 201


➁

After selecting, press

MENU and select the delete menu.

key

AUX

AUX is used to play external MEDIA currently connected with the AUX terminal.

AUX mode will automatically start when an external device is connected with the AUX terminal.

If an external device is connected, you can also press the

MEDIA key to change to AUX mode.

My Music

• Even if memory is available, a maximum of 6,000 songs can be stored.

• The same song can be copied up to 1,000 times.

• Memory info can be checked in the

System menu of Setup.

❈

AUX mode cannot be started unless there is an external device connected to the AUX terminal.

AUX

Fully insert the AUX cable into the

AUX terminal for use.

4 202


Bluetooth

AUDIO

®


What is

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology?

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology allows devices to be connected in a short distance, including hands-free devices, stereo headsets, wireless remote controllers, etc. For more information, visit the Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology website at www.Bluetooth.com

• The Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth

®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A Bluetooth

® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology.

• Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology audio can be used only when the

[Audio Streaming] of Phone is

Before using

Bluetooth ®

Wireless

Technology audio features

• Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology audio may not be supported depending on the compatibility of your Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology mobile phone.

• In order to use

Bluetooth ®

Wireless

Technology audio, you must first pair and connect the Bluetooth ®


WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death.

The driver’s primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

4 203


Starting Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology Audio

• Press the

MEDIA key to change the mode in order of CD

➟

USB

➟

AUX

➟

My Music

➟

BT Audio.

• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology audio will start playing.

❈

Audio may not automatically start playing in some mobile phones.

Using the Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology audio features

• Play / Stop

Press the TUNE knob to play and pause the current song.

❈

The title / artist info may not be supported in some mobile phones.

When it is not supported, no title or artist will be displayed.

• Previous / Next song ous or next song.

❈

The previous song / next song / play / pause functions may not be supported in some mobile phones.

4 204


PHONE

Before using the Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology phone features

• In order to use

Bluetooth ®

Wireless

Technology phone, you must first pair and connect the Bluetooth ®


• If the mobile phone is not paired or connected, it is not possible to enter Phone mode. Once a phone is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed.

• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition (IGN/ACC ON), the

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected. Even if you are outside, the Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you do not want automatic

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology phone connection, set the

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology power to OFF

Making a call using the

Steering-wheel mount controls

• Check call history and making calls

- Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the key on the steering remote controller.

- The call history list will be displayed on the screen.

- Press the key again to connect a call to the selected number.

❈

The actual features in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

• Redialing the most recently called number

- Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the key on the steering remote controller.

- The most recently called number is redialed.

(1) key : Mutes the microphone during a call when wheel pressed.

(2) +

,

key /scroll wheel : Raises or lowers speaker volume.

(3) tion.

key : Activates voice recogni-

(4) calls.

key : Places and transfers

(5) key : Ends calls or cancels functions.

❈

If call history does not exist, a screen asking whether to download call history is displayed. (The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones)

4 205


Bluetooth

®


Pairing a Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology Device

What is Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology Pairing?

Pairing refers to the process of synchronizing your Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology phone or device with the car audio system for connection.

Pairing is necessary to connect and use the Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology feature.


Bluetooth ® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

A Bluetooth ® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology.

WARNING



4 206


Pairing

PHONE

key / key on the Steering Remote Controller

When No Devices have been Paired

1. Press the

PHONE key or the key on the steering remote controller. The following screen is displayed.

2. Select [OK] button to enter the

Pair Phone screen.

[Non SSP supported device]

(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)

4. After a few moments, a screen is displayed where the passkey is entered. Enter the passkey “0000” to pair your Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology device with the car audio system.

1) Vehicle Name : Name of device as shown when searching from your

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology device

2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the device

[SSP supported device]

4. After a few moments, a screen is displayed 6 digits passkey.

Check the passkey on your

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology device and confirm.

3. From your Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology device (i.e. Mobile

Phone), search and select your car audio system.

5. Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.

4 207


Some phones (i.e., iPhone

® and Blackberry

®

, Android

TM phones) may offer an option to allow acceptance of all future Bluetooth ® connection requests by default." and "Visit http://www.kia.com/us/en/content/ owners/bluetooth for additional information on pairing your Bluetooth ® enabled mobile phone, and to view a phone compatibility list.

• If Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology devices are paired but none are currently connected, pressing the

PHONE key or the key on the steering wheel displays the following screen. Select [Pair] button to pair a new device or select

[Connect] to connect a previously paired device.

4 208


Pairing through [PHONE]

Setup

Press the

SETUP

CLOCK key Select

[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

1. The following steps are the same as those described in the section

"When No Devices have been

Paired" on the previous page.

• Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology features supported within the vehicle are as follows. Some features may not be supported depending on your Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology device.

- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls

- Operations during a call (Switch to Private, Switch to call waiting,

MIC on/off)

- Downloading Call History

- Downloading Mobile Contacts

- Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology device auto connection

- Bluetooth ® Audio Streaming

• Up to five Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology devices can be paired to the Car Handsfree system.

• Only one Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology device can be connected at a time.

• Other devices cannot be paired while a

Bluetooth ®

Wireless

Technology device is connected.

• Only Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology Handsfree and

Bluetooth

® audio related features are supported.

• Bluetooth ® related operations are possible only within devices that support Handsfree or audio features, such as a

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology mobile phone or a Bluetooth ® audio device.

• If a connected Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology device becomes disconnected due to being out of communication range, turning the device OFF, or a Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology communication error, corresponding

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology devices are automatically searched and reconnected.

• If the system becomes unstable due to communication errors between the car Handsfree and the

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology device, reset the device by turning off and back on again. Upon resetting Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology device, the system will be restored.

4 209


• After pairing is complete, a contacts download request is sent once to the mobile phone. Some mobile phones may require confirmation upon receiving a download request, ensure your mobile phone accepts the connection. Refer to your phones user’s manual for additional information regarding phone pairing and connections.

Connecting a Device

Press the

SETUP

CLOCK key Select

[Phone] Select [Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to connect and select [Connect].

1) Connected Phone : Device that is currently connected

2) Paired Phone : Device that is paired but not connected

4 210


Changing Priority

What is Priority?

It is possible to pair up to five

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology devices with the car audio system.

The "Change Priority" feature is used to set the connection priority of paired phones.

Press the

SETUP

CLOCK key Select


From the paired phone list, select the phone you want to switch to the highest priority, then select [Change

Priority] button from the Menu. The selected device will be changed to the highest priority.

• Priority icon will be displayed when the selected phone is set as a priority phone.

4 211


Disconnecting a Device Deleting a Device

Press the

SETUP

CLOCK key Select


Press the

SETUP

CLOCK key Select


• When deleting the currently connected device, the device will automatically be disconnected to proceed with the deleting process.

• If a paired Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology device is deleted, the device’s call history and contacts data will also be deleted.

• To re-use a deleted device, you must pair the device again.

From the paired phone list, select the currently connected device and select [Disconnect] button.

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to delete and select

[Delete] button.

4 212


USING Bluetooth

®

Technology

Phone Menu Screen

Wireless

Phone Menus

With a Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology device connected, press the

SETUP

CLOCK key to display the Phone menu screen.

• If you select the [Call History] button but there is no call history data, a prompt is displayed which asks to download call history data.

• If you select the [Contacts] button but there is no contacts data stored, a prompt is displayed which asks to download contacts data.

• This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more information on download support, refer to your mobile phone user’s manual.

Answering Calls

Answering a Call

Answering a call with a Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen.

To accept the call, press key on the steering wheel while the call is incoming.

1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used contacts can be saved for easy access.

2) Call History : Displays the call history list screen

3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts list screen

4) Setup : Displays Phone related settings.

1) Caller : Displays the other party’s name when the incoming caller is saved within your contacts

2) Incoming Number : Displays the incoming number

4 213


✽

NOTICE

• When an incoming call pop-up is displayed, most Audio and SETUP mode features are disabled. Only the call volume will operate.

• The telephone number may not be properly displayed in some mobile phones.

Favorites Call History

Press the

[Favorites]

PHONE key Select Press the

History]

PHONE key Select [Call

1) Saved favorite contact : Connects call upon selection

2) To add favorite : Downloaded contacts can be saved as favorite.

• To save Favorite, contacts should be downloaded.

• Contact saved in Favorites will not be automatically updated if the contact has been updated in the phone. To update Favorites, delete the Favorite and create a new

Favorite.

A list of incoming, outgoing and missed calls is displayed.

• Call history may not be saved in the call history list in some mobile phones.

• Calls received with hidden caller ID will not be saved in the call history list.

• Calling through the call history is not possible when there is no call history stored or a

Bluetooth

® Wireless

Technology phone is not connected.

• Up to 50 received, dialed and missed calls are stored in Call History.

• Time of received/dialed calls and call time information are not stored in Call

History.

4 214


Contacts

Press the

[Contacts]

PHONE key Select

The list of saved phone book entries is displayed.

NOTE:

Find a contact in alphabetical order, press the

MENU

key.

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your

Bluetooth

® Wireless Technology phone can be downloaded into the car contacts. Contacts that have been downloaded to the car cannot be edited or deleted on the phone.

• Mobile phone contacts are managed separately for each paired

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology device (max 5 devices x 1,000 contacts each). Previously downloaded data is maintained even if the Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology device has been disconnected. (However, the contacts and call history saved to the phone will be deleted if a paired phone is deleted.)

• It is possible to download contacts during Bluetooth ® streaming audio.

• When downloading contacts, the icon will be displayed within the status bar.

• It is not possible to begin downloading a contact list when the contact download feature has been turned off within the Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology device. In addition, some devices may require device authorization upon attempting to download contacts. If downloading does not normally occur, check the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device settings or the screen state.

• The contacts download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more information of supported Bluetooth

® devices and function support, refer to your phone’s user manual.

4 215


Bluetooth

®


Setting

Pairing a New Device

Press the

SETUP

CLOCK key Select

[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Viewing Paired Phone List

Press the

SETUP

CLOCK key Select



Bluetooth ® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

A Bluetooth ® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology

WARNING



Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology devices can be paired with the audio system.

For more information, refer to the

“Pairing through Phone Setup” section within Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology.

This feature is used to view mobile phones that have been paired with the audio system. Upon selecting a paired phone, the setup menu is displayed.

For more information, refer to the

“Setting Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology Connection” section within Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology.

4 216


1) Connect/Disconnect Phone :

Connect/ disconnects currently selected phone

2) Change Priority : Sets currently selected phone to highest connection priority

3) Delete : Deletes the currently selected phone

4) Return : Moves to the previous screen

Downloading Contacts

Press the

SETUP

CLOCK key Select

[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]

Outgoing Volume

Press the

SETUP

CLOCK key Select

[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

• To learn more about whether your mobile phone supports contact downloads, refer to your mobile phone user’s manual.

• The contacts for only the connected phone can be downloaded

As the contacts are downloaded from the mobile phone, a download progress bar is displayed.

Use TUNE knob to adjust the outgoing volume level.

• Upon downloading phone contacts, the previous corresponding data is deleted.

• This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones.

• Voice Recognition may not operate while contacts are being downloaded.

• While on a call, the volume can be changed by using the

TRACK key.

SEEK

,

4 217


Turning Bluetooth System Off

Press the

SETUP

CLOCK key Select

[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System

Off]

Once Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology is turned off,

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology related features will not be supported within the audio system.

• To turn Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology back on, go to

SETUP

CLOCK

[Phone] and select “Yes”.

4 218


VOICE RECOGNITION

Using Voice Recognition

Starting Voice Recognition

Shortly press the key on the steering wheel. Say a command

If prompt feedback is in [ON], then the system will say “Please say a command after the beep (BEEP)”

• If prompt feedback is in [OFF] mode, then the system will only say “(BEEP)”

• To change Prompt Feedback

[On]/[Off], go to

SETUP

CLOCK

[Prompt Feedback]

[System]

• For proper recognition, say the command after the voice instruction and beep tone.

Contact List Best Practices

1) Use full names vs. short or single syllable names (“John Smith” vs.

“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.

“Home”)

2) Avoid using special characters or hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)

3) Avoid using acronyms (“In Case

Emergency” vs. “ICE”)

4) Spell words completely, no abbreviations (“Doctor Goodman” vs.

“Dr. Goodman”)

4 219


Skipping Prompt Messages

While prompt message is being stated Shortly press the key on the steering remote controller

The prompt message is immediately ended and the beep tone will sound.

After the “beep”, say the voice command.

Re-starting Voice Recognition

While system waits for a command

Shortly press the key on the steering remote controller

The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep tone will sound. After the “beep”, say the voice command.

ENDING VOICE

RECOGNITION

While Voice Recognition is operating

Press and hold the key on the steering remote controller

• While using voice command, pressing any steering wheel control or a different key will end voice command.

• When the system is waiting for a voice command, say “cancel” or

“end” to end voice command.

• When the system is waiting for a voice command, press and hold the key on the steering wheel to end voice command.

Voice Recognition and Phone

Contact Tips:

The Kia Voice Recognition System may have difficulty understanding some accents or uncommon names.

When using Voice Recognition to place a call, speak in a moderate tone, with clear pronunciation.

To maximize the use of Voice Recognition, consider these guidelines when storing contacts:

• Use full names vs. short or single syllable names (“John Smith” vs.

“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.

“Home”)

• Avoid using special characters or hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)

• Avoid using acronyms (“In Case

Emergency” vs. “ICE”)

• Spell words completely, no abbreviations (“Doctor Goodman” vs.

“Dr. Goodman”)

4 220


Illustration on using voice commands

• Starting voice command.

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

Please say a command after the beep (BEEP) Beep~

More Help

More Help

Here are some examples of mode commands.

You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.

You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My

Music', or 'iPod'.

Additionally, there are phone commands like

"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".

You can find more detailed commands in the user's manual.

Please say a command after the beep.

More Help

Here are some examples of mode commands.

You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.

You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My

Music', or 'iPod'.

Additionally, there are phone commands like

"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".

You can find more detailed commands in the user's manual.

Please say a command after the beep.

• Skipping Voice Recognition


Please say a...

while guidance message is being stated

Shortly pressing the

(BEEP) key (under 0.8 seconds):

More Help

• Ending voice command.


Please say a command after the beep (BEEP)

Contacts

Please say the contact name you want to call.

Cancel

4 221


Voice Command List

• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)

Command

More Help

Help

Call<Name>

Call <Name> on Mobile

Call <Name> in Office

Call <Name> at Home

Call <Name> on Other

Phone

Favorites

Call History

Function

Provides guidance on commands that can be used anywhere in the system.

Provides guidance on commands that can be used within the current mode.

Calls <Name> saved in Contacts

Ex) Call “John Smith”

Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as

"Mobile" in Contacts

Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile


"Office" in Contacts

Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office


"Home" in Contacts

Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home


"Other" in Contacts

Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other

Provides guidance on Phone related commands. After saying this command, say

“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial

Number” execute corresponding functions.

Displays the Favorite screen.

Displays the Call History screen.

Command

Contacts

Dial Number

Function

Displays the Contacts screen. After saying this command, say the name of a contact saved in the Contacts to automatically connect the call.

Displays the Dial number screen. After saying this command, you can say the number that you want to call.

Connects the last dialed call number.

Redial

Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice recognition and Bluetooth ® connections

Radio

•

When listening to the radio, displays the next radio screen. (FM1

➟

FM2

➟

AM

➟

SAT1

➟

SAT2

➟

SAT3

➟

FM1)

•

When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played radio screen.

•

When currently listening to the FM radio, maintains the current state.

•

When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played FM screen.

FM1(FM One)

FM2(FM Two)

AM

Displays the FM1 screen.

Displays the FM2 screen.

Displays the AM screen.

4 222


Command Function

FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast saved in FM Preset 1~6.

AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.

FM 87.5~107.9

Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.

AM 530~1710

SIRIUS (Satellite)

Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.

•

When listening to the SiriusXM ® , maintains the current state.

•

When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played SiriusXM

® screen.

SIRIUS (Satellite) Displays the selected SiriusXM

®

1~3 screen.

the selected SiriusXM

® channel.

0~223

Media

CD

USB iPod ®

Moves to the most recently played media screen.

Plays the music saved in the CD.

Plays USB music.

Plays iPod ® music.

Command

My Music

Function

Plays the music saved in My Music.

AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.

Bluetooth ® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth

® device.

Mute

Cancel (Exit)

Mutes the sound.

Ends voice command.

4 223


• FM/AM radio Commands: Commands available during FM, AM radio operation.

Command

Preset 1~6

Scan

Preset Scan

Function

Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.

Scans receivable frequencies from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Moves to the next preset from the current preset and plays for 10 seconds each.

• Satellite radio Commands: Commands that can be used while listening to Satellite Radio.

Command Function

Channel 0~223 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.

Scan

Preset 1~6

Information

Scans receivable channels from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.

Displays the information of the current broadcast.

4 224


• Audio CD Commands: Commands available during

Audio CD operation.

Command

Random

Random Off

Repeat

Repeat Off

Track 1~30

Function

Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.

Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential order.

Repeats the current track.

Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential order.

Plays the desired track number.

• MP3 CD / USB Commands: Commands available during USB and MP3 CD operation.

Command

Random

Random Off

Function

Randomly plays the files within the current folder.

Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.

Repeats the current file.

Repeat

Repeat Off

Information

Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential order.

Displays the information screen of the current file.

Next Folder Plays the first file in the next folder.

Previous Folder Plays the first file in the previous folder.

4 225


• iPod

®

Commands: Commands available during iPod

® operation.

Command

Random

Random Off

Repeat

Repeat Off

Function

Randomly plays the songs within the current category.

Cancels random play to play songs in sequential order.

Repeats the current song.

Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential order.

• My Music Commands: Commands available during

My Music operation.

Command

Random

Random Off

Repeat

Repeat Off

Delete

Function

Randomly plays all saved files.

Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.

Repeats the current file.

Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential order.

Deletes the current file. You will bypass an additional confirmation process.

4 226


• Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology Audio Commands:

Commands available during Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology audio streaming from mobile phone operation Command Operation

Command

Play

Pause

Function

Plays the currently paused song.

Pauses the current song.

iPod ® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod ® mobile digital device sold separately.

The

Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth

®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license.

SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call

SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349.

See SiriusXM

Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous

USA, DC and PR (with coverage limitations).

SiriusXM satellite service is also available in

Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and programming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius

XM Radio Inc. Android™ is a trademark of Google,

Inc. BlackBerry is a registered trademark of

Research In Motion Limited (RIM). All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.

4 227


DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

IC

This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.


(1) This device may not cause interference; and


Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.

L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

4 228

Driving your vehicle

Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Key positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

• Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

• Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

• Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . 5-9

• ENGINE START/STOP button position. . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

• Starting the engine with a smart key. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

All wheel drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

• Tight corner brake effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

• All wheel drive (AWD) transfer mode selection . . . . 5-22

• For safe all wheel drive operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

• Parking brake – Foot type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

• Electronic parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

• AUTO HOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB)/

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

• System setting and activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

• AEB warning message and system control . . . . . . . . 5-52

• Brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

• Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in front (front radar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

• System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

• Limitation of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

• Recognizing pedestrians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

• To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

• To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

• To decrease the cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

• To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

• To cancel cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

• To resume cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

• To turn cruise control off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

Advanced smart cruise control system (ASCC). . 5-65

• Speed setting (ASCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66

• Vehicle to vehicle distance setting (ASCC) . . . . . . . . 5-70

• To adjust the sensitivity of advanced smart cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74

5

5

• To convert to cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

• Limitations of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . 5-81

• Drive mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81

Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /

LCA (Lane Change Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

• Non-operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90

Lane departure warning system (LDWS) . . . . . . 5-92

• Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

• The LDWS does not operate when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96

Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98

• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98

• Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98

• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99

• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100

• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100

• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103

• Snowy or icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103

• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant . . . . . . . . . 5-104

• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . 5-104

• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . 5-104

• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

• Don't let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105

• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . 5-105

• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

• Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

• Safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

• Trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

• Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108

• Maintenance when trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111

• If you do decide to pull a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112

Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114

• Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114

• Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118

Vehicle weight glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

• Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

• Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

Driving your vehicle

Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING

- Engine exhaust

Do not inhale exhaust fumes or leave your engine running in a enclosed area for a prolonged time. Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

WARNING

- Open liftgate

Do not drive with the liftgate open. Poisonous exhaust gases can enter the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the liftgate open proceed as follows:

1. Close all windows.

2. Open side vents.

3. Set the air intake control at

"Fresh", the air flow control at

"Floor" or "Face" and the fan at the highest speed.

5 3


BEFORE DRIVING

Before entering vehicle

• Be sure that all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean.

• Check the condition of the tires.

• Check under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles behind you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections

Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid should be checked on a regular basis, at the exact interval depending on the fluid. Further details are provided in chapter 7,

“Maintenance”.

WARNING

- Distracted driving

Focus on the road while driving.

The driver's primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of the vehicle. Use of any handled devices, other equipment or vehicle systems that distract the drive should not be used during vehicle operation.

Before starting

• Close and lock all doors.

• Position the seat so that all controls are easily reached.

• Buckle your seat belt.

• Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirrors.

• Be sure that all lights work.

• Check all gauges.

• Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

• Release the parking brake and make sure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are familiar with your vehicle and its equipment.

5 4


WARNING

- Fire risk

When you intend to park or stop the vehicle with the engine on, be careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of time. It may overheat the engine or exhaust system and cause fire.

WARNING

- Check surroundings

Always check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before putting a vehicle into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

WARNING

- Loose objects

Securely store items in your vehicle. When you make a sudden stop or turn the steering wheel rapidly, loose objects may drop on the floor and it could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident.

WARNING

- Driving while intoxicated

Do not drive while intoxicated.

Drinking and driving is dangerous. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment.

Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous as or more dangerous than driving drunk.

5 5


KEY POSITIONS (IF EQUIPPED)

Illuminated ignition switch Ignition switch position

LOCK

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel is unlocked and electrical accessories are operative.

If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition switch to the ACC position, turn the key while turning the steering wheel right and left to release the tension.

OUM054001

Whenever a front door is opened, the ignition switch will illuminate for your convenience, provided the ignition switch is not in the ON position. The light will go off immediately when the ignition switch is turned on. It will also go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed.

OYP054029K

The steering wheel locks to protect against theft (if equipped). The ignition key can be removed only in the

LOCK position.

5 6


ON

The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. This is the normal running position after the engine is started.

Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the engine is not running to prevent battery discharge.

The anti-theft steering column lock (if equipped) is not a substitute for the parking brake. Before leaving the driver’s seat, always make sure the shift lever is engaged in P (Park) for automatic transaxle, set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off.

Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not taken.

START

Turn the ignition switch to the START position to start the engine. The engine will crank until you release the key; then it returns to the ON position. The brake warning light can be checked in this position.

WARNING

- Ignition switch

Never turn the ignition switch to

LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is moving. This would result in loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

Starting the engine

WARNING

- Proper footwear

Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots, sandals, etc.) may interfere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedal.

1.Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2.Place the transaxle shift lever in P

(Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

5 7


3.Turn the ignition switch to START and hold it there until the engine starts (a maximum of 10 seconds), then release the key.

It should be started without

depressing the accelerator.

4.Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary.

Start driving at moderate engine speeds. (Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.)

If the engine stalls while you are in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START position in an attempt to restart the engine.

WARNING

- Steering wheel

Never reach for any controls through the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion.

The presence of your hand or arm in this area could cause a loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION

- Starter

Do not engage the starter for more than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds before reengaging the starter. Improper use of the starter may damage it.

5 8


ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)

Illuminated ENGINE

START/STOP button

OUM054004

Whenever the front door is opened, the ENGINE START/STOP button will illuminate for your convenience.

The light will go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed.

When all entrances are closed, if you lock the vehicle by using the transmitter or the smart key, the light will go off immediately.

ENGINE START/STOP button position

OFF

Not illuminated

To turn off the engine (START/RUN position) or vehicle power (ON position), press the ENGINE

START/STOP button with the shift lever in the P (Park) position. When you press the ENGINE

START/STOP button without the shift lever in the P (Park) position, the

ENGINE START/STOP button will not change to the OFF position but to the ACC position.

In an emergency situation while the vehicle is in motion, you are able to turn the engine off and to the ACC position by pressing the ENGINE

START/STOP button for more than 2 seconds or 3 times successively within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still moving, you can restart the engine without depressing the brake pedal by pressing the ENGINE

START/STOP button with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.

5 9


ACC(Accessory) ON START/RUN

Amber

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button while it is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal.

If the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC position for more than

1 hour, the button is turned off automatically to prevent battery discharge.

Redish orange

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button while it is in the ACC position without depressing the brake pedal.

The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. Do not leave the ENGINE START/STOP button in the ON position for a long time. The battery may discharge, because the engine is not running.

Not illuminated

To start the engine, depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE

START/ STOP button with the shift lever in the P (Park) or the N

(Neutral) position. For your safety, start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

If you press the ENGINE

START/STOP button without depressing the brake pedal for automatic transaxle vehicles, the engine will not start and the ENGINE

START/STOP button changes as follow:

OFF

➔

ACC

➔

ON

➔

OFF or ACC

5 10


✽

NOTICE

If you leave the ENGINE START/

STOP button in the ACC or ON position for a long time, the battery will discharge.

WARNING

- Starting vehicle

Never press the ENGINE

START/STOP button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This would result in loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

Starting the engine with a smart key

1.Carry the smart key or leave it inside the vehicle.

2.Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied

3.Place the transaxle shift lever in P

(Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

4.Press the ENGINE START/STOP button while depressing the brake pedal.

It should be started without depressing the accelerator.

5.Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary.

Start driving at moderate engine speeds. (Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.)

• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, if it is far away from you, the engine may not start.

• When the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC position or above, if any door is opened, the system checks for the smart key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle, a message "key is not in the vehicle" will appear on the LCD display.

And if all doors are closed, the chime will sound for 5 seconds.

The indicator or warning will turn off while the vehicle is moving.

Always have the smart key with you.

5 11


WARNING

- Unintended vehicle movement

Never leave the smart key in the vehicle with children or vehicle occupants who are unfamiliar with the vehicle operation.

Pushing the ENGINE

START/STOP button while the smart key is in the vehicle may result in unintended engine activation and/or unintended vehicle movement.

OUM054005

• If the battery is weak or the smart key does not work correctly, you can start the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button with the smart key.

The side with the lock button should contact the engine start/stop button directly.

When you press the engine start/stop button directly with the smart key, the smart key should contact the button at a right angle.

• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you can't start the engine normally.

Replace the fuse with a new one. If it is not possible, you can start the engine by pressing the ENGINE

START/STOP button for 10 seconds while it is in the ACC position. The engine can start without depressing the brake pedal. But for your safety always depress the brake pedal before starting the engine.

Do not press the ENGINE START/

STOP button for more than 10 seconds except when the stop lamp fuse is blown.

5 12

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

+

((

((

U

P

))

))

--

--

((

((

D O W

N ))

))

Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.

(If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal.

However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle.)

Press the lock release button when shifting.

The shift lever can be shifted freely.

OUMA054007


Automatic transaxle operation

The automatic transaxle has 6 forward speeds and one reverse speed.

The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the shift lever.

✽

NOTICE

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if the battery has been disconnected, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and the shifting sequence will adjust after shifts are cycled a few times by the TCM

(Transaxle Control Module) or

PCM (Powertrain Control Module).

5 13


For smooth operation, depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting from N (Neutral) to a forward or reverse gear.

WARNING

- Leaving

Vehicle

Before leaving the driver’s seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position; then set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Do not use the P position in place of the parking brake. Always make sure the shift lever is latched in the P position and set the parking brake fully. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed.

CAUTION

- Transaxle

To avoid damage to your transaxle, do not accelerate the engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the brakes on. The transaxle may be damaged if you shift into P

(Park) while the vehicle is in motion.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). This position locks the transaxle and prevents the drive wheels from rotating.

Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion will cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

When stopped on an incline, do not hold the vehicle with the engine power. Use the service brake or the parking brake.

Transaxle ranges

The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle backward.

CAUTION

- Shifting

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); you may damage the transaxle if you shift into R

(Reverse) while the vehicle is in motion, except when “Rocking the vehicle” explained in this section.

5 14


N (Neutral)

The wheels and transaxle are not engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or service brakes are applied.

- Parking in N (Neutral) gear

Follow below steps when parking and you want the vehicle to move when pushed.

1. After parking your vehicle, depress the brake pedal and move the transaxle shift lever to [P] with the ignition button in [ON] or while the engine is running.

2. If the parking brake is applied release the parking brake.

Brake) equipped vehicles, push the brake pedal with the ignition button in [ON] or while the engine is running to reapply the parking brake. If [AUTO HOLD] function is used while driving (If [AUTO

HOLD] indicator is on in the cluster), press [AUTO HOLD] switch and [AUTO HOLD] function should be turn off.

3. While pressing the brake pedal, turn the ignition button [OFF].

- For smart key equipped vehicles, the ignition switch can be moved to [OFF] only when the shift lever is in [P].

4. Change the gear shift lever to [N]

(Neutral) while pressing the brake pedal and pressing down a tool (e.g.

flathead screw-driver) into the

[SHIFT LOCK RELEASE] access hole at the same time. Then, the vehicle will move when external force is applied.

CAUTION

• With the exception of parking in neutral gear, always park the vehicle in [P] (Park) for safety and apply the parking brake.

• Before parking in [N] (Neutral) gear, first make sure the parking ground is level and flat. Do not park in [N] gear on any slopes or gradients.

If parked and left in [N], the vehicle may move and cause serious damage or injury.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• After the ignition switch has been turned off, the electronic parking brake cannot be disengaged.

• For EPB (Electronic Parking

Brake) equipped vehicles with

[AUTO HOLD] function used while driving, if the ignition button has been turned [OFF], the electronic parking brake will be engaged automatically.

Therefore, [AUTO HOLD] function should be turned off before the ignition button is turned off.

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward driving position. The transaxle will automatically shift through a 6-gear sequence, providing the best fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing grades, depress the accelerator fully, at which time the transaxle will automatically downshift to the next lower gear.

5 15


Manual mode

+

((

((

U

P

))

))

--(( (( D O W N )) ))

OUMA054009

Manual mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, manual mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D

(Drive) position into the manual gate.

To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the main gate.

In manual mode, moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.

In contrast to a manual transaxle, the manual mode allows gearshifts with the accelerator pedal depressed.

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear.

• In manual mode, the driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone.

• In manual mode, only the 6 forward gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as required.

• In manual mode, downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.

• In manual mode, when the engine rpm approaches the red zone shift points are varied to upshift automatically.

5 16


• To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever is operated.

• When driving on a slippery road, push the shift lever forward into the

+(up) position. This causes the transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving on a slippery road. Push the shift lever to the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st gear.

Paddle shifter (if equipped)

OUM056200L

The paddle shifter is available when the shift lever is in the D position or the manual mode.

With the shift lever in the D position

The paddle shifter will operate when the vehicle speed is more than

10km/h (6.2mph).

Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to shift up or down one gear and the system changes from automatic mode to manual mode.

When the vehicle speed is lower than

10km/h (6.2mph), if you depress the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds or if you shift the shift lever from D (Drive) to manual mode and shift it from manual mode to D (Drive) again, the system changes from manual mode to automatic mode.

With the shift lever in the manual mode

Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to shift up or down one gear.

✽

NOTICE

If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle shifters at the same time, you cannot shift the gear.

5 17


Shift lock system

For your safety, the automatic transaxle has a shift lock system which prevents shifting the transaxle from P (Park) into R (Reverse) unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transaxle from P (Park) into R (Reverse):

1.Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2.Start the engine or turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

3.Move the shift lever.

If the brake pedal is repeatedly depressed and released with the shift lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering noise near the shift lever may be heard. It is a normal condition.

WARNING

- Shifting from park

Always fully depress the brake pedal before and while shifting out of the P (Park) position into another position to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle which could injure persons in or around the vehicle.

OUMA054039

Shift-lock override

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position into R

(Reverse) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, then do the following:

1.Carefully remove the cap covering the shift-lock access hole (1).

2.Insert a screwdriver into the access hole and press down on the screwdriver.

3.Move the shift lever.

4.Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer immediately.

5 18


Ignition key interlock system

The ignition key cannot be removed unless the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position. Even if the ignition switch is in the LOCK position, the key also cannot be removed.

If your vehicle is equipped with

ENGINE START/STOP button, the button will not change to the OFF position unless the shift lever is in the

P (Park) position.

Good driving practices

• Never move the gear shift lever from P (Park) to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.

• Never move the gear shift lever into

P (Park) when the vehicle is in motion.

• Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged.

• Always use the parking brake. Do not depend on placing the transaxle in P (Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.

• Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal.

Moving up a steep grade from a standing start

To move up a steep grade from a standing start, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift lever to D

(Drive). Select the appropriate gear depending on load weight and steepness of the grade, and release the parking brake. Depress the accelerator gradually while releasing the service brakes.

When accelerating from a stop on a steep hill, the vehicle may have a tendency to roll backwards.

Shifting the shift lever into 2

(Second Gear) will help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards.

5 19


ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (IF EQUIPPED)

■

Type A

■

Type B

OUMA054049

These vehicles are not designed for challenging off-road use. Occasional off-road use such as established unpaved roads and trails are OK. It is always important when traveling offhighway that the driver carefully reduces the speed to a level that does not exceed the safe operating speed for those conditions. In general, off-road conditions provide less traction and braking effectiveness than normal road conditions.

The driver must be especially alert to avoid driving on slopes which tilt the vehicle to either side.

These factors must be carefully considered when driving off-road.

Keeping the vehicle in contact with the driving surface and under control in these conditions is always the driver's responsibility for the safety of him/herself and his or her passengers.

* AWD : All Wheel Drive

FWD : Front Wheel Drive

OUMA054010

Engine power can be delivered to all front and rear wheels for maximum traction. AWD is useful when extra traction is required, such as, when driving on slippery, muddy, wet, or snow-covered roads.

5 20

WARNING

- Off road driving

Do not attempt to operate your vehicle under extreme or challenging off road driving conditions. Although this vehicle has off-road capabilities, it was not designed to be driven off road.

Tight corner brake effect

Tight corner brake effect is a unique characteristic of all wheel drive vehicles caused by the difference in tire rotation of the four wheels and the zero-degree alignment of the front wheels and suspension.

Sharp turns at low speeds should be carried out with caution.

If the AWD system warning light

( ) illuminates, this indicates that there is a malfunction in the AWD system.

If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.


5 21


All Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection

Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light

AWD AUTO

(AWD LOCK is deactivated)

AWD LOCK

(Indicator light is not illuminated)

(Indicator light is illuminated)

Description

• When driving in AWD AUTO mode, the vehicle operates similar to conventional FWD vehicles under normal operating conditions. However, if the system determines that there is a need for the AWD mode, the engine’s driving power is distributed to all four wheels automatically without driver intervention.

• When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehicle moves similar to conventional FWD vehicles.

• This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp grades, off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc., to maximize traction.

• This mode automatically begins to deactivate at speeds above 30 km/h (19 mph) and is shifted to AWD AUTO mode at speeds above 40 km/h (25 mph). If the vehicle decelerates to speeds below approximate 40 km/h (25 mph), however, the transfer mode is shifted into AWD LOCK mode again.

When the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the front wheels. This shock is not a mechanical failure.

CAUTION

- Normal road conditions

Do not drive on normal roads for prolonged periods of time with your vehicle locked in the AWD mode.

Driving on normal road with AWD LOCK Mode (especially, when cornering) may cause mechanical noise or vibration which may damage your power train.

5 22


For safe all wheel drive operation

• Do not try to drive in deep standing water or mud since such conditions can stall your engine and clog your exhaust pipes. Do not drive down steep hills since it requires extreme skill to maintain control of the vehicle.

HILL1

• When you are driving up or down hills; drive as straight as possible.

Use extreme caution going up or down steep hills, the grade, terrain and water/mud conditions may cause the vehicle to flip.

HILL2

WARNING

- Hills

Proceed with extreme caution when driving down steep hills.

A slight change in the wheel angle can destabilize the vehicle. This can cause your vehicle to suddenly roll without warning and without time for you to regain control of your vehicle.

5 23


• You must consciously take the effort to learn how to corner in a

AWD vehicle. Do not rely on your experience in conventional FWD vehicles in choosing a safe cornering speed in AWD mode. For starters, you must drive more slowly in AWD.

• Drive carefully off-road because your vehicle may be damaged by rocks or roots of trees. Become familiar with the off-road conditions where you are going to drive before you begin driving.

WARNING

- AWD

Reduce speed when you turn corners. The center of gravity of

AWD vehicles is higher than that of conventional FWD vehicles, making them more likely to roll over when you turn corners too fast.

• Always hold the steering wheel firmly when you are driving offroad.

• Make sure all passengers are wearing seat belts.

WARNING

- Steering wheel

OUMA054053

WARNING

- Wind danger

Drive slowly in heavy winds.

The vehicle's higher center of gravity decreases your steering control capacity.

• If you need to drive in the water, stop your vehicle, set your transfer to the AWD LOCK mode and drive at less than 8 km/h (5 mph).

Do not grab the inside of the steering wheel when you are driving off-road. You may hurt your arm by a sudden steering maneuver or from steering wheel rebound due to impact with objects on the ground.

5 24


WARNING

- Driving through water

Drive slowly. If you are driving too fast in water, the water can get into the engine compartment and wet the ignition system, causing your vehicle to suddenly stop. If this happens and your vehicle is in a tilted position, your vehicle may roll over.

✽

NOTICE

• Shorten your scheduled maintenance interval if you drive in offroad conditions such as sand, mud or water (see “Maintenance under severe usage conditions” in section

7). Always wash your vehicle thoroughly after off-road use, especially cleaning the bottom of the vehicle.

• A full time all wheel drive vehicle cannot be towed by an ordinary tow truck. Make sure that the vehicle is placed on a flat bed truck for moving.

WARNING

- AWD driving

Do not attempt quick steering maneuvers or sharp turns in

AWD mode. Such maneuvers increase the risk of rollover accidents. Rollover accidents are extremely violent and unpredictable.

CAUTION

- Mud or snow

Do not run the engine continuously at high RPMs to free the vehicle from snow or mud. Doing so could damage the AWD system in your vehicle.

5 25


Do not use a tire and wheel package with a different size and type from the one originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to steering failure or rollover causing serious injury.

When replacing the tires, be sure to equip all four tires with the tire and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you equip your vehicle with any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Kia for off-road driving, ou should not use thesetires for high way driving.

WARNING

- Jacked vehicle

While the full-time AWD vehicle is being raised on a jack, never start the engine or cause the tires to rotate.

There is the danger that rotating tires touching the ground could cause the vehicle to go off the jack and to jump forward.

• Full-time AWD vehicles must be tested on a special four wheel chassis dynamometer.

• A full-time AWD vehicle should not be tested on a FWD roll tester. If a

FWD roll tester must be used, perform the following:

Temporary free roller

Roll tester (speedometer)

OUM054011

1. Check the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.

2. Place the front wheels on the roll tester for a speedometer test as shown in the illustration.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Place the rear wheels on the temporary free roller as shown in the illustration.

5 26


BRAKE SYSTEM

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage.

In the event that the power-assisted brakes lose power because of a stalled engine or some other reason, you can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than you normally would. The stopping distance, however, will be longer.

When the engine is not running, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.

CAUTION

- Brake Pedal

Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This will create abnormally high brake temperatures which can cause excessive brake lining and pad wear.

Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way.

Always test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep water.

To dry the brakes, apply them lightly while maintaining a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal.

WARNING

- Steep hill braking

Avoid continuous application of the brakes when descending a long or steep hill by shifting to a lower gear. Continuous brake application will cause the brakes to overheat and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.

5 27


In the event of brake failure

If service brakes fail to operate while the vehicle is in motion, you can make an emergency stop with the parking brake. The stopping distance, however, will be much greater than normal.

WARNING

- Parking brake

Applying the parking brake while the vehicle is moving at normal speeds can cause a sudden loss of control of the vehicle. If you must use the parking brake to stop the vehicle, use great caution in applying the brake.

Disc brakes wear indicator

When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high-pitched warning sound from your front brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal.

Please remember that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes.

Always replace the front or rear brake pads as pairs.

CAUTION

- Replace brake pads

Do not continue to drive with worn brake pads. Continuing to drive with worn brake pads can damage the braking system and result in costly brake repairs.

WARNING

- Brake wear

Do not ignore high pitched wear sounds from your brakes. If you ignore this audible warning, you will eventually lose braking performance, which could lead to a serious accident.

5 28

Parking brake – Foot type

Applying the parking brake

Releasing the parking brake


WARNING

- Parking brake use

All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle which can injure occupants or pedestrians.

OYP054009K

To engage the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and then depress the parking brake pedal down as far as possible.

OYP054010K

To release the parking brake, depress the parking brake pedal a second time while applying the foot brake. The pedal will automatically extend to the fully released position.

CAUTION

- Parking brake

Driving with the parking brake applied will cause excessive brake pad (or lining) and brake rotor wear.

5 29


W-75

Check the brake warning light by turning the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). This light will be illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the

START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off.

If the brake warning light remains on after the parking brake is released while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary.

5 30

If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe location or repair shop.

Electronic parking brake (EPB)

(if equipped)

Applying the parking brake

OUMA054013

To apply the EPB (electronic parking brake):

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Pull up the EPB switch.

Make sure the warning light comes on.


Also, the EPB is applied automatically if the Auto Hold button is on when the engine is turned off. However, if you press the EPB switch after the engine is turned off, the EPB will not be Applied.

✽

NOTICE

On a steep incline or when pulling a trailer, if the vehicle does not remain at a standstill, do as follows:

1. Apply the EPB.

2. Pull up the EPB switch for more than 3 seconds.

Do not operate the parking brake/

EPB while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation.

✽

NOTICE

A click or electric brake motor whine sound may be heard while operating or releasing the EPB, but these conditions are normal and indicate that the EPB is functioning properly.

Releasing the parking brake

OUMA054014

To release the EPB (electronic parking brake), press the EPB switch in the following condition:

• Have the ignition switch or engine start/stop button in the ON position.

• Depress the brake pedal.

Make sure the brake warning light goes off.

5 31


To release EPB (electronic parking brake) automatically:

• Shift lever in P (Park)

With the engine running depress the brake pedal and shift out of P

(Park) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Shift lever in N (Neutral)

With the engine running depress the brake pedal and shift out of N

(Neutral) to R (Reverse) or D

(Drive).

• Automatic transaxle vehicle


2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.

3. Close the driver's door, engine hood and trunk.

4. Depress the accelerator pedal while the shift lever is in R

(Rear), D (Drive) or Sports mode.

Make sure the brake warning light goes off.

✽

NOTICE

• For your safety, you can engage the EPB even though the ignition switch or engine stop/start button is in the OFF position, but you cannot release it.

• For your safety, depress the brake pedal and release the parking brake manually with the EPB switch when you drive downhill or when backing up the vehicle.

Do not follow the above procedure when driving on a flat level ground.

The vehicle may suddenly move forward.

CAUTION

• If the parking brake warning light is still on even though the EPB has been released, have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

• Do not drive your vehicle with the EPB applied. It may cause excessive brake pad and brake rotor wear.

5 32


EPB (electronic parking brake) may be automatically applied when:

• The EPB is overheated

• Requested by other systems

System warning

✽

NOTICE

If the driver turns the engine off by mistake while Auto Hold is operating, EPB will be automatically applied. (Vehicles equipped with

Auto Hold)

OUM054104L

• If you try to drive off depressing the accelerator pedal with the EPB applied, but the EPB doesn't release automatically, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

• If the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the engine hood, driver's door or trunk is opened, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

• If there is a problem with the vehicle, a warning may sound and a message may appear.

If the above situation occurs, depress the brake pedal and release EPB by pressing the EPB switch.

WARNING

- Parking

Brake Use

All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parked to avoid inadvertent movement of the car which can injure occupants or pedestrians.

5 33


• A click or electric brake motor whine sound may be heard while operating or releasing the EPB, but these conditions are normal and indicate that the EPB is functioning properly.

• When leaving your keys with a parking lot attendant or valet, make sure to inform him/her how to operate the EPB.

• The EPB may malfunction if you drive with the EPB applied.

• When you automatically release

EPB by depressing the accelerator pedal, depress it slowly.

System warning

■

Type A

■

Type B

OUM054100L

✽

NOTICE

Depress the brake pedal when the above message appears for the Auto

Hold and EPB may not activate.

OUM054101L

When the conversion from Auto Hold to EPB is not working properly a warning will sound and a message will appear.

5 34

System warning

■

Type A

EPB malfunction indicator

(if equipped)

■

Type A

■

Type B

OUM054102L

■

Type B

OUM054103L

If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold is activated because of ESC

(Electronic Stability Control) signal, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

OUM054106

This warning light illuminates if the engine start/stop button is changed to the ON position and goes off in approximately 3 seconds if the system is operation normally.

If the EPB malfunction indicator remains on, comes on while driving, or does not come on when the ignition switch or the engine start/stop button is changed to the ON position, this indicates that the EPB may have malfunctioned.


If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

The EPB malfunction indicator may illuminate when the ESC indicator comes on to indicate that the ESC is not working properly, but it does not indicate a malfunction of the EPB.

5 35


• The EPB warning light may illuminate if the EPB switch operates abnormally. Shut the engine off and turn it on again after a few minutes. The warning light will go off and the EPB switch will operate normally. However, if the EPB warning light is still on, have the system checked by an authorized

Kia dealer.

• If the parking brake warning light does not illuminate or blinks even though the EPB switch was pulled up, the EPB is not applied.

• If the parking brake warning light blinks when the EPB warning light is on, press the switch, then pull it up. Once more press it back to its original position and pull it back up.

If the EPB warning does not go off, have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

Emergency braking

If there is a problem with the brake pedal while driving, emergency braking is possible by pulling up and holding the EPB switch. Braking is possible only while you are holding the EPB switch.

WARNING

Do not operate the electronic parking brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. Applying the electronic parking brake while the vehicle is moving at normal speeds can cause a sudden loss of control of the vehicle. If you must use the electronic parking brake to stop the vehicle, use great caution in applying the brake.

If you notice a continuous noise or burning smell when the EPB is used for emergency braking, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

When the EPB (electronic parking brake) is not released

If the EPB does not release normally, take your vehicle to an authorized

Kia dealer by loading the vehicle on a flatbed tow truck and have the system checked.

✽

NOTICE

During emergency braking by the

EPB, the parking brake warning light will illuminate to indicate that the system is operating.

5 36


W h ii ii tt tt e

AUTO HOLD (if equipped)

The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle in a standstill even though the brake pedal is not depressed after the driver brings the vehicle to a complete stop by depressing the brake pedal.

W h ii ii tt tt e

G rr e e n

OUMA054016

1.Depress the brake pedal, start the engine and then press the Auto

Hold button.

The white AUTO

HOLD indicator will come on indicating the system is in standby.

Before the Auto Hold will engage, the driver's door, engine hood and trunk must be closed and the driver's seat belt must be fastened.

OUM054017

2.When coming to a complete stop by depressing the brake pedal, the

AUTO HOLD indicator changes from white to green indicating the

AUTO HOLD is engaged and EPB is applied. The vehicle will remain at a standstill even if you release the brake pedal.

3.If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be released.

5 37


4.If you press the accelerator pedal with the shift lever in R (Reverse),

D (Drive) or sports mode, the Auto

Hold will be released automatically and the vehicle will start to move.

The indicator changes from green to white indicating the Auto Hold is in standby and the EPB is released.

When driving off from Auto Hold by depressing the accelerator pedal, always check the surrounding area near your vehicle.

Slowly depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth launch.

Cancel

L ii ii g h tt tt o ff ff ff

OUMA054018

To cancel the Auto Hold operation, press the Auto Hold switch. The

AUTO HOLD indicator will go out.

To cancel the Auto Hold operation when the vehicle is at a standstill, press the Auto Hold switch while depressing the brake pedal.

✽

NOTICE

• The following are conditions when the Auto Hold will not engage

(Auto Hold light will not turn green and the Auto Hold system remains in stand by):

- The driver's seat belt is unfastened and driver's door is opened

- The engine hood is opened

- The trunk is opened

- The shift lever is in P (Park)

- The EPB is applied

• For your safety, the Auto Hold automatically switches to EPB under any of the following conditions (Auto Hold light remains white and the EPB automatically applies):

- The driver's seat belt is unfastened and driver's door is opened

- The engine hood is opened

- The trunk is opened

- The vehicle is in a standstill for more than 10 minutes

- The vehicle is standing on a steep slope

- The vehicle moved several times

(Continued)

5 38


(Continued)

In these cases, the brake warning light comes on, the AUTO HOLD indicator changes from green to white, and a warning sounds and a message will appear to inform you that EPB has been automatically engaged. Before driving off again, press foot brake pedal, check the surrounding area near your vehicle and release parking brake manually with the EPB switch.

• If the AUTO HOLD indicator lights up yellow, the Auto Hold is not working properly. Take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of an accident, do not activate Auto Hold while driving downhill, backing up or parking your vehicle.

If there is a malfunction with the driver’s door, engine hood or trunk open detection system, the Auto Hold may not work properly.

Take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

✽

NOTICE

A click or electric brake motor whine sound may be heard while operating or releasing the EPB, but these conditions are normal and indicate that the EPB is functioning properly.

5 39


Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

ABS (or ESC) will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead.

Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions. The vehicle should be driven at reduced speeds in the following circumstances:

• When driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.

• When driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface heights.

Driving in these conditions increase the stopping distance for your vehicle.

The ABS continuously senses the speed of the wheels. If the wheels are going to lock, the ABS system repeatedly modulates the hydraulic brake pressure to the wheels.

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ABS is active.

In order to obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes. Press your brake pedal as hard as possible or as hard as the situation allows the ABS to control the force being delivered to the brakes.

✽

NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning properly.

5 40


• Even with the anti-lock brake system, your vehicle still requires sufficient stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you.

• Always slow down when cornering.

The anti-lock brake system cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces, operation of the anti-lock brake system may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system.

W-78

The ABS warning light will stay on for approximately 3 seconds after the ignition switch is ON. During that time, the ABS will go through selfdiagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS. Contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

• When you drive on a road having poor traction, such as an icy road, and have operated your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light may illuminate. Pull your vehicle over to a safe place and stop the engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABS warning light goes off, then your

ABS system is normal. Otherwise, you may have a problem with the

ABS. Contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

✽

NOTICE

When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the engine may not run as smoothly and the ABS warning light may turn on at the same time. This happens because of low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS has malfunctioned.

• Do not pump your brakes!

• Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle.

5 41


Electronic stability control

(ESC)

OUMA054019

The Electronic Stability control

(ESC) system is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the brakes on individual wheels and intervenes with the engine management system to stabilize the vehicle.

Electronic stability control (ESC) will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can still result in serious accidents.

Only a safe and attentive driver can prevent accidents by avoiding maneuvers that cause the vehicle to lose traction.

Even with ESC installed, always follow all the normal precautions for driving - including driving at safe speeds for the conditions.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is an electronic system designed to help the driver maintain vehicle control under adverse conditions. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Factors including speed, road conditions and driver steering input can all affect whether ESC will be effective in preventing a loss of control.

It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ESC is active.

✽

NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and indicate that the Electronic

Stability Control System is functioning properly.

5 42


ESC operation

ESC ON condition

-

• When the ignition is turned

ON, ESC and ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for approximately 3 seconds, then ESC is turned on.

• Press the ESC OFF button for at least half a second after turning the ignition ON to turn ESC off.

(ESC OFF indicator will illuminate). To turn the

ESC on, press the ESC

OFF button (ESC OFF indicator light will go off).

• When starting the engine, you may hear a slight ticking sound. This is the ESC performing an automatic system self-check and does not indicate a problem.

When operating

When the ESC is in operation, the ESC indicator light blinks.

Stability Control is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of the mud or driving on a slippery road, pressing the accelerator pedal may not cause the engine rpm

(revolutions per minute) to increase.

ESC operation off

ESC OFF state

This car has 2 kinds of ESC off states.

If the engine stops when

ESC is off, ESC remains off.

Upon restarting the engine, the ESC will automatically turn on again.

5 43


■

Type A

■

Type A

Indicator light

■

ESC indicator light

OUM054162L

■

ESC OFF indicator light

■

Type B

OUM054165L

■

Type B

OUM054161L

• ESC off state 1

To cancel ESC operation, press the

ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) shortly (ESC OFF indicator light

(ESC OFF ) illuminates). At this state, the engine control function does not operate. It means the traction control function does not operate. Brake control function only operates.

OUM054163L

• ESC off state 2

To cancel ESC operation, press the

ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indicator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates and ESC OFF warning chime will sound. At this state, the engine control function and brake control function do not operate. It means the car stability control function does not operate any more.

When ignition switch is turned to ON, the indicator light illuminates, then goes off if the ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ESC is operating or illuminates when ESC fails to operate.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off with the button.

5 44


WARNING

- Electronic stability control

Drive carefully even though your vehicle has Electronic

Stability Control. It can only assist you in maintaining control under certain circumstances.

ESC OFF usage

When driving

• ESC should be turned on for daily driving whenever possible.

• To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface.

✽

NOTICE

• When operating the vehicle on a dynamometer, ensure that the

ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light illuminated). If the ESC is left on, it may prevent the vehicle speed from increasing, and result in false diagnosis.

• Turning the ESC off does not affect ABS or brake system operation.

WARNING

- Operating

ESC

Never press the ESC OFF button while ESC is operating (ESC indicator light blinks).

If ESC is turned off while ESC is operating, the vehicle may slip out of control.

5 45


Vehicle stability management

(VSM) (if equipped)

This system provides further enhancements to vehicle stability and steering responses when a vehicle is driving on a slippery road or a vehicle detects changes in coefficient of friction between right wheels and left wheels when braking.

VSM operation

When the VSM is in operation, ESC indicator light ( ) blinks.

When the vehicle stability management is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle and/or abnormal steering responses

(EPS). This is only the effect of brake and EPS control and indicates nothing unusual.

VSM operation off

If you press the ESC OFF button to turn off the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and the ESC OFF indicator light ( ) illuminates.

To turn on the VSM, press the button again. The ESC OFF indicator light goes out.

WARNING

- Tire/

Wheel size

When replacing tires and wheels, make sure they are the same size as the original tires and wheels installed. Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may diminish any supplemental safety benefits of the VSM system.

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on bank road such as gradient or incline

• Driving in reverse

• ESC OFF indicator light ( ) remains on the instrument cluster

• EPS indicator light remains on the instrument cluster

5 46


Malfunction indicator

The VSM can be deactivated even if you don’t cancel the VSM operation by pressing the ESC OFF button. It indicates that a malfunction has been detected somewhere in the

Electric Power Steering system or

VSM system. If the ESC indicator light ( ) or EPS warning light remains on, take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

✽

NOTICE

• The VSM is designed to function above approximately 22 km/h (13 mph) on curves.

• The VSM is designed to function above approximately 10 km/h (6 mph) when a vehicle is braking on a split-mu road. The split-mu road is made of surfaces which have different friction forces.

• The Vehicle Stability Management system is not a substitute for safe driving practices but a supplementary function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead. Always hold the steering wheel firmly while driving.

• Your vehicle is designed to activate according to the driver’s intention, even with installed VSM. Always follow all the normal precautions for driving at safe speeds for the conditions – including driving in clement weather and on a slippery road.

Hill-start assist control (HAC)

A vehicle has the tendency to roll back on a steep hill when it starts to go after stopping. The Hill-start

Assist Control (HAC) prevents the vehicle from rolling back by applying the brakes automatically for about 2 seconds. The brakes are released when the accelerator pedal is depressed or after about 2 seconds.

The HAC is activated only for about 2 seconds, so when the vehicle is starting off always depress the accelerator pedal.

WARNING

- Maintaining

Brake Pressure on Incline

HAC does not replace the need to apply brakes while stopped on an incline. While stopped, make sure you maintain brake pressure sufficient to prevent your vehicle from rolling backward and causing an accident.

Don’t release the brake pedal until you are ready to accelerate forward.

5 47


Good braking practices

• Check to be sure the parking brake is not engaged and the parking brake indicator light is out before driving away.

• Driving through water may get the brakes wet. They can also get wet when the vehicle is washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous! Your vehicle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal, taking care to keep the vehicle under control at all times. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.

• Don't coast down hills with the vehicle out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all times, use the brakes to slow down, then shift to a lower gear so that engine braking will help you maintain a safe speed.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.

Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be dangerous because the brakes might overheat and lose their effectiveness. It also increases the wear of the brake components.

• If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe place.

• If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transaxle, don't let your vehicle creep forward. To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped.

• Be cautious when parking on a hill.

Firmly engage the parking brake and place the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle). If your vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If your vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the vehicle from rolling, block the wheels.

5 48

• Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.

Then release the parking brake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with the accelerator pedal. This can cause the transaxle to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.


5 49


AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB)/ FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)

(IF EQUIPPED)

The AEB system is to reduce or to avoid accident risk. It recognizes the distance from the vehicle ahead or the pedestrian through the sensors

(i.e. radar and camera), and, if necessary, warns the driver of accident risk with the warning message or the warning alarms.

WARNING

- Autonomous Emergency

Braking (AEB) Limitations

The AEB system is a supplemental system and is not a substitute for safe driving practices. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead to ensure it is safety to use the AEB system.

✽

NOTICE

Take the following precautions when using the Autonomous Emergency

Braking (AEB):

• This system is only a supplemental system and it is not intended to, nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driver. The sensing range and objects detectable by the sensors are limited. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times.

• NEVER drive too fast in accordance with the road conditions or while cornering.

• Always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring. AEB does not stop the vehicle completely and does not avoid collisions.

System setting and activation

System setting

OUM057220L

The driver can activate the AEB by placing the ignition switch to the ON position and by selecting 'User

Settings', 'Driving Assist', and 'Assist

Braking System'. The AEB deactivates, when the driver cancels the system setting.

5 50


The warning light illuminates on the LCD display, when you cancel the AEB system. The driver can monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on the LCD display. When the warning light remains ON with the AEB activated, we recommend you to have the system checked by an authorized

Kia dealer.

OUM057229L

OUMA057231

The driver can select the initial warning activation time in the User

Settings in the instrument cluster

LCD display. The options for the initial Forward Collision Warning include the following: selected, the initial

Forward Collision Warning is activated earlier than normal. This setting maximizes the amount of distance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs.

• NORMAL - When this condition is selected, the initial

Forward Collision

Warning is activated normally. This setting allows for a nominal amount of distance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs.

LATE When this condition is selected, the initial Forward

Collision Warning is activated later than normal. This setting reduces the amount of distance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs.

5 51


Prerequisite for activation

The AEB will activate when the AEB is selected on the LCD display, and when the following prerequisites are satisfied:

- The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is activated.

- The driving speed is over 6 mph.

(The AEB only works within a certain range of vehicle speeds)

- When the AEB recognizes a vehicle or the pedestrian in front. (The

AEB may not recognize every obstacle or provide warnings and braking in every situation, so do not rely on the AEB to stop the vehicle in instances where the driver sees an obstacle and has the ability to apply the brakes)

WARNING

Set or cancel AEB with controlling switches on steering wheel after stopping the vehicle in the safe place for your safety.

Do not attempt to set or cancel the AEB while your vehicle is moving.

• The AEB automatically activates when you turn the vehicle on.

The driver can deactivate the AEB by canceling it the system setting on the LCD display.

• Even when the Autonomous

Emergency Braking (AEB) may be set to "Use AEB" setting, if the

Traction Control System (TCS) or

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) features are deselected, AEB function will be turned off automatically.

In this case, the AEB feature cannot be turned on manually as well.

AEB warning message and system control

Warning text may appear or warning sound may sound when the vehicle in front brakes suddenly or the distance with the vehicle in front is short. Also, the brake system will control the brakes depending on the collision possibility.

Depending on the vehicle condition and traffic conditions in front of the vehicle, some warning features may activate or not activate at all.

5 52


Forward Warning (1st warning) Collision Warning (2nd warning) Emergency braking (3rd warning)

OUMA057221

The warning message appears on the

LCD display and a warning chime sounds.

OUMA057222

• The warning message appears on the LCD display and a warning chime sounds.

• The AEB applies partial brakes to reduce the impact from a collision.

OUMA057223

• The warning message appears on the LCD display and a warning chime sounds.

• The AEB applies partial brakes to release shock from the collision.

The AEB applies maximum brakes just before the collision.

5 53


Brake operation

• In an urgent situation, the braking system enters into the ready status for prompt reaction against the driver’s depressing the brake pedal.

• The AEB provides additional braking power for optimum braking performance, when the driver depresses the brake pedal.

• The braking control is automatically deactivated, when the driver sharply depresses the brake pedal, or when the driver abruptly turns the steering wheel.

• The braking control is automatically canceled, when risk factors disappear.

The driver should always exercise caution when operating the vehicle, even though there is no warning message or warning alarm.

WARNING

The AEB cannot avoid all collisions. The AEB might not completely stop the vehicle before collision, due to ambient weather and road conditions. The driver has the responsibility to drive safely and control the vehicle.

✽

NOTICE

The AEB operates in accordance with the risk levels, such as the distance from the vehicle/passer-by in front, the speed of the vehicle/passer-by in front, and the driver's vehicle operation. Do not drive dangerously in order to activate to system.

Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in front

(front radar)

OUM054054L

The sensor cannot maintain proper distance from the vehicle in front when the sensor lens is obscured by foreign substances, such as snow and rain, which will adversely affect performance. It may even temporarily cancel the AEB. Always keep the sensor clean.

5 54


Warning message and warning light

OUMA057224

When the sensor is covered or the sensor lens is obscured by foreign substances, such as snow or rain, the AEB operation may temporarily stop. In this case, a warning message will appear to notify the driver.

This is not a malfunction with the

AEB. To operate the AEB again, remove the foreign substances.

✽

NOTICE

• Do not install any accessories, such as a license plate bracket or bumper sticker near the sensor area. Do not replace the bumper by yourself. Doing so may adversely affect the sensing performance.

• Always keep the sensor/bumper area clean.

• Use only a soft cloth to wash the vehicle. Also, do not spray highly pressurized water on the sensor installed on the bumper.

• Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the frontal sensor area. When the sensor moves out of the correct position due to external force, the system may not operate correctly even without the warning light or message. In this case, we recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

• Use only the genuine Kia sensor cover. Do not paint the sensor cover.

System malfunction

OUMA057233

OUMA057225

• When the AEB is not working properly, the AEB warning light ( ) will illuminate and the warning message will appear for a few seconds.

After the message disappears, the master warning light ( ) will illuminate. In this case, we recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

5 55


• The AEB warning message may appear along with the illumination of the ESC warning light.

WARNING

The AEB is only a supplemental system for the driver’s convenience.

The driver still maintains responsibility to control the vehicle. Do not solely depend on the AEB system. Rather, maintain a safe braking distance, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to lower the driving speed.

• The AEB may unnecessarily produce warning messages and warning alarms. Due to the sensing limitation, the AEB may not produce warning messages or warning alarm at all.

• When there is a malfunction with the AEB, the braking control does not operate upon detecting a collision risk even with other braking systems normally operating.

• The AEB only operates when it identifies a vehicle/pedestrian in front of the vehicle while driving forward. It does not operate when the vehicle is driving in reverse.

• The AEB can not recognize crosstraffic or parked vehicles presenting a side-profile.

Limitation of the system

The AEB assists the driver in reducing a specific risk, it does not take responsibility away from the driver to control the vehicle in a safe manner.

The AEB monitors the driving situations through the radar and the camera sensor. For any vehicle activity occurring outside the sensor range, the AEB may not function. The driver should exercise caution in the following situations, as the AEB operation may be limited:

5 56


Recognizing vehicles

- The radar or the camera is obscured by foreign substances.

- It heavily rains or snows.

- There is electromagnetic interference.

- Something in the path of travel deflects the radar waves.

- The vehicle in front has a narrow body. (i.e. motorcycles and bicycles)

- The driver’s view is degraded by driving towards sunlight, reflected light, or darkness.

- The camera cannot see the full profile of the vehicle in front.

- The vehicle in front has an unusual shape, such as a heavily-loaded truck or a trailer.

- When the vehicle is running on uneven surface or changing grades.

The vehicle in front does not turn

ON the rear lights, does not have rear lights, has asymmetric rear lights, or has rear lights out of angle.

- The outside brightness changes suddenly, such as when entering/exiting the a tunnel.

- The vehicle driving is unstable.

- The radar/camera sensor recognition is limited.

OUM054040L

- Driving on a curve

The AEB performance decreases while driving on a curve. The AEB may not recognize the vehicle in front even in the same lane. It may unnecessarily produce the warning message and the warning alarm, or it may not produce the warning message and the warning alarm at all.

While driving on a curve, exercise caution, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal.

5 57


OUM054041L

While driving on a curve, the AEB may recognize the vehicle in front in the next lane. Exercise caution, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal.

Or, depress the accelerator pedal to maintain the driving speed. Always, take a look around the vehicle for your safety.

OUM054042L

- Driving on a slope

The AEB performance decreases while driving upward or downward on a slope, not recognizing the vehicle in front in the same lane. It may unnecessarily produce the warning message and the warning alarm, or it may not produce the warning message and the warning alarm at all.

When the AEB suddenly recognizes the vehicle in front while passing over a slope, you may experience sharp deceleration.

Always keep your eyes forward while driving upward or downward on a slope, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal.

OUM054043L

- Changing lanes

Even though the vehicle in the next lane enters into your lane, it may not be recognized by the AEB, until it enters the AEB sensing range.

Especially when the vehicle in the next lane abruptly enters into your lane, it is more likely not be recognized. Always be attentive to driving conditions.

5 58


OUM054046L

When a vehicle in front of you changes lanes suddenly to avoid a stopped vehicle up ahead, your AEB may not recognize the stopped vehicle ahead. Always be attentive to driving conditions.

OUM054048L

- Recognizing the vehicle

When the vehicle in front has heavy loading extended rearward, or when the vehicle in front has higher ground clearance, the AEB may not recognize the nearest hazard

Recognizing pedestrians

- The pedestrian is not fully captured by the camera sensor, or the pedestrian does not walk in the upright position.

- The pedestrian moves very fast.

- The pedestrian abruptly appears in front.

- The pedestrian wears clothes similar in color to the background.

- Conditions outside are too bright or too dark.

- The vehicle drives at night or in the darkness.

- There is an item similar in shape to a person standing.

- The pedestrian is small.

- The pedestrian is using a mobility assistance device, such as a wheelchair or scooter.

- The pedestrian blends in with their surroundings.

- Sensor recognition is limited by rain, snow, fog, etc.

- There is a group of pedestrians.

5 59


WARNING -

Testing the

AEB

The AEB does not operate in certain situations. Thus, never test-operate the AEB against a person or an object. It may cause a severe injury or even death.

• Pay great caution to the vehicle in front, when it has heavy loading extended rearward, or when it has higher ground clearance.

• The sensor only detects pedestrian, not carts, bicycles, motorcycles, luggage bags, or strollers.

WARNING -

AEB and

Towing

Cancel the AEB in the User

Settings on the LCD display, before towing another vehicle.

While towing, the brake application may adversely affect your vehicle safety.

✽

NOTICE

The system may temporarily cancel due to the strong electric waves.

5 60


CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

OUMA054021

The cruise control system allows you to program the vehicle to maintain a constant speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.

This system is designed to function above approximately 30 km/h (20 mph).

If the cruise control is left on,

(CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminated) the cruise control can be switched on accidentally. Keep the cruise control system off (CRUISE indicator light OFF) when the cruise control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.

Use the cruise control system only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

Do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads.

✽

NOTICE

• During normal cruise control operation, when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds. This delay is normal.

• To activate cruise control, depress the brake pedal at least once after turning the ignition switch to the

ON position or starting the engine.

This is to check if the brake switch which is important part to cancel cruise control is in normal condition.

WARNING

- Misuse of

Cruise Control

Do not use cruise control if the traffic situation does not allow you to drive safely at a constant speed and with sufficient distance to the vehicle in front.

5 61


To set cruise control speed: To increase cruise control set speed:

OUMA054022

1.Press the CRUISE button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

2.Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 30 km/h

(20 mph).

OUMA054023

3.Move the lever down (to SET-), and release it at the desired speed. The

SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

Release the accelerator at the same time. The desired speed will automatically be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going downhill.

OUMA054024

Follow either of these procedures:

• Move the lever up (to RES+) and hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.

Release the lever at the speed you want.

• Move the lever up (to RES+) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 2 km/h (1.0

mph) each time the lever is operated in this manner.

5 62

To decrease the cruising speed:

OUMA054023


• Move the lever down (to SET-) and hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the lever at the speed you want to maintain.

• Move the lever down (to SET-) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease by 2 km/h (1.0

mph) each time the lever is operated in this manner.


To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on:

If you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on, depress the accelerator pedal.

Increased speed will not interfere with the cruise control operation or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator.

To cancel cruise control, do one of the following:

OUMA054025

• Depress the brake pedal.

• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic transaxle.

• Press the CANCEL switch.

• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than the memory speed by 20 km/h (12 mph).

• Decrease the vehicle speed to less than approximately 25 km/h (15 mph).

5 63


Each of these actions will cancel cruise control operation (the SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off), but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to resume cruise control operation, move the lever up (to RES+). You will return to your previously preset speed.

To resume cruising speed at more than approximately 30 km/h (20 mph):

To turn cruise control off, do one of the following:

OUMA054024

If any method other than the

CRUISE ON-OFF switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the most recent set speed will automatically resume when you move the lever up.

It will not resume, however, if the vehicle speed has dropped below approximately 30 km/h (20 mph).

OUMA054022

• Press the CRUISE button (the

CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off).

• Turn the ignition off.

Both of these actions will cancel the cruise control operation. If you want to resume the cruise control operation, repeat the steps provided in “To set cruise control speed” on the previous page.

5 64


ADVANCED SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (ASCC) (IF EQUIPPED)

OUM056156

➀

Cruise indicator

➁

Set speed

➂

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

The ASCC allows you to program the vehicle to maintain a set speed so long as it is not limited by traffic.

When traffic is encountered the vehicle will slow down to maintain a set distance behind traffic without depressing the accelerator or brake pedal.

WARNING

- Advanced

Smart Cruise Control

Inadvertent Activation

If the advanced smart cruise control is left on (CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster illuminated), it can be activated inadvertently.

Keep the advanced smart cruise control system off (CRUISE indicator turn off) when the advanced smart cruise control is not in use to avoid setting a speed which the driver is not aware of.

WARNING

- Advanced

Smart Cruise Control

Limitations

• The advanced smart cruise control is a supplemental system and is not a substitute for safe driving practices. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not use the advanced smart cruise control when it may not be safe to keep the car at a constant speed, for instance, driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads.

• The advanced smart cruise control system cannot recognize a stopped vehicle, pedestrians or an oncoming vehicle.

Always look ahead cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring.

• Use the advanced smart cruise control system only when traveling on open highways in good weather conditions.

• Limited visibility (rain, snow, smog, etc)

• Cruise function should not be used when the vehicle is being towed to prevent any damage.

5 65


Speed setting (ASCC)

To set cruise control speed:

To increase cruise control set speed:

OUMA054200

1.Press the CRUISE button, to turn the system on. The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed.

• 30 km/h (20 mph) ~ 180 km/h

(110 mph) : when there is no vehicle in front

• 0 km/h (0 mph) ~ 180 km/h (110 mph) : when there is a vehicle in front

OUMA054201

3. Move the lever down (to SET-), and release it at the desired speed. The set speed and vehicle to vehicle distance on the LDC screen will illuminate.

4.Release the accelerator pedal. The desired speed will automatically be maintained.

If there is a vehicle in front of you, the speed may decrease to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going uphill or downhill.

OUMA054202


• Move the lever up (to RES+), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will increase by 10 km/h (5 mph).


• Move the lever up (to RES+), and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 1.0 km/h (1 mph) each time you move the lever up (to RES+) in this manner.

• ASCC will operate to a maximum setting of 180 km/h (110 mph).

However all local speed limit laws must be followed.

5 66


To decrease the cruise control set speed:

OUMA054201


• Move the lever down (to SET-), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will decrease by 10 km/h (5 mph).


• Move the lever down (to SET-), and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease by 1.0 km/h (1 mph) each time you move the lever down (to SET-) in this manner.

• You can set the cruise control to any speed above 30 km/h (20 mph).

To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on:

If you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on, depress the accelerator pedal.

Increased speed will not interfere with cruise control operation or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator.

If you move the lever down (to SET-) at increased speed, the cruising speed will be set again.

✽

NOTICE

Be careful when accelerating temporarily, because the speed is not regulated automatically at this time even if there is a vehicle in front of you.

ASCC will be temporarily canceled when:

OYP054134N

Cancelled manually

• The brake pedal is depressed.

• Press the CANCEL button.

The CRUISE indicator is illuminated continuously.

5 67


Cancelled automatically

• The driver's door is opened.

• The shift lever is shifted to N

(Neutral), R (Reverse) or

P(Parking).

• The EPB (electronic parking brake) is applied.

• The vehicle speed is over 190 km/h (120 mph)

• The ESC, ABS or TCS is operating.

• The ESC is turned off.

• The AEB is activated.

• The sensor is obscured by foreign matter such as mud or snow.

• When the vehicle is stopped for over 5 minutes.

• The driver starts driving by pushing the lever up (RES +) or down

(SET -) or depressing the accelerator pedal approximately 3 seconds after the vehicle is stopped by the Advanced Smart Cruise

Control System with no other vehicle ahead or a vehicle stopped far away in front.

• The engine speed is over 7000

RPM.

• The ASCC system has malfunctioned.

• The accelerator pedal is continuously depressed for more than 5 minutes.

Each of these actions will cancel the ASCC operation. (The set speed and vehicle-to-vehicle distance on the LCD display will go off.)

If the ASCC is cancelled automatically, the ASCC will not resume even though the RES+ or SETlever is moved. Also, the EPB

(electronic parking brake) will be applied when the vehicle is stopped.

If the ASCC is cancelled by a reason not mentioned, have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

OUM054164L

If the system is automatically cancelled, the warning chime will sound and a message will appear for a few seconds.

You must adjust the vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition.

Always check the road conditions.

Do not rely on the warning chime.

5 68


To resume cruise control set speed:

OUMA054202

If any method other than the

CRUISE button was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the cruising speed will automatically resume when you move the lever up/down (to RES+ or

SET-).

If you move the lever up (to RES+), the speed will resume to the recently set speed. It will not resume if the vehicle speed has dropped below approximately 30 km/h (20 mph).

WARNING

- Cruise control reactivation

To reduce the risk of an accident, always check the road conditions when reactivating the advanced smart cruise control using the RES+ lever to ensure the road conditions permit safe use of the cruise control.

To turn cruise control off:

OUMA054200

Press the CRUISE button. (the

CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will go off).

5 69


Vehicle to vehicle distance setting (ASCC)

To set vehicle to vehicle distance:

OUMA054210

This function allows you to program the vehicle to maintain relative distance to the vehicle ahead without depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal.

The vehicle to vehicle distance will automatically activate when the

ASCC is on.

Select the appropriate distance according to road conditions and vehicle speed.

For example, if you drive at 90 km/h

(56 mph), the distance is maintained as follows;

Each time the button is pressed, the vehicle to vehicle distance changes as follows:

Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2

Distance 1

Distance 4 - approximately 52.5 m

(172 feet)

Distance 3 - approximately 40 m

(130 feet)

Distance 2 - approximately 32.5 m

(106 feet)

Distance 1 - approximately 25 m (82 feet)

✽

NOTICE

The 'Distance 4' is always set when the system is used for the first time after starting the engine.

5 70

Distance 4

Distance 2

Distance 3


• The vehicle will maintain the set speed, when the lane ahead is clear.

• The vehicle will slow down or speed up within selected speed to maintain the selected distance, when there is a vehicle ahead of you in the lane. (A vehicle will appear in front of your vehicle in the LCD display only when there is an actual vehicle in front of you)

• If the vehicle ahead speeds up, your vehicle will travel at a steady cruising speed after accelerating to the selected speed.

Distance 1

OYP056137C

5 71


• The warning chime sounds and

LCD display blinks if it is hard to maintain the selected distance to the vehicle ahead.

• If the warning chime sounds, actively adjust the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition.

• Even if the warning chime is not activated, always pay attention to the driving conditions to prevent dangerous situations from occurring.

OUMA057169

If the vehicle ahead (vehicle speed: less than 30 km/h (20 mph)) moves to the next lane, the warning chime will sound and a message will appear.

If a vehicle enters into your lane moving less than the designated speed, you can adjust your vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal.

In traffic situation

OUM054168L

In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if the vehicle ahead of you starts moving, your vehicle will start as well.

However, if the vehicle stops for more than 3 seconds, you must depress the accelerator pedal or move up/down the lever (to RES+ or

SET-) to start driving.

5 72

Radar to detect distance to the vehicle ahead

Radar check message


ASCC (Advanced Smart Cruise

Control) malfunction message

OUM054054L

The sensor detects distance to the vehicle ahead.

If the sensor is covered with dirt or other foreign matter, the vehicle to vehicle distance control may not operate correctly.

Always keep the sensor clean.

OUMA057226

If the radar or cover is dirty or obscured with foreign matter such as snow, this message will appear. In this case, the system may not function temporarily, but it does not indicate a malfunction of the Advanced

Smart Cruise Control System. Clean the radar or cover by using a soft cloth.

OUM054187L

The message will appear when the vehicle to vehicle distance control system is not functioning normally.

Take your vehicle to an authorized

Kia dealer and have the system checked.

5 73


• Always keep the sensor and bumper clean.

• Use only a genuine Kia sensor cover for your vehicle.

• Do not install accessories around the sensor and do not replace the bumper by yourself. It may interfere with the sensor performance.

• Impact damage to the sensor or sensor area may cause the sensor to move slightly off position and result in the ASCC not operating correctly. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized

Kia dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION

- Sensor

Damage

To prevent sensor cover damage from occurring, wash the car with a soft cloth.

To adjust the sensitivity of

Advanced Smart Cruise

Control

OUM054157L

The sensitivity of vehicle speed when following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance can be adjusted. Go to the User Settings

Mode (Driving Assist) and select

SCC (Smart Cruise Control). You may select one of the three stages you prefer.

• Slow:

Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is slower than normal speed.

• Normal:

Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is normal

• Fast:

Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is faster than normal speed.

✽

NOTICE

The system remembers the last selected mode.

5 74


To convert to cruise control mode:

OUM054167L

1.Turn the ASCC on (the cruise indicator light will be on but the system will not be activated).

2.Push the distance to distance switch for more than 2 seconds.

3.Choose between "Smart cruise control (SCC) mode" and "Cruise control (CC) mode".

When using the cruise control mode, you must manually assess the distance to other vehicles as the system will not automatically brake to slow down for other vehicles.

Limitations of the system

OUM054040L

The ASCC may have limits to its ability to detect distance to the vehicle ahead due to road and traffic conditions.

OUM054166L

The driver may choose to only use the cruise control mode (speed control function) by doing as follows:

5 75


On curves

• On curves, the ASCC may not detect a moving vehicle in your lane, and then your vehicle could accelerate to the set speed. Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly slow down when the vehicle ahead is recognized suddenly.

• Select the appropriate set speed on curves and adjust your vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition.

OUM054041L

• Your vehicle speed can be reduced due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane. Adjust your vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition. Apply the accelerator pedal and select the appropriate set speed. Check to be sure that the road conditions permit safe operation of the ASCC.

On inclines

OUM054042L

• During uphill or downhill driving, the ASCC may not detect a moving vehicle in your lane, and cause your vehicle to accelerate to the set speed. Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly slow down when the vehicle ahead is recognized suddenly.

• Select the appropriate set speed on inclines and adjust your vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition.

5 76


Lane changing

OUM054043L

• A vehicle which moves into your lane from an adjacent lane cannot be recognized by the sensor until it is in the sensor's detection range.

• The sensor may not detect immediately when a vehicle cuts in suddenly. Always pay attention to the traffic, road and driving conditions.

• If a vehicle which moves into your lane is slower than your vehicle, your speed may decrease to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead.

• If a vehicle which moves into your lane is faster than your vehicle, your vehicle will accelerate to the selected speed.

OUM054044L

• Your vehicle may accelerate when a vehicle ahead of you disappears.

• When you are warned that the vehicle ahead of you is not detected, drive with caution.

5 77


Vehicle recognition

OUM054045L

Some vehicles ahead in your lane cannot be recognized by the sensor as follows:

- Narrow vehicles such as motorcycles or bicycles

- Vehicles offset to one side

- Slow-moving vehicles or suddendecelerating vehicles

- Stopped vehicles

- Vehicles with small rear profile such as trailers with no loads

A vehicle ahead cannot be recognized correctly by the sensor if any of following occurs: upwards due to overloading in the trunk

- While making turns by steering

- When driving to one side of the lane

- When driving on narrow lanes or on curves

Adjust your vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition.

OUM054046L

• When vehicles are at a standstill and the vehicle in front of you changes to the next lane, be careful when your vehicle starts to move because it may not recognize the stopped vehicle in front of you.

5 78


OUM054047L

• Always look out for pedestrians when your vehicle is maintaining a distance with the vehicle ahead.

OUM054048L

• Always be cautious for vehicles with higher height or vehicles carrying loads that sticks out to the back of the vehicle.

WARNING

- Safe Use of

ASCC

The ASCC can provide you with an additional level of safety and fatigue reduction. However you must maintain careful observation of the roadway in front of and around you and maintain control of your vehicle and spacing around other vehicles as you normally would. For example, this will require you to apply the brakes as needed when coming upon a slower moving vehicle, or when a vehicle from another lane cuts in front of you.

5 79


WARNING

- Inclines &

Towing

Do not use ASCC on steep inclines or when towing another vehicle or trailer since such extreme loading can interfere with your vehicle's ability to maintain the selected speed.

- After an engine start, please stop for several seconds. If system initialization is not completed, the

ASCC does not normally operate.

- After an engine start, if any objects are not detected or the sensor cover is obscured with foreign substances, there is a possibility that the ASCC system may not work.

- Below conditions may cause malfunction: over baggage loading in a trunk, suspension remodeling, tire replacement with unauthorized tires or tires with different worn-out and pressure levels.




Operation is subject to the following three conditions:



(3) Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device.

5 80


DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

DRIVE mode

The mode changes whenever the

DRIVE MODE button is pressed.

■

Type A

■

Type B

OUMA054036

OUMA054037

NORMAL

SPORT ECO

❈

When normal mode is selected, it is not displayed on the cluster.

ECO mode (Active ECO)

ECO

Active ECO helps improve fuel efficiency by controlling certain engine and transaxle system operating parameters. Fuel efficiency depends on the driver's driving habit and road condition.

• When the DRIVE MODE button is pressed and the ECO mode is selected, the ECO indicator

(green) will illuminate to show that the Active

ECO is operating.

• When the Active ECO is activated, it does not turn off even though the engine is restarted again. To turn off the system, press the

DRIVE MODE button again.

The drive mode may be selected according to the driver’s preference or road condition.

5 81


When Active ECO is activated:

• The acceleration may slightly be reduced even though you depress the accelerator fully.

• The air conditioner performance may be limited

• The shift pattern of the automatic transaxle may change.

• The engine noise may get louder.

The above situations are normal conditions when the Active Eco

System is activated to improve fuel efficiency.

Limitation of Active ECO operation:

If the following conditions occur while

Active ECO is operating, the system operation is limited even though there is no change in the ECO indicator.

• When the coolant temperature is low:

The system will be limited until engine performance becomes normal.

• When driving up a hill:

The system will be limited to gain power when driving uphill because the engine torque is restricted.

• When using manual mode:

The system will be limited according to the shift location.

• When the accelerator pedal is deeply depressed for a few seconds:

The system will be limited, judging that the driver wants to speed up.

SPORT mode

SPORT

SPORT mode focuses on dynamic driving by automatically adjusting the steering wheel, engine and transaxle system.

• When the DRIVE MODE button is pressed and the SPORT mode is selected, the SPORT indicator (yellow) will illuminate.

• When the SPORT mode is activated, and the engine start/stop button is turned off and on it will change to NORMAL mode. To turn on the

SPORT mode press

DRIVE MODE button again.

5 82

• If the system is activated:

- While holding vehicle speed, it maintains the gear and RPM for some time even though the accelerator pedal is not depressed.

- Up-shifting is delayed.

✽

NOTICE

In Sport drive mode, the fuel efficiency may decrease.


5 83


BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)

(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)

The warning range depends on your vehicle speed. However, if your vehicle is about 10 km/h (6 mph) faster than the other vehicle, the system will not warn you.

(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)

When a vehicle approaches you at high speed, the system will warn you.

(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

When your vehicle moves rearward, and the sensor detects an approaching vehicle in the left or right side, the system will warn you.

OUM054176L

The Blind Spot Detection System

(BSD) uses a radar sensor to alert the driver.

It senses the rear side territory of the vehicle and provides and indication to the driver.

WARNING

- BSD

Limitations

• The Blind Spot Detection

System (BSD) is a supplemental system. Do not solely rely on the system and always pay attention to drive safely.

• The Blind Spot Detection

System may not detect every object alongside the vehicle and is not a substitute for proper and safe lane changing procedures. Always drive safely and use caution when changing lanes.

5 84


BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /

LCA (Lane Change Assist)

Operating conditions

OUMA054027

The indicator on the switch will illuminate when the Blind Spot Detection

System (BSD) switch is pressed with the Engine Start/Stop Button ON.

If vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h

(18.6 mph), the system will activate.

If you press the switch again, the switch indicator and system will be turned off.

If the ignition switch is turned OFF and ON the system returns to the previous state.

When the system is not used turn the system off by turning off the switch.

When the system is turned on the warning light will illuminate for 3 seconds on the outside rearview mirror.

Warning type

The system will activate when:

1.The system is on.

2.Vehicle speed is above 30 km/h

(18.6 mph).

3.Other vehicles are detected in the rear side.

WARNING

The Blind Spot Detection

System with Lane Change

Assist and Rear Cross Traffic

Alert is not a substitute for proper and safe lane changing procedures. Always drive safely and use caution when changing lanes. The Blind Spot Detection

System may not detect every object alongside the vehicle.

5 85


1st stage 2nd stage

OUM054028

If a vehicle is detected within the boundary of the system, a warning light will illuminate on the outside rearview mirror.

If the detected vehicle is not in detecting range, the warning will turn off according to driving conditions.

OUM054029

The second stage alarm will activate when:

1.The first stage alert is on

2.The turn signal is on to change a lane

When the second stage alert is activated, a warning light will blink on the outside rearview mirror and an alarm will sound.

If you move the turn signal switch to the original position, the second stage alert will be deactivated.

- The second stage alarm may be deactivated.

• To activate the alarm:

Go to the User Settings Mode

→

Sound and select "BSD" on the

LCD display.

• To deactivate the alarm:

Go to the User Settings Mode

→

Sound and deselect "BSD" on the

LCD display.

✽

NOTICE

The alarm function helps alert the driver. Deactivate this function only when it is necessary.

5 86

Detecting sensor Warning message

■

Type A


OUMA057228

Remove the foreign substance on the rear bumper.

After the foreign substance is removed, if you drive for approximately 10 minutes, the system will work normally.

If the system does not work normally even though the foreign substance is removed, take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

OUM054030

The sensors are located inside of the rear bumper.

Always keep the rear bumper clean for the system to work properly.

■

Type B

OUMA057227

The message will appear to notify the driver if there are foreign substances on the rear bumper or it is hot near the rear bumper. The light on the switch and the system will turn off automatically.

5 87


RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

Operating conditions

OUM054178L

If the system does not work properly, a warning message will appear and the light on the switch will turn off.

The system will turn off automatically.

Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

OYP054026K

When your vehicle moves backwards from a parking position, the sensor detects approaching vehicles to the left or right side direction and gives information to the driver.

OUM054124L

• Select RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic

Alert) in "User Settings" under

"Driving Assist" on the instrument cluster. The system will turn on and standby to activate.

• Select RCTA again, to turn the system off.

• If the vehicle is turned off and on again, the RCTA system will return to the state right before the vehicle was turned off. Always turn the

RCTA system off when not in use.

5 88


• The system operates when the vehicle speed is below 10 km/h

(6.2 mph) with the shift lever in R

(Reverse).

• The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic

Alert) detecting range is 0.5m ~

20m based on the side direction. If the approaching vehicle speed is

4 km/h (2.5 mph) ~ 36 km/h (22 mph) within sensing range, it is detected. However, the system sensing range is different based on conditions. Always pay attention to your surroundings.

Warning type

OYP054027K

• If the vehicle detected by sensors approaches your vehicle, the warning chime will sound and the warning light will blink on the outside rearview mirror.

• If the detected vehicle is out of the sensing range of your vehicle, move the vehicle away from the detected object slowly; the warning will be cancelled.

• The system may not operate properly due to other factors or circumstances. Always pay attention to your surroundings.

❈

If your vehicle's left or right side bumper is blinded by barrier or vehicles, the system sensing ability may be deteriorated.

WARNING

The Blind Spot Detection

System with Lane Change

Assist and Rear Cross Traffic

Alert is not a substitute for proper and safe lane changing procedures. Always drive safely and use caution when changing lanes. The Blind Spot Detection

System may not detect every object alongside the vehicle.

5 89


✽

NOTICE

• The system may not work properly if the bumper has been replaced or if a repair work has been done near the sensor.

• The detection area differs according to the roads width. If the road is narrow the system may detect other vehicles in the next lane.

• On the contrary, if the road is very wide the system may not detect other vehicles.

• The system may turn off due to strong electromagnetic waves.

Non-operating condition

Driver's Attention

The driver must be cautious in the below situations for the system may not assist the driver and may not work properly.

- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.

- The sensor cover is obscured by rain, snow, mud, etc

- The rear bumper near the sensor is covered or hidden with a foreign matter such as a sticker, bumper guard, bicycle stand etc.

- The rear bumper is damaged or the sensor is out of place.

- The height of the vehicle has significantly changed such as when the trunk is loaded with heavy objects, abnormal tire pressure etc.

- Due to bad weather such as heavy rain or snow.

- A fixed object is near such as a guardrail, etc.

- A substantial amount of metallic objects such as a construction area.

- A large vehicle is nearby such as a bus or truck.

- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.

- A flat trailer is near.

- If the vehicle starts at the same time as the vehicle next to it and has accelerated.

- When the other vehicle passes by at a high rate of speed.

- When changing lanes.

- When going down or up a steep, uneven road.

- When the other vehicle drives at the rear very nearby or drives very close.

- When a trailer or carrier is installed.

5 90


- When the temperature of the rear bumper is very high or low.

- When parking structure covers the sensor.

- When reversing from a parking space with pillars or metal structures.

- When you are reversing and if the detected vehicle is simultaneously reversing.

- If there are small objects like shopping carts and baby carriages.

- If there is a vehicle with decreased ride height (lowered).

- When the vehicle is close to another vehicle.

- When driving through a narrow road with many plants.

- When driving on wet surface.

Outside rearview mirror may not alert the driver when:

- The outside rearview mirror housing is obscured by mud, snow, etc.

- The window is obscured by mud, snow, etc.

- The windows are overly tinted.







5 91


LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)

This system detects the lane with a sensor at the front windshield and notifies you if it detects that your vehicle leaves the lane.

OUM054032

OUM054149

OUMA054031

WARNING

- LDWS Alert

The LDWS is only intended to provide you with information regarding your vehicle's position on the roadway. Upon receiving an LDWS alert, you must take the necessary steps to maintain control of your vehicle. The LDWS does not provide any steering inputs into the vehicle for you. It can be dangerous to make a large sudden steering input in response to an alert, since that could result in loss of control.

• The LDWS does not make the vehicle change lanes. It is the driver's responsibility to always check the road conditions.

• If the sensor cannot detect the lane or if the vehicle speed does not exceed 64 km/h (40 mph), the

LDWS will not be able to notify you if the vehicle leaves the lane.

• If your vehicle has window tint or other types of coating on the front windshield, the LDWS may not work properly.

• Prevent damage to the LDWS sensor from water or any liquid.

• Do not remove the LDWS parts and avoid damaging the sensor by avoiding a strong impacts.

• Do not put objects that reflect light on the dash board.

• The operation of the LDWS can be affected by several factors (including environmental conditions). It is the responsibility of the driver to pay attention to the roadway and to maintain the vehicle in it's lane at all times.

5 92

■

When the sensor detects the lane line


■

Left lane departure warning

OUM054133L

To operate the LDWS, press the button with the engine start/stop button in the ON position. The indicator illuminates on the cluster. To cancel the

LDWS, press the button again.

OUM054126L

■

When the sensor doesn’t detect the lane line

■

Right lane departure warning

OUM054128L

OUM054127L

If the system detects that your vehicle is leaving the lane when the

LDWS is operating and vehicle speed exceeds 64 km/h (40 mph), the warning operates as follows:

OUM054129L

1.Visual warning

If you leave the lane, the lane you leave on the LCD display blinks yellow.

2.Auditory warning

If you leave the lane, the warning sound operates.

5 93


Warning indicator

Take your vehicle to an authorized

Kia dealer and have the system checked.

OUM054158L

The LDWS does not operate when:

• The driver turns on the turn signal or the hazard warning flasher to change lane.

• Driving on the lane line.

✽

NOTICE

To change lanes, operate the turn signal switch then change the lane.

OUM054133L

The color of symbol will change depend on the condition of LDWS system.

- White color : It means the sensor does not detect the lane line.

- Green color : It means the sensor detects the lane line.

OUM054132

When the LDWS is not working properly, the warning light will illuminate and the warning message will come on for a few second. After the message disappears, the master warning light will illuminate.

WARNING

- LDWS

Limitations

The Lane Departure Warning

System is a supplemental system. Do not solely rely on the system but always pay attention and drive safely.

5 94


The LDWS may not warn you even if the vehicle leaves the lane, or may warn you even if the vehicle does not leave the lane when;

• The lane is not visible due to snow, rain, stain, a puddle or other environmental conditions.

• The brightness of the outside changes suddenly such as tunnel enter/exit.

• The headlights are off at night or in a tunnel.

• The color of the lane marking from the road is difficult to distinguish.

• Driving on a steep grade or a curve.

• Light such as street light, sunlight or oncoming vehicle light reflects from water on the road.

• The lens or windshield is obscured by mud, snow, etc.

• The sensor cannot detect the lane because of fog, heavy rain or heavy snow.

• The inside rear view mirror housing overheats from being in direct sunlight.

• The lane is very wide or narrow.

• The lane line is damaged or indistinct.

• The windshield is fogged by humid air in the vehicle.

• The shadow is on the lane line by a median strip.

• The sensor cannot distinguish the lane from the road due to the dust/dirt.

• There is a mark similar to a lane line.

• There is a boundary structure.

• The distance from vehicle ahead is very short or the vehicle ahead drives hiding the lane line.

• The vehicle vibrates heavily due to road conditions.

• The lane number increases or decreases or the lane lines are crossing.

• Putting something on the dashboard.

• Driving with the sun in front of you.

• Driving in areas under construction.

• The lane line is more than two in either side (Left/Right)







5 95


ECONOMICAL OPERATION

Your vehicle's fuel economy depends mainly on your style of driving, where you drive and when you drive.

Each of these factors affects how many miles (kilometers) you can get from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle as economically as possible, use the following driving suggestions to help save money in both fuel and repairs:

• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate rate. Don't make "jackrabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to adjust your speed to the traffic so you don't have to change speeds unnecessarily.

Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking.

This also reduces brake wear.

• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster you drive, the more fuel your vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate speed, especially on the highway, is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This can increase fuel consumption and also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat, which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences.

• Take care of your tires. Keep them inflated to the recommended pressure. Incorrect inflation, either too much or too little, results in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire pressures at least once a month.

• Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption.

• Keep your vehicle in good condition. For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs, maintain your vehicle in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7. If you drive your vehicle in severe conditions, more frequent maintenance is required (see section 7 for details).

• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum service, your vehicle should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials. It is especially important that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the vehicle. This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion.

• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces fuel economy.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than necessary. If you are waiting

(and not in traffic), turn off your engine and restart only when you're ready to go.

5 96


• Remember, your vehicle does not require extended warm-up. After the engine has started, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear.

In very cold weather, however, give your engine a slightly longer warmup period.

• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.

Lugging is driving too slowly in a very high gear resulting in engine bucking. If this happens, shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit.

This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended speed.

• Use your air conditioning sparingly.

The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.

• Open windows at high speeds can reduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds and headwinds. To help offset some of this loss, slow down when driving in these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating condition is important both for economy and safety. Therefore, have an authorized Kia dealer perform scheduled inspections and maintenance.

WARNING

- Engine off during motion

Never turn the engine off to coast down hills or anytime the vehicle is in motion. The power steering and power brakes will not function properly without the engine running. In addition, turning off the ignition while driving could engage the steering wheel lock resulting in loss of vehicle steering. Keep the engine on and downshift to an appropriate gear for engine braking effect.

5 97


SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving conditions are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow these suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and allow extra distance for braking.

• Avoid sudden braking or steering.

• When braking with non-ABS brakes pump the brake pedal with a light up-and-down motion until the vehicle is stopped.

Do not pump the brake pedal on a vehicle equipped with ABS.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, or other nonslip material under the drive wheels to provide traction when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.

WARNING

- Downshifting

Do not downshift with an automatic transaxle while driving on slippery surfaces. The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid and result in an accident.

Reducing the risk of a rollover

This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Sports Utility

Vehicle (SUV). SUV’s have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, which allows you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger vehicles, any more than low-slung sports vehicles are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Due to this risk, driver and passengers are strongly recommended to buckle their seat belts.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. There are steps that a driver can make to reduce the risk of a rollover.

5 98


If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, do not load your roof rack with heavy cargo, and never modify your vehicle in any way.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and any forward gear in vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle. Do not race the engine, and spin the wheels as little as possible. If you are still stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating and possible damage to the transaxle.

CAUTION

- Vehicle rocking

Prolonged rocking may cause engine overheating, transaxle damage or failure, and tire damage.

CAUTION

- Spinning tires

Do not spin the wheels, especially at speeds more than 56 km/h (35 mph). Spinning the wheels at high speeds when the vehicle is stationary could cause a tire to overheat which could result in tire damage that may injure bystanders.

WARNING

- Sudden

Vehicle Movement

Do not attempt to rock the vehicle if people or objects are nearby. The vehicle may suddenly move forward or backwards as it becomes unstuck.

The ESC system should be turned

OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.

5 99


Smooth cornering

OUM054141L

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration. If you follow these suggestions, tire wear will be held to a minimum.

Driving at night

OUM054140

Because night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight, here are some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's headlights.

• Keep your headlights clean and properly aimed. (On vehicles not equipped with the automatic headlight aiming feature.) Dirty or improperly aimed headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlights of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.

5 100


Driving in the rain

OUM054139L

Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous, especially if you’re not prepared for the slick pavement.

Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain:

• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to see and will increase the distance needed to stop your vehicle, so slow down.

• Keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condition, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident. Be sure your tires are in good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it easier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.

• If you believe you may have gotten your brakes wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking operation returns.

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly.

Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be affected.

After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving slowly.

5 101


Driving off-road

Drive carefully off-road because your vehicle may be damaged by rocks or roots of trees. Become familiar with the off-road conditions where you are going to drive before you begin driving.

Highway driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specification. Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and possible failure of the tires.

Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may result in reduced traction or tire failure.

Never exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure shown on the tires.

WARNING

- Under/over inflated tires

Always check the tires for proper inflation before driving.

Underinflated or overinflated tires can cause poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death.

For proper tire pressures, refer to

“Tires and wheels” in section 8.

WARNING

- Tire tread

Always check the tire tread before driving your vehicle.

Worn-out tires can result in loss of vehicle control. Worn-out tires should be replaced as soon as possible. For further information and tread limits, refer to "Tires and wheels" in section 7.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil

High speed travel consumes more fuel than urban motoring. Do not forget to check both the engine coolant and engine oil.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may result in overheating of the engine.

5 102


WINTER DRIVING

Severe weather conditions in the winter result in greater wear and other problems. To minimize the problems of winter driving, you should follow these suggestions:

Snowy or icy conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires on your tires. If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and type of the original equipment tires. Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Furthermore, speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in operation in front of your vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently.

Snow tires

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your vehicle’s handling in all weather conditions.

Keep in mind that the traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. You should drive cautiously even when the roads are clear. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

5 103


Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary

In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold weather. See section 8 for recommendations. If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use, consult an authorized

Kia dealer.

Check spark plugs and ignition system

Inspect your spark plugs as described in section 7 and replace them if necessary. Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in any way.

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in section 7. The level of charge in your battery can be checked by an authorized Kia dealer or a service station.

Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing, add an approved window washer anti-freeze solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from an authorized Kia dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the paint finish.

5 104

Don’t let your parking brake freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the gear shift lever in P

(Park, automatic transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the vehicle to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering components are not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables, window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.


5 105


TRAILER TOWING

If you are considering towing with your vehicle, you should first check with your country's Department of

Motor Vehicles to determine their legal requirements.

Since laws vary the requirements for towing trailers, cars, or other types of vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask an authorized Kia dealer for further details before towing.

WARNING

- Weight limits

Before towing, make sure the total trailer weight, GCW (gross combination weight), GVW

(gross vehicle weight), GAW

(gross axle weight) and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.

Remember that trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself.

Trailering means changes in handling, durability, and fuel economy.

Successful, safe trailering requires correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.

WARNING

- Towing a trailer

Always check your towing equipment to confirm correct equipment size and installation before use. Using incompatible or incorrectly installed trailer equipment can effect the vehicle operation and endanger you and your passengers.

CAUTION

- Trailer installation

Follow instructions in this section when pulling a trailer.

Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty.

You may require an additional wiring harness connector to install a trailer hitch. Please contact an authorized

Kia dealer for more details.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer.* To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in

“Weight of the trailer” that appears later in this section.

This section contains many timetested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. Please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and tires are forced to work harder against the load of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads. This additional burden generates extra heat.

The trailer also adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.

5 106


Hitches

It's important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch.

If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and water.

• The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper.

• Kia trailer hitch accessory is available at an authorized Kia dealer.

Safety chains

You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.

Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.

Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your trailer. And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to your local regulations and that it is properly installed and operating correctly.

If your trailer weight exceeds the maximum allowed weight without trailer brakes, then the trailer will also require its own brakes as well. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.

• Don’t tap into or modify your vehicle's brake system.

WARNING

- Trailer brakes

Do not use a trailer with its own brakes unless you are absolutely certain that you have properly set up the brake system. This is not a task for amateurs. Use an experienced, competent trailer shop for this work.

5 107


Driving with a trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you must get to know your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.

And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly so responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform, safety chains, electrical connector(s), lights, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lights and any trailer brakes are still working.

Following distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.

This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.

Backing up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move your hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

Passing

You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because of the increased vehicle length, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. Due to the added load to the engine when going uphill the vehicle may also take longer to pass than it would on flat ground.

Making turns

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects near the edge of the road. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance before turning or lane changes.

5 108


Turn signals when towing a trailer

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have a different turn signal flasher and extra wiring. The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly connected, the trailer lights will also flash to alert other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes, or stop.

When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signals when, in fact, they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. You must also check the lights every time you disconnect and then reconnect the wires.

Do not connect a trailer lighting system directly to your vehicle’s lighting system. Use only an approved trailer wiring harness.

An authorized Kia dealer can assist you in installing the wiring harness.

CAUTION

Always use an approved trailer wiring harness. Failure to use an approved trailer wiring harness could result in damage to the vehicle electrical system.

Driving on grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer operate efficiently.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.

If your trailer weighs more than the maximum trailer weight without trailer brakes and you have an automatic transaxle, you should drive in D

(Drive) when towing a trailer.

Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when towing a trailer will minimize heat build up and extend the life of your transaxle.

5 109


Towing up hill

• When towing a trailer on steep grades (in excess of 6%) pay close attention to the engine coolant temperature gauge to ensure the engine does not overheat.

If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves across the dial towards “H” (HOT), pull over and stop as soon as it is safe to do so, and allow the engine to idle until it cools down. You may proceed once the engine has cooled sufficiently.

• You must decide driving speed depending on trailer weight and uphill grade to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.

Parking on hills

Generally, if you have a trailer attached to your vehicle, you should not park your vehicle on a hill. People can be seriously or fatally injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged if they unexpectedly roll downhill.

However, if you ever have to park your trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:

1.Pull the vehicle into the parking space. Turn the steering wheel in the direction of the curb (right if headed downhill, left if headed up hill).

2.If the vehicle has an automatic transaxle, place the vehicle in P

(Park).

3.Set the parking brake and shut off the engine.

4.Place chocks under the trailer wheels on the down hill side of the wheels.

5.Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shift to neutral, release the parking brake and slowly release the brakes until the trailer chocks absorb the load.

6.Reapply the brakes, reapply the parking brake and shift the vehicle to P (Park) for automatic transaxle.

7.Shut off the vehicle and release the vehicle brakes but leave the parking brake set.

5 110


When you are ready to leave after parking on a hill

1. With the automatic transaxle in P

(Park), apply your brakes and hold the brake pedal down while you:

• Start your engine;

• Shift into gear; and

• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

Maintenance when trailer towing

Your vehicle will need service more often when you regularly pull a trailer. Important items to pay particular attention to include engine oil, automatic transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling system fluid. Brake condition is another important item to frequently check. Each item is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip.

Don’t forget to also maintain your trailer and hitch. Follow the maintenance schedule that accompanied your trailer and check it periodically.

Preferably, conduct the check at the start of each day’s driving. Most importantly, all hitch nuts and bolts should be tight.

CAUTION

- Air condition

Do not use the A/C while using your vehicle to tow uphill. Due to higher load during trailer usage, overheating might occur on hot days or during uphill driving.

• When towing check transaxle fluid more frequently.

5 111


If you do decide to pull a trailer

Here are some important points if you decide to pull a trailer:

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway control.

• Do not do any towing with your vehicle during its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) in order to allow the engine to properly break in. Failure to heed this caution may result in serious engine or transaxle damage.

• When towing a trailer, be sure to consult an authorized Kia dealer for further information on additional requirements such as a towing kit, etc.

• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than 100 km/h (60 mph)).

• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed 70 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing speed limit, whichever is lower.

• The chart contains important considerations that have to do with weight:

Maximum trailer weight

Item

Without brake

System

With brake

System

With trailer package

Maximum tongue weight

Theta II 2.0

750 (1,650)

907 (2,000)

1,587 (3,500)

159 (350)

Theta II 2.4

750 (1,650)

907 (2,000)

-

127 (280)

[kg (lbs.)]

Lambda II 3.3

750 (1,650)

907 (2,000)

2,267 (5,000)

226 (500)

To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section.

5 112


Weight of the trailer Weight of the trailer tongue

The trailer tongue should weigh a maximum of 10% of the total loaded trailer weight, within the limits of the maximum permissible trailer tongue load. After you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to correct them simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight

C190E01JM

What is the maximum safe weight of a trailer? It should never weigh more than the maximum trailer weight with trailer brakes. But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important.

The ideal trailer weight can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle Weight

C190E02JM

The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehicle. This weight includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will also be carrying that weight.

WARNING

- Trailer

Always follow the loading instructions provided with your trailer.

Improper loading can effect vehicle operation and result in an accident.

5 113


VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

Tire and loading information label

OUMA054204/OUMA054205/OUMA054206/OUMA054207/OUMA054208/OUMA054209

The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

5 114


Vehicle capacity weight:

5 persons : 420kg (930 lbs.)

7 persons : 506kg (1,120 lbs.)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer, the combined weight includes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:

Total - 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons,

Rear seat : 3 persons)

- 7 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons,

Rear seat : 5 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum number of occupants including a driver, your vehicle may carry.

However, the seating capacity may be reduced based upon the weight of all of the occupants, and the weight of the cargo being carried or towed.

Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity:

* 2.0L Engine

Without trailer brakes

: 750 kg (1,650 lbs)

With trailer brakes

: 907 kg (2,000 lbs)


: 1,587 kg (3,500 lbs)

* 2.4L Engine


: 750 kg (1,650 lbs)

With trailer brakes

: 907 kg (2,000 lbs)


: N/A

* 3.3L Engine


: 750 kg (1,650 lbs)

With trailer brakes

: 907 kg (2,000 lbs)


: 2,267 kg (5,000 lbs)

5 115


Towing capacity is the maximum trailer weight including its cargo weight, your vehicle can tow.

Cargo capacity:

The cargo capacity of your vehicle will increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants and the tongue load, if your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.

Steps for determining correct load limit

1.Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's placard.

2.Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3.Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4.The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 635 kg

(1400 lbs.) and there will be five 68 kg (150 lbs.) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is

295 kg (650 lbs).

(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or

1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5.Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6.If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

5 116

Example 3


Example 1 Example 2

A B C A B C A B C

C190F01JM C190F02JM C190F03JM

Item

A

B

C

Description Total

Vehicle Capacity 635 kg

Weight

Subtract Occupant

(1400 lbs)

Weight

68 kg (150 lbs) × 2

136 kg

(300 lbs)

Available Cargo and 499 kg

Luggage weight (1100 lbs)

Item

A

B

C

Description Total


Weight

Subtract Occupant

(1400 lbs)

Weight

68 kg (150 lbs) × 5

340 kg

(750 lbs)



Item

A

B

C

Description Total


Weight

Subtract Occupant

(1400 lbs)

Weight

78 kg (172 lbs) × 5

390 kg

(860 lbs)



Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight.

5 117


Certification label

The certification label is located on the driver's door sill at the center pillar.

This label shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

This label also tells you the maximum weight that can be supported by the front and rear axles, called

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle.Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.

WARNING

- Over loading

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, the GAWR for either the front or rear axle and vehicle capacity weight.

Exceeding these ratings can affect your vehicle’s handling and braking ability.

The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle

- like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else - they are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items will keep going and can cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.

5 118

WARNING

- Over loading

Do not overload your vehicle.

Overloading your vehicle can cause heat buildup in your vehicle's tires and possible tire failure, increased stopping distances and poor vehicle handling all of which may result in a crash.

✽

NOTICE

Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

WARNING

- Loose cargo

Do not travel with unsecured blunt objects in the passenger compartment of your vehicle

(e.g. suit cases or unsecured child seats). These items may strike occupant during a sudden stop or crash.


5 119


VEHICLE WEIGHT GLOSSARY

This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer.

Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of the vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle's specifications and the certification label:

Cargo weight

This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight)

This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) - including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR

(Gross axle weight rating)

Base curb weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the certification label.

The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

Vehicle curb weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.

GVWR

(Gross vehicle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle

(including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the driver’s door sill.

5 120

What to do in an emergency

Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3

• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3

• If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

• If the engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

• If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4

• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

6

What to do in an emergency

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher

■

Type A

■

Type B

It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.

Depress the flasher switch with the ignition switch in any position. The flasher switch is located in the center facia panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.

OUM064001

• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when using the hazard warning flasher while the vehicle is being towed.

OUM064020L

The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

6 2


IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing, set the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe place.

If you have a flat tire while driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle slow down while driving straight ahead.

Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause a loss of control.

When the vehicle has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on a firm level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.

2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn on your emergency hazard flashers, set the parking brake and put the transaxle in P (Park, automatic transaxle).

3.Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the side of the vehicle that is away from traffic.

4.When changing a flat tire, follow the instruction provided later in this section.

If the engine stalls while driving

1.Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.

2.Turn on your emergency flashers.

3.Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle will not start, contact an authorized Kia dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

✽

NOTICE

If there was a check engine light and loss of power or stall and if safe to do so, wait at least 10 seconds to restart the vehicle after it stalls. This may reset the car so it will no longer run at low power condition.

6 3


IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly

1.If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the emergency brake is set.

2.Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.

3.Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is discharged.

4.Check the starter connections to be sure they are securely tightened.

5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See instructions for "Jump starting".

WARNING

- Push/ pull start

Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. Push or pull starting may cause the catalytic converter to overload and create a fire hazard.

If engine turns over normally but does not start

1.Check the fuel level.

2.With the ignition switch in the

LOCK position, check all connectors at the ignition coils and spark plugs. Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose.

3.Check the fuel line in the engine compartment.

4.If the engine still does not start, call an authorized Kia dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

6 4


EMERGENCY STARTING

Jumper Cables

Booster battery

Discharged battery

1VQA4001

Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery, follow these jump starting procedures. If in doubt, we strongly recommend that you have a competent technician or towing service jump start your vehicle.

CAUTION

- Push/pull start to 12 Volt Battery

Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You can damage a 12-volt starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts beyond repair by use of a 24volt power supply (either two

12-volt batteries in series or a

24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING

- Battery

Never attempt to check the electrolyte level of the battery as this may cause the battery to rupture or explode.

WARNING

- Frozen batteries

Do not attempt to jump start the vehicle if the discharged battery is frozen or if the electrolyte level is low as the battery may rupture or explode.

WARNING

- Battery

Keep all flames or sparks away from the battery. The battery produces hydrogen gas which will explode if exposed to flame or sparks.

WARNING

- Sulfuric acid risk

When jump starting your vehicle be careful not to get acid on yourself, your clothing or on the vehicle. Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highly corrosive.

6 5


Jump starting procedure

1.Make sure the booster battery is

12-volt and that its negative terminal is grounded.

2.If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to come in contact.

3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical loads.

4.Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery (1), then connect the other end to the positive terminal of the booster battery (2).

Proceed to connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery (3), then the other end to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for example, the engine lifting bracket) away from the battery (4). Do not connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.

WARNING

- Battery cables

Do not connect the jumper cable from the negative terminal of the booster battery to the negative terminal of the discharged battery. This can cause the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing battery acid.

5.Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and let it run at

2,000 rpm, then start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, you should have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

Push-starting

Vehicles equipped with automatic transaxle lock system cannot be push-started.

Follow the directions in this section for jump-starting.

WARNING

- Tow starting vehicle

Never tow a vehicle to start it because the sudden surge forward when the engine starts could cause a collision with the tow vehicle.

6 6


IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine will probably be too hot. If this happens, you should:

4.Check to see if the water pump drive belt is missing. If it is not missing, check to see that it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop).

1.Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

2.Place the shift lever in P (Park, automatic transaxle) and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.

3.If engine coolant is running out under the vehicle or steam is coming out from underneath the hood, stop the engine. Do not open the hood until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.

WARNING

- Under the hood

While the engine is running, keep hair, hands and clothing away from moving parts such as the fan and drive belts to prevent injury.

5.If the water pump drive belt is broken or engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engine immediately and call the nearest authorized Kia dealer for assistance.

WARNING

- Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. This may result in coolant being blown out of the opening and cause serious burns.

6.If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, call an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.

Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by an authorized Kia dealer.

6 7


IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

Jack and tools

OUM064003

The jack and wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment.

Remove the panel indicated in the illustration.

(1) Jack handle

(2) Jack

(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

(4) Socket

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergency tire changing only.

To prevent the jack from “rattling” while the vehicle is in motion, store it properly.

Follow jacking instructions to reduce the possibility of personal injury.

WARNING

- Tire Jack

Do not place any portion of your body under a vehicle that is only supported by a jack since the vehicle can easily roll off the jack.

Use vehicle support stands.

• Always move the vehicle completely off the road and onto the shoulder before trying to change a tire.

The jack should be used on a firm level ground. If you cannot find a firm, level place off the road, call a towing service company for assistance.

• Be sure to use the correct front and rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never use the bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

• Do not allow anyone to remain in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

• Make sure any children present are in a secure place away from the road and from the vehicle to be raised with the jack.

WARNING

- Changing tires

Never attempt vehicle repairs in the traffic lanes of a public road or highway.

6 8


WARNING

- Running vehicle on jack

Do not start or run the engine of the vehicle while the vehicle is on the jack as this may cause the vehicle to fall off the jack.

Removing and storing the spare tire

OUM064004

Your spare tire is stored underneath your vehicle, directly below the cargo area.

To remove the spare tire:

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Find the spare tire fixing bolt cover and remove the cover (1).

If necessary, separate the tool case only after removing the clamp (2).

OUM064005

3. Connect the socket and wheel lug nut wrench.

4. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to loosen the bolt enough to lower the spare tire.

Turn the wrench counterclockwise until the spare tire reaches the ground.

6 9


OUM064006

5. After the spare tire reaches the ground, continue to turn the wrench counterclockwise, and draw the spare tire outside. Never rotate the wrench excessively, otherwise the spare tire carrier may be damaged.

6. Remove the retainer (1) from the center of the spare tire.

OUM064007

To store the spare tire:

1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up.

2. Place the wheel under the vehicle and install the retainer (1) through the wheel center.

3. Turn the wrench clockwise until it clicks.

WARNING

Ensure the spare tire retainer is properly aligned with the center of the spare tire to prevent the spare tire from “rattling”.

Otherwise, it may cause the spare tire to fall off the carrier and lead to an accident.

6 10

Changing tires

OUMA064034

1. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P

(Park) with automatic transaxle.

3. Activate the hazard warning flashers.

OUMA064035

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack and spare tire from the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite from the jack position.


• To prevent vehicle movement while changing a tire, always set the parking brake fully, and always block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed.

• We recommend that the wheels of the vehicle be blocked, and that no person remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.

6 11


OUM064008

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do not remove any nut until the tire has been raised off the ground.

OUM064021

OUM064009

7. Place the jack at the front (1) or rear (2) jacking position closest to the tire you are changing. Place the jack at the designated locations under the frame. The jacking positions are plates welded to the frame with two tabs and a raised dot to index with the jack.

OUM064010

8. Insert the wheel lug nut wrench into the jack and turn it clockwise, raising the vehicle until the tire just clears the ground. This measurement is approximately 30 mm (1 in.).

Before removing the wheel lug nuts, make sure the vehicle is stable and that there is no chance for movement or slippage.

6 12


9. Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers.

Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare tire, line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can slide over the other studs.

Wheels may have sharp edges.

Handle them carefully to avoid possible severe injury. Before putting the wheel into place, be sure that there is nothing on the hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that prevents the wheel from fitting solidly against the hub.

WARNING

- Installing a wheel

Make sure the wheel makes good contact with the hub when installed. If the contact of the mounting surface between the wheel and hub is not good, the wheel nuts could come loose and cause the loss of a wheel.

Loss of a wheel may result in loss of control of the vehicle.

10. To install the wheel, hold it on the studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is completely seated, then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fingers again.

11. Insert the wrench into the jack and lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise.

6 13


OUM064011

Then position the wrench as shown in the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. Do not stand on the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench handle. Go around the wheel tightening every nut following the numerical sequence shown in the image until they are all tight. Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing wheels, have an authorized Kia dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible.

If you have a tire gauge, remove the valve cap and check the air pressure.

If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced, dust and dirt may get into the tire valve and air may leak from the tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible.

After you have changed the wheels, always secure the flat tire in its place and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.

CAUTION

- Reusing lug nuts

Make certain during wheel removal that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled or, if replaced, that nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used.

Your vehicle has metric threads on the wheel studs and nuts.

Installation of a non-metric thread nut on a metric stud will not secure the wheel to the hub properly and will damage the stud so that it must be replaced.

Note that most lug nuts do not have metric threads. Be sure to use extreme care in checking for thread style before installing aftermarket lug nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

11~13 kgf·m (65~79 lbf·ft)

6 14


WARNING

- Wheel studs

If the studs are damaged, they may lose their ability to retain the wheel. This could lead to the loss of the wheel and a collision resulting in serious injuries.

To prevent the jack, wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire from rattling while the vehicle is in motion, store them properly.

Check the inflation pressures as soon as possible after installing the spare tire. Adjust it to the specified pressure, if necessary. Refer to

“Tires and wheels” in section 8.

Important - use of compact spare tire

Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire. This compact spare tire takes up less space than a regular-size tire. This tire is smaller than a conventional tire and is designed for temporary use only.

• You should drive carefully when the compact spare is in use. The compact spare should be replaced by the proper conventional tire and rim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicle is not recommended with more than one compact spare tire in use at the same time.

WARNING

The compact spare tire is for emergency use only. Do not operate your vehicle on this compact spare at speeds over

80 km/h (50 mph). The original tire should be repaired or replaced as soon as possible to avoid failure of the spare possibly leading to personal injury or death.

The compact spare should be inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).

✽

NOTICE

Check the inflation pressure after installing the spare tire. Adjust it to the specified pressure, as necessary.

6 15


When using a compact spare tire, observe the following precautions:

• Under no circumstances should you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a higher speed could damage the tire.

• Ensure that you drive slowly enough for the road conditions to avoid all hazards. Any road hazard, such as a pothole or debris, could seriously damage the compact spare.

• Any continuous road use of this tire could result in tire failure, loss of vehicle control, and possible personal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maximum load rating or the load-carrying capacity shown on the sidewall of the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. The compact spare tire diameter is smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and reduces the ground clearance approximately

25 mm (1 inch), which could result in damage to the vehicle.

• Do not take this vehicle through an automatic vehicle wash while the compact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use the compact spare tire on any other vehicle because this tire has been designed especially for your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread life is shorter than a regular tire.

Inspect your compact spare tire regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel.

• The compact spare tire should not be used on any other wheels, nor should standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact spare wheel. If such use is attempted, damage to these items or other vehicle components may occur.

• Do not use more than one compact spare tire at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the compact spare tire is installed.

6 16


Jack label

■

Example

• Type A

• Type B

• Type C

OHYK064001

OHYK064005

1. Model Name

2. Maximum allowable load

3. When using the jack, set your parking brake.

4. When using the jack, stop the engine.

5. Do not get under a vehicle that is supported by a jack.

6. The designated locations under the frame

7. When supporting the vehicle, the base plate of jack must be vertical under the lifting point.

8. Move the shift lever to the P position on vehicles with automatic transmission.

9. The jack should be used on firm level ground.

10. Jack manufacturer

11. Production date

12. Representative company and address

OHYK064002

❈

The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

6 17


TOWING

Towing service

For trailer towing guidelines information, refer to “Trailer towing” in section 5.

On AWD vehicles, your vehicle must be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground.

dolly

CAUTION

The AWD vehicle should never be towed with the wheels on the ground. This can cause serious damage to the transaxle or the

AWD system.

dolly

OUM064022

If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.

On FWD vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.

6 18

WARNING

- Side and curtain Air bag

If your vehicle is equipped with side and curtain air bag, set the ignition switch to LOCK or ACC position when the vehicle is being towed.

The side and curtain air bag may deploy when the ignition is

ON, and the rollover sensor detects the situation as a rollover.

OUM064013

When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies :

1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC position.

2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

CAUTION

- Towing gear position

Failure to place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the transaxle.

OUM064012

CAUTION

- Towing

• Do not tow the vehicle backwards with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.


6 19

Maintenance

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-29

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

• Recharging battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-52

• Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54

• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55

• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56

• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

• All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

• Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

• Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

• Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

• Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65

7

7

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66

• Inner panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

• Engine compartment fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 7-69

• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71

Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82

• Front lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83

• Side repeater lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87

• Rear combination lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-88

• High mounted stop lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90

• License plate light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91

• Interior light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92

Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93

• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93

• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-101

• Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-101

• Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:

Onboard refueling vapor recovery) system . . . . . 7-101

• Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.4L) - GDI

❈

The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Maintenance

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Positive battery terminal

7. Negative battery terminal

8. Radiator cap

9. Engine oil dipstick

10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

OUM074100L

7 3

Maintenance

Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.0L) – T-GDI

7 4

❈





4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box




9. Radiator cap


OUM074115L

Maintenance

Gasoline engine (Lambda II 3.3L) – GDI

❈





4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box





10. Radiator cap

OUMA074001

7 5

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.

Should you have any doubts concerning the inspection or servicing of your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have an authorized

Kia dealer perform this work.

An authorized Kia dealer has factory trained technicians and genuine Kia parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see an authorized Kia dealer.

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury.

Owner’s responsibility

✽

NOTICE

Maintenance Service and Record

Retention are the owner's responsibility.

You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is provided in your Warranty & Consumer

Information manual.

Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered.

We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer. An authorized

Kia dealer meets Kia’s high service quality standards and receives technical support from Kia in order to provide you with a high level of service satisfaction.

7 6

Owner maintenance precautions

Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform.

As explained earlier in this section, several procedures can be done only by an authorized Kia dealer with special tools.

✽

NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Warranty & Consumer

Information manual provided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an authorized

Kia dealer.

WARNING

- Maintenance work

Do not wear jewelry or loose clothing while working under the hood of your vehicle with the engine running. These can become entangled in moving parts, if you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling fans.

Maintenance

7 7

Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE

The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized Kia dealer at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehicle.

Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance Checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labor, parts and lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir.

• Check the windshield washer fluid level.

• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

WARNING -

Hot coolant

Be careful when checking your engine coolant level when the engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure.

While operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straightahead position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or “pulls” to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transaxle occurs, check the transaxle fluid level.

• Check the automatic transaxle P

(Park) function.

• Check the parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).

7 8

At least monthly:

• Check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare.

At least twice a year

(i.e., every Spring and Fall):

• Check the radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.

• Check the windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean the wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.

• Check the headlight alignment.

• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes, shields and clamps.

• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear and function.

• Check for worn tires and loose wheel lug nuts.

At least once a year:

• Clean the body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate the door hinges and checks, and hood hinges.

• Lubricate the door and hood locks and latches.

• Lubricate the door rubber weatherstrips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Inspect and lubricate the automatic transaxle linkage and controls.

• Clean the battery and terminals.

• Check the brake fluid level.

Maintenance

7 9

Maintenance

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow the Normal Maintenance

Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, follow the

Maintenance Under Severe Usage

Conditions.

• Repeated driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing temperature

• Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads

• Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

• Driving in heavy dust condition

• Driving in heavy traffic area

• Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road repeatedly

• Towing a trailer or using a camper, or roof rack

• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use of vehicle towing

• Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)

• Frequently driving in stop-and-go condition

If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal

Maintenance Schedule. After 120 months or 240,000km (150,000 miles) continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.

7 10

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.

Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

* 1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

* 2 : Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality.

* 3 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.

* 4 : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.

* 5 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

* 6 : Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 10,000km

(6,500miles) or 6 months

7 11

Maintenance


12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 6 months

❑

Rotate tire

❑

Inspect battery condition

❑

Inspect air cleaner filter

❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑

Replace engine oil and filter * 6

(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)

❑

Add fuel additive * 1


❈

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.




❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑

Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑

Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑

Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑

Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑

Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)

❑

Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑

Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

❑

Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑

Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

❑

Replace engine oil and filter *

6


❑

Add fuel additive *

1


❈




7 12



❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑



❑



❈




Maintenance

7 13

Maintenance



❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑

Inspect brake fluid

❑

Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑

Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) * 2

❑

Inspect parking brake

❑

Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank

❑



(Continued)

(Continued)

❑

Replace air cleaner filter

❑



❑



❈




7 14

Maintenance



❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑

Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) * 3

❑

Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) * 3

❑



❑



❈





❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑



❑

Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)- 2.0T-GDI

❑

Replace engine oil and filter *

6


❑

Add fuel additive *

1


❈




7 15

Maintenance



❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑



❑



❈




7 16

Maintenance



❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑

Inspect brake fluid

❑


❑


❑


❑


❑

Inspect valve clearance * 4

(Continued)

(Continued)

❑

Inspect drive belts

(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months) * 5

❑



❑


❑



❑



❑

Replace coolant

(First, 100,000 km (60,000 miles) or 60 months after every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months)

❈




7 17

Maintenance



❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑



❑



❈


*

6

: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 10,000km



❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑


❑


(Continued)

(Continued)

❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑

Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *

❑

Inspect drive belts

3

(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)* 5

❑



❑



❑



❈




7 18

Maintenance



❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑



❑



❈





❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑

Inspect brake fluid

❑


❑


❑


❑


❑

Inspect drive belts


(Continued)

7 19

Maintenance


(Continued)

❑



❑


❑

Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)- 2.0T-GDI

❑



❑

Replace coolant


❑



❈





❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑



❑

Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - 2.4/3.3GDI

❑



❈




7 20

Maintenance



❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑

Inspect drive belts


❑



❑



❑



❈





❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑

Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *

3

❑


❑



❑

Add fuel additive *

1


❈




7 21

Maintenance



❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑

Inspect brake fluid

❑


❑


❑


❑


❑

Inspect valve clearance * 4

❑

Inspect drive belts


(Continued)

(Continued)

❑



❑


❑



❑

Replace coolant


❑

Add fuel additive *

1


❈




7 22



❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑



❑



❈


*

6



Maintenance

7 23

Maintenance



❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑

Inspect drive belts


❑



❑

Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - 2.0 T-GDI

❑



(Continued)

(Continued)

❑



❈




7 24

Maintenance



❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑



❑



❈





❑

Rotate tire

❑


❑

Inspect vacuum hose

❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑

Inspect brake fluid

❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


(Continued)

7 25

Maintenance


(Continued)

❑

Inspect drive belts


❑



❑


❑



❑

Replace coolant


❑



❈


* 6



No check, No service required

❑

Automatic transaxle fluid

7 26

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEM

MAINTENANCE

OPERATION

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

DRIVING

CONDITION

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER

2.4L/3.3L

2.0L

R

R

R

EVERY 6,000 KM (3,750 MILES)

OR 6 MONTHS


OR 3 MONTHS

MORE FREQUENTLY

A, B, C, D, E, F, G,

H, I, J, K

C, E

SPARK PLUGS

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS, CALIPERS

REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS

PARKING BRAKE

I

I

I

R

R

MORE FREQUENTLY


MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

A, B, H, I, K

A, C, E, F, G, I

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

7 27

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE ITEM

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE &

BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER

ARM BALL JOINT

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

MAINTENANCE

OPERATION

I

I

TRANSFER CASE OIL (AWD) R

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

MORE FREQUENTLY


OR 6 MONTHS

EVERY 120,000 KM (75,000 MILES)

DRIVING

CONDITION

C, D, E, F, G, H, I

C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

C, D, E, G, H, I, J

REAR AXLE OIL (AWD)

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

PROPELLER SHAFT

R

R

I

EVERY 120,000 KM (75,000 MILES)

MORE FREQUENTLY


OR 6 MONTHS

C, D, E, G, H, I, J

C, E

C, E

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing temperature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

C- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or saltspread roads

D- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

E - Driving in heavy dust condition

F - Driving in heavy traffic area

G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road

H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack

I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing

J - Driving over 170 km/h (106 mph)

K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

7 28

Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter Fuel filter (for gasoline)

The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary.

Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary.

Kia gasoline vehicle is equipped a lifetime fuel filter that integrated with the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed but depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, fuel filter inspection or replace is needed.

The fuel filter be Inspected or replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Have an authorized Kia dealer replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately.

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

7 29

Maintenance

Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses (if equipped)

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examine those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving components which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filter

A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is recommended when the filter is replaced.

Cooling system

Check the cooling system components, such as the radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.

Valve clearance (if equipped)

Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. An authorized Kia dealer should perform the operation.

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

7 30

Maintenance

Automatic transaxle fluid

Automatic transaxle fluid should not be checked under normal usage conditions.

But in severe conditions, the fluid should be changed at an authorized

Kia dealer in accordance to the scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this section.

✽

NOTICE

Automatic transaxle fluid color is basically red.

As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.

It is the normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace the fluid based upon the changed color.

CAUTION

Use only specified automatic transaxle fluid. The use of a nonspecified fluid could result in a transaxle malfunction and failure. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in section 8.)

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake fluid

Check the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to

DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

7 31

Maintenance

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever (or pedal) and cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipers and rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

Exhaust pipe and muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.

7 32

Power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)

Check the power steering pump and hoses for leakage and damage.

Replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately. Inspect the power steering belt (or drive belt) for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear, oiliness and proper tension.

Replace or adjust it if necessary.

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage.

Maintenance

7 33

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level

■

Type A

■

Type B

OXM079004

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and re-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F and L.

CAUTION -

Replacing engine oil

Do not overfill the engine oil. It may damage the engine.

WARNING -

Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking or adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

OYP074062N

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature.

7 34

Maintenance

■

Type A

■

Type B

OXM079005

Use only the specified engine oil.

(Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)

Changing the engine oil and filter

Have engine oil and filter changed by an authorized Kia dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this section.

WARNING

Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time.

Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

OYP074045N

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil from being spilled on engine components.

7 35

Maintenance

ENGINE COOLANT

The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year: at the beginning of the winter season, and before traveling to a colder climate.

CAUTION

-

Radiator cap

Never attempt to remove the radiator cap while the engine is operating or hot. Doing so might lead to cooling system and engine damage.

Checking the coolant level

WARNING

Removing radiator cap

Never attempt to remove the radiator cap while the engine is operating or hot. Doing so could result in serious personal injury from escaping hot coolant or steam.

• Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. Use extreme care when removing the radiator cap.

Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cooling system.

When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

• Even if the engine is not operating, do not remove the radiator cap or the drain plug while the engine and radiator are hot. Hot coolant and steam may still blow out under pressure, causing serious injury.

7 36

Maintenance

WARNING

- Cooling fan

Use caution when working near the blade of the cooling fan.

The electric motor (cooling fan) is controlled by engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed. it may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running.

OUMA074221

Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled between F and L marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough specified coolant to provide protection against freezing and corrosion.

Bring the level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent additions are required, see an authorized Kia dealer for a cooling system inspection.

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycolbased coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains more than 60 percent antifreeze or less than 35 percent antifreeze.

This would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.

7 37

Maintenance

For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.

Ambient

Temperature

-15°C (5°F)

-25°C (-13°F)

-35°C (-31°F)

-45°C (-49°F)

Mixture Percentage

(volume)

Antifreeze

35

40

50

60

Water

65

60

50

40

WARNING

Radiator cap

OXMA073007

Changing the coolant

Have the coolant changed by an authorized Kia dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this chapter.

Put a thick cloth around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in order to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts such as the alternator.

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure which may result in serious injury.

7 38

Maintenance

BRAKE FLUID

Checking the brake fluid level

OYP074048K

Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be between MAX (Maximum) and MIN

(Minimum) marks on the side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake fluid contamination.

CAUTION

-

Proper fluid

Only use brake fluid in brake system.

Small amounts of improper fluids (such as engine oil) can cause damage to the brake system.

In the event the brake system requires frequent additions of fluid, the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

When changing and adding brake fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it come in contact with your eyes. If brake fluid should come in contact with your eyes, immediately flush them with a large quantity of fresh tap water. Have your eyes examined by a doctor as soon as possible.

If the level is low, add fluid to the

MAX (Maximum) level. The level will fall with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of brake linings. If the fluid level is excessively low, have the brake system checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION

-

Brake fluid

Do not allow brake fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result.

Use only the specified brake fluid.

(Refer to “Recommended lubricants or capacities” in chapter 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

Brake fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly.

7 39

Maintenance

WASHER FLUID

Checking the washer fluid level

■

Type A

■

Type B

ODMNMC2019

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available.

However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.

WARNING

- Flammable

Fluid

Do not allow the washer fluid to come in contact with open flames or sparks.The windshield washer fluid reservoir is flammable under certain circumstances.

This can result in a fire.

WARNING

- Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

- Windshield fluid

Do not drink the windshield washer fluid. The windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals.

OYP074049K

The reservoir is translucent so that you can check the level with a quick visual inspection.

7 40

PARKING BRAKE

Checking the parking brake

OCM050015

Check whether the stroke is within specification when the parking brake pedal is depressed with 30 kg (66 lb,

294 N) of force. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or less than specified, have the parking brake adjusted by an authorized Kia dealer.

Stroke : 8~9 notch

Maintenance

7 41

Maintenance

AIR CLEANER

Filter replacement

OUM074007

It must be replaced when necessary, and should not be washed.

You can clean the filter when inspecting the air cleaner element.

Clean the filter by using compressed air.

OUM074008

1. Pull out the air cleaner cover.

OUMA074009

2. Unlock by turning the locking lever upward.

3. Pull the air cleaner filter to replace.

4. Lock the cover with the reverse order.

7 42

Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals. (Refer to

“Maintenance under severe usage conditions” in this chapter.)

CAUTION -

Air filter maintenance

• Do not drive with the air cleaner removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.

• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of non-genuine parts could damage the air flow sensor.

Maintenance

7 43

Maintenance

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)

Filter inspection

The climate control air filter should be replaced according to the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is operated in severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier.

When you replace the climate control air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components.

OUM074011

1. Open the glove box and remove the support strap (1).

OUM074012

2. With the glove box open, remove the stoppers on both sides.

7 44

OUM074013

3. Remove the climate control air filter case by pulling out right side of the cover.

OYP074008K

4. Replace the climate control air filter.

5. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

When replacing the climate control air filter install it properly. Otherwise, the system may produce noise and the effectiveness of the filter may be reduced.

Maintenance

7 45

Maintenance

WIPER BLADES

Blade inspection

1JBA5122

Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic vehicle washes have been known to make the windshield difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers.

Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial vehicle washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thoroughly with clean water.

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.

CAUTION -

Wiper blades

To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

7 46

Front windshield wiper blade

Maintenance

Rear window wiper blade

1JBA7037

1LDA5023

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade assembly to expose the plastic locking clip.

CAUTION -

Wiper arms

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

1JBA7038

2. Compress the clip and slide the blade assembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.

4. Install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

OHM078062

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the wiper blade assembly.

7 47

Maintenance

OHM078063

2. Install the new blade assembly by inserting the center part into the slot in the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

3. Make sure the blade assembly is installed firmly by trying to pull it slightly.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, have an authorized Kia dealer replace the wiper blade.

7 48

BATTERY

For best battery service

OUM074014

• Keep the battery securely mounted.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.

Maintenance

WARNING

- Risk of explosion

Keep lit cigarettes and all other flames or sparks away from the battery.

The battery contains hydrogen -- a highly combustible gas which will explode if it comes in contact with a flame or spark.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children because batteries contain highly corrosive

SULFURIC ACID and electrolytes.

Do not allow battery acid to contact your skin, eyes, clothing or paint finish.

Wear eye protection when charging or working near a battery.

Always provide ventilation when working in an enclosed space.

Always read the following instructions carefully when handling a battery.

If any electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least

15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.

If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area. If you feel pain or burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

Never attempt to recharge the battery when the battery cables are connected.

7 49

Maintenance

WARNING

- Risk of electrocution

Never touch the electrical ignition system while the vehicle is running. This system works with high voltage which can

"zap" you.

✽

NOTICE

If you connect unauthorized electronic devices to the battery, the battery may be discharged. Never use unauthorized devices.

Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged in a short time (because, for example, the headlamps or interior lamps lamps were left on while the vehicle was not in use), recharge it by slow charging (trickle) for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually discharges because of high electric load while the vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

7 50

Maintenance

Recharging battery

When recharging the battery, observe the following precautions:

• The battery must be removed from the vehicle and placed in an area with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or flame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin gassing (boiling) violently or if the temperature of the electrolyte of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).

• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger in the following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger main switch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp from the negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery terminal.

• Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories and stop the engine.

• The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is disconnected.

Reset items

Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected.

• Auto up/down window

(See chapter 4)

• Sunroof (See chapter 4)

• Trip computer (See chapter 4)

• Climate control system

(See chapter 4)

• Integrated Memory System

(See chapter 3)

• Audio (See chapter 4)

7 51

Maintenance

TIRES AND WHEELS

Tire care

For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures

All tire pressures (including the spare) should be checked when the tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than

1.6 km (one mile).

Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.

For recommended inflation pressure, refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter

8.

OUM074049L

All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label attached to the driver’s side center pillar.

WARNING

- Tire under inflation

Inflate your tire consistent with the instructions provided in this manual. Severe under inflation can lead to severe heat buildup, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that can result in the loss of vehicle control. This risk is much higher on hot days and when driving for long periods at high speeds.

7 52

Maintenance

• Underinflation also results in excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy. Wheel deformation also is possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

• Overinflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.

• Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by

28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be underinflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

Tire pressure

Always observe the following:

• Check tire pressure when the tires are cold. (After vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn't been driven more than 1.6

km (one mile) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle.

Be careful not to overload a vehicle luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one.

Checking tire inflation pressure

Check your tires once a month or more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.

How to check

Use a good quality gauge to check tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they're underinflated.

Check the tire's inflation pressure when the tires are cold. - "Cold" means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1.6 km (1 mile).

7 53

Maintenance

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

• Inspect your tires frequently for proper inflation as well as wear and damage. Always use a tire pressure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. The recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar.

• Remember to check the pressure of your spare tire. Kia recommends that you check the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tires on your vehicle.

Tire rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires for correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tire.

Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness.

Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter

8.

7 54

Maintenance

Without a spare tire

Directional tires (if equipped)

S2BLA790A

CBGQ0707A

Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated.

Rotate radial tires that have an asymmetric tread pattern only from front to rear and not from right to left.

WARNING -

Mixing tires

• Do not use the compact spare tire (if equipped) for tire rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circumstances.

This may cause unusual handling characteristics.

Wheel alignment and tire balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

CAUTION -

Wheel weight

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels.

Use only approved wheel weights.

7 55

Maintenance

Tire replacement

Tread wear indicator

OEN076053

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread left on the tire. Replace the tire when this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replacing the tire.

The ABS works by comparing the speed of the wheels. The tire size affects wheel speed. When replacing tires, all 4 tires must use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake

System) and ESC (Electronic

Stability Control) to work irregularly.

✽

NOTICE

We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same which were originally supplied with the vehicle. If not, driving performance could be altered.

Compact spare tire replacement

A compact spare tire has a shorter tread life than a regular size tire.

Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars on the tire.

The replacement compact spare tire should be the same size and design tire as the one provided with your new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tire wheel. The compact spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular size wheel, and the compact spare tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.

CAUTION

- Wheels

Wheels that do not meet Kia specifications may fit poorly and result in damage to the vehicle or unusual handling and poor vehicle control.

7 56

Maintenance

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset.

A wheel that is not the correct size may adversely affect wheel and bearing life, braking and stopping abilities, handling characteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance, speedometer and odometer calibration, headlamp aim and bumper height.

Tire traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. Slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road to reduce the possibility of losing control of the vehicle.

Tire sidewall labeling

2

1

5,6

7

3

4

Tire maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. Additionally, a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel.

1

I030B04JM

This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the Tire Identification Number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.

7 57

Maintenance

2. Tire size designation

A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire size designation. You will need this information when selecting replacement tires for your vehicle. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your vehicle.)

P235/65R17 108T

P - Applicable vehicle type (tires marked with the prefix “P’’ are intended for use on passenger vehicles or light trucks; however, not all tires have this marking).

235 - Tire width in millimeters.

65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s chapter height as a percentage of its width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

108 - Load Index, a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry.

T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this chapter for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designation mean.

Example wheel size designation:

7.0JX17

7.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

7 58

Maintenance

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being used for passenger vehicle tires. The speed rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire. This symbol corresponds to that tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.

Speed

Rating

Symbol

H

V

S

T

Z

Maximum Speed

180 km/h (112 mph)

190 km/h (118 mph)

210 km/h (130 mph)

240 km/h (149 mph)

Above 240 km/h (149 mph)

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire

Identification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old, based on the manufacturing date,

(including the spare tire) should be replaced by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT Code.

The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1616 represents that the tire was produced in the 16th week of 2016.

WARNING

- Tire age

Replace tires within the recommended time frame. Failure to replace tires as recommended can result in sudden tire failure, which could lead to a loss of control and an accident.

7 59

Maintenance

4. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum chapter width.

For example:

TREADWEAR 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. Regardless of the remaining tread, we recommend that tires be replaced after approximately six (6) years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process.

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.

The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicle may vary with respect to grade.

7 60

Maintenance

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire terminology and definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transaxle, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

7 61

Maintenance

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: The DOT code includes the Tire Identification

Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight

Rating for the Front Axle.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight

Rating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light truck (LT) tire: A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.

Load ratings: The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:

The sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg

(150 pounds).

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The outward facing sidewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the inner facing sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.

7 62

Maintenance

Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Pneumatic tire:

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load.

Production options weight: The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 2.3

kg (5 lb.) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty breaks, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.

Recommended Inflation Pressure:

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure and shown on the tire placard.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators:

Narrow bands, sometimes called "wear bars," that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch of tread remains.

UTQGS:

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading Standards, a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus the rated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the

Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb and accessory weight plus maximum occupant and cargo weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:

Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and driving by 2.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure.

7 63

Maintenance

All season tires

Kia specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year round, including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

Kia specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M+S

(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.

if you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, Kia recommends the use of snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If you equip your vehicle with snow tires, they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the original tires. Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result.

Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4 psi

) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the driver's side of the center pillar, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall, whichever is less.

Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75 mph) when your vehicle is equipped with snow tires.

Radial-ply tires

Radial-ply tires provide improved tread life, road hazard resistance and smoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are of belted construction, and are selected to complement the ride and handling characteristics of your vehicle.

Radial-ply tires have the same load carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias belted tires of the same size, and use the same recommended inflation pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply or bias belted tires is not recommended. Any combinations of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias belted tires when used on the same vehicle will seriously deteriorate vehicle handling. The best rule to follow is: Identical radial-ply tires should always be used as a set of four.

7 64

Maintenance

Longer wearing tires can be more susceptible to irregular tread wear. It is very important to follow the tire rotation interval shown in this chapter to achieve the tread life potential of these tires. Cuts and punctures in radial-ply tires are repairable only in the tread area, because of sidewall flexing. Consult your tire dealer for radial-ply tire repairs.

Low aspect ratio tire

(if equipped)

Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect ratio is lower than 50, are provided for sporty looks.

Because the low aspect ratio tires are optimized for handling and braking, it may be more uncomfortable to ride in and there is more noise compare to normal tires.

CAUTION

Because the sidewall of the low aspect ratio tire is shorter than the normal, the wheel and tire of the low aspect ratio tire is easier to be damaged. So, follow the instructions below.

- When driving on a rough road or off road, drive cautiously because tires and wheels may be damaged. And after driving, inspect tires and wheels.

- When passing over a pothole, speed bump, manhole, or curb stone, drive slowly so that the tires and wheels are not damaged.

- If the tire is impacted, we recommend that you inspect the tire condition or contact an authorized Kia dealer.

- To prevent damage to the tire, inspect the tire condition and pressure every 3,000km.

CAUTION

• It is not easy to recognize tire damage with your own eyes.

But if there is the slightest hint of tire damage, even though you cannot see the tire damage with your own eyes, have the tire checked or replaced because the tire damage may cause air leakage from the tire.

• If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road, pothole, manhole, or curb stone, it will not be covered by the warranty.

• You can find out the tire information on the tire sidewall.

7 65

Maintenance

FUSES

■

Blade type

■

Cartridge type

■

Multi fuse

■

BFT

Normal

Normal

N o rr m a ll ll

N o rr rr m a ll ll

Blown

B ll ll o w n

B ll ll o w n

Blown

OUM074043L

A vehicle’s electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels, one located in the driver’s side panel bolster, the other in the engine compartment near the battery.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will melt.

If the electrical system does not work, first check the driver’s side fuse panel.

Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized Kia dealer.

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type, and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.

WARNING

-

Fuse replacement

• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and possibly a fire.

• Never install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and a possible fire.

• Do not arbitrarily modify or add-on electric wiring of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.

7 66

Maintenance

✽

NOTICE

• When replacing fuse, turn the ignition “OFF” and turn off switches of all electrical devices then remove battery (-) terminal.

• The actual fuse/relay panel label may differ from equipped items.

Inner panel fuse replacement

OUMA074015

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

If the switch is located in the “OFF” position, a caution indicator will be displayed in the cluster.

OUM074016

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided on the engine compartment fuse panel cover.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown.

Spare fuses are provided in the engine compartment fuse panel.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized

Kia dealer.

7 67

Maintenance

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the power outlet fuse.

If the head lamp, turn signal lamp, stop signal lamp, fog lamp, DRL, tail lamp, HMSL do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse panel in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced.

✽

NOTICE

If the headlamp, fog lamp, turn signal lamp, or tail lamp malfunction even without any problem to the lamps, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.

✽

NOTICE

- Fuse Panel Covers

• Put all switches in ON when driving.

• If the vehicle remains idle for over

1 month, put all switches in OFF to prevent the batteries from being discharged.

• Excluding long-term parking for over 1 month, the contact points of switches may wear out upon extensive use. Please refrain from excessive use of switches.

Fuse switch

OUMA074017

Always, put the fuse switch at the ON position.

If you move the switch to the OFF position, some items such as audio and digital clock must be reset and transmitter (or smart key) may not work properly. When the switch is

Off, the caution indicator will be displayed on the instrument cluster.

Always place the fuse switch in the

ON position while driving the vehicle.

7 68

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse replacement

OUM074018

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off.

2. Remove the fuse panel cover by pressing the tab and pulling the cover up. When the blade type fuse is disconnected, remove it by using the clip designed for changing fuses located in the engine room fuse box. Upon removal, securely insert reserve fuse of equal quantity.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

Multi fuse

CAUTION

- Fuse Panel

Covers

After checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment, securely install the fuse panel cover through the audible clicking sound.

If not, electrical failures may occur from water contact.

OUM074020

If the main fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows:

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.

4. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating.

5. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

7 69

Maintenance

✽

NOTICE

Do not disassemble nor assemble the multi fuse when it is secured with nuts and bolts. Incorrect or partial assembly torque may cause a fire.

Have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

Main fuse

OUMA074044

If the main fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows:

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.

4. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating.

5. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

✽

NOTICE

The electronic system may not function correctly even when the engine room and internal fuse box’s individual fuses are not disconnected. In such case the cause of the problem may be disconnection of the main fuse (BFT type), which is located inside the positive battery terminal

(+) cap.

Since the main fuse is designed more intricately than other parts, have the vehicle checked by an authorized

Kia dealer.

CAUTION

Visually inspect the battery cap to ensure it is securely closed. If the battery cap is not securely closed, moisture may enter the system and damage the electrical components.

7 70

Fuse/relay panel description

OUMA074021

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

✽

NOTICE

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

Maintenance

OUMA077220

7 71

Maintenance

Description

AIR BAG IND.

A/CON 3

A/CON 2

START

AIR BAG

MODULE 2

ACC

MODULE 4

BRAKE SWITCH

MODULE 3

MODULE 1

SMART KEY 1

Fuse rating

10A Cluster, A/C Control Module

30A Fuse - A/CON 2, Blower Motor

7.5A

A/C Control Module (Auto)

7.5A

15A

10A

10A

Protected component

E/R Junction Block (Start Relay), Transaxle Range Switch

SRS Control Module, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor

Crash Pad Switch, 4WD ECM, Lane Departure Warning Module, Console Switch, Rear Parking Assist

Sensor LH/RH, Rear Parking Assist Buzzer, Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH (Center), Blind Spot

Detection Radar LH/RH, Electronic Parking Brake Module

PCB Block (PDM (ACC) Relay, Power Outlet Relay), BCM, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit,

360° camera monitoring Unit, Smart Key Control Module, AMP, USB Charger, Telematics Unit

Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device Module, Head Lamp Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH 10A

7.5A

10A

10A

15A

Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch

A/C Control Module, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Electro Chromic Mirror, Driver IMS Control Module, ATM

Shift Lever Indicator, Rear Seat Warmer LH, Front Air Ventilation Control Module, Front Seat Warmer

Control Module, Telematics Unit

BCM, Stop Lamp Switch, Driver/Passenger Doormodule

Smart Key Control Module

7 72

Maintenance

Description

A/CON (RR)

SUNROOF 2

SUNROOF 1

CLUSTER

GATEWAY

IMMO.

IG1

MULTIMEDIA

MEMORY 2

DOOR LOCK

SMART KEY 2

AEB

WASHER

MDPS

Fuse rating

15A ICM Relay Box (Rear Blower Motor Relay)


20A Sunroof Control Module (Roller)

20A

10A

10A

10A

15A

15A

10A

Sunroof Control Module (Glass)

Instrument Cluster

Gateway (MCU IG1)

Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module

E/R Junction Block (Fuse - MDPS 3, TCU 1), PCB Block (Fuse - ABS 3, SENSOR 6, ECU 1, CRUISE)

USB Charger, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Telematics Unit

Instrument Cluster, Data Link Connector, A/C Control Module, Rear A/C Control Module, Clock Spring,

MUT, Electro Chromic Mirror, Driver/Passenger Door Module, Passenger Power Window Switch, Driver IMS

Control Module

Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay, Tail Gate Relay, DRIVER/PASSENGER/RL/RR DOOR MODULE 20A

10A

10A

15A

7.5A

Start/Stop Button Switch, Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module

AEB Unit

BCM, Multifunction Switch

MDPS UNIT(COLUMN TYPE), Steering Angle Sensor

7 73

Maintenance

Description

MEMORY 1

HEATED

STEERING

WIPER (RR)

A/CON 1

HEATED MIRROR

MODULE 5

MODULE 6

S/HEATER (RR)

S/HEATER (FRT)

P/WINDOW (RH)

AMP 1

MODULE 7

Fuse rating

10A BCM

15A

15A

7.5A

10A

10A

7.5A

15A

20A

25A

25A

7.5A


BCM

Rear Wiper Relay, Rear Wiper Motor

A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer, E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay), ICM Relay Box (Rear Blower Motor

Relay)

A/C Control Module, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror

BCM, Smart Key Control Module

360° camera monitoring Unit, Rear A/C Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer LH, Front Air Ventilation Control

Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module, AC Inverter Module, Crash Pad Switch

Rear Seat Warmer LH

Front Air Ventilation Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module

Rear Safety Power Window RH, Rear Power Window Switch RH, Passenger Safety Power Window Module,

Passenger Door Module, Passenger Power Window Switch

AMP

Gateway (MCU B+), Sport Mode Switch, Key Solenoid

7 74

Maintenance

Description

INTERIOR LAMP

Fuse rating

10A


Glove Box Lamp, Ignition Key Ill. & Door Warning Switch, Driver Foot Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH Switch,

Cargo Lamp, Center Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp, Rear Personal Lamp LH/RH

FUEL LID 10A Fuel Filler & Tail Gate Switch

P/SEAT (DRV) 30A Driver IMS Control Module, Driver Seat Manual Switch

P/SEAT (PASS)

AMP 2

P/WINDOW (LH)

30A

25A

25A

Passenger Seat Manual Switch

AMP

Rear Safety Power Window LH, Rear Power Window Switch LH, Driver Safety Power Window Module,

Driver Door Module

7 75

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel

OUM074023

7 76

OUMA074050

Maintenance

Description

MULTI

FUSE

MDPS 1

MDPS 2

COOLING

FAN 1

B+1

B+2

B+3

B+5

B+4

ABS 2

ABS 1

FUSE INVERTER

POWER TAIL

GATE

TRAILER

BLOWER

Fuse rating

100A MDPS Unit (Rack Type)

80A MDPS Unit (Column Type)

Cooling Fan 1 Relay 80A

60A

60A

60A

50A

40A

20A

40A

30A AC Inverter Module


IGPM (Fuse - S/HEATER (RR), P/SEAT (DRV), P/SEAT (PASS), P/WINDOW (LH))

IGPM (Fuse - S/HEATER (FRT), P/WINDOW (RH), FULE LID, AMP 1, AMP 2)

IGPM (IPS 1, Fuse - MODULE 7, Leak Current Autocut Device Fuse - MULTIMEDIA, MEMORY 2,

MEMORY 1), INTERIOR LAMP

IGPM (IPS 0/IPS 2/IPS 3/IPS 4/IPS 5/IPS 6/IPS 7/IPS 8, Fuse - S/ROOF 1)

IGPM (Fuse - DOOR LOCK, SMART KEY 1, SMART KEY 2, BRAKE SWITCH, A/CON (RR),

S/ROOF 2)

ESC Module

ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

30A

30A

40A

Power Tail Gate Module

Trailer Power Outlet

Blower Relay

7 77

Maintenance

Description

AMS

VACUUM

PUMP

TCU 2

FUSE

EPB 1

EPB 2

4WD

ECU 2

ECU 3

MDPS 3

TCU 1

B/UP LAMP

Fuse rating

10A Battery Sensor

20A [G4KH] Vacuum Pump

15A

15A

15A

20A

15A

15A

7.5A

10A

7.5A

[G4KJ/G4KH] PCM

Electronic Parking Brake Module

Electronic Parking Brake Module

4WD ECM

PCM

[G6DH] IDB (Injector Driver Box)

MDPS Unit (Rack Type)

Transaxle Range Switch


Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, BCM, Electro Chromic Mirror, Audio(UVO)

7 78

Description Fuse rating

ABS 3 7.5A


ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

ECU 1 10A PCM, [G6DH] IDB (Injector Driver Box)

40A RLY. 4 (Start Relay), PDM (IG2) Relay, Ignition Switch IG 2

POWER

OUTLET 1

SENSOR 6

POWER

OUTLET 2

CRUISE

ECU 4

WIPER

DEICER

ECU 5

IG 1

SENSOR 4

SENSOR 5

20A

7.5A

20A

7.5A

20A

25A

15A

20A

40A

10A

15A

Front Power Outlet & Cigarette Lighter

[G4KH] Brake Vacuum Switch, Vacuum Pump

Front Power Outlet

Smart Cruise Control Radar

[G4KJ/G4KH] PCM (E-CVVT Relay)

Wiper Low Relay

Front Deicer Relay

[G4KJ/G4KH] PCM (E-CVVT Relay)

PDM (IG1) Relay, PDM (ACC) Relay, Ignition Switch

[G4KJ/G4KH] Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down)

[G6DH] PCM, Oxygen Sensor #1/#2/#3/#4

[G4KJ/G4KH]PCM

[G6DH] IDB (Injector Driver Box)

Maintenance

7 79

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating

POWER

OUTLET 3

20A Rear Power Outlet

SENSOR 1 20A


[G4KJ/G4KH] Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4 [G6DF] Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4/#5/#6, Condecser #1/#2

SENSOR 3

POWER

OUTLET 4

REAR

HEATED

10A

20A

40A

[G4KJ/G4KH] Fuel Pump Relay [G6DF] Fuel Pump Relay, PCM

Luggage Power Outlet

Rear Defogger Relay

SENSOR 2

FUEL PUMP

10A

20A

[G4KJ/G4KH] E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan 1 Relay), Oil Control Valve (Exhaust), Purge Control Solenoid

Valve, Canister Close Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, RCV Control Solenoid Valve (G4KH)

[G6DH] E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan 1 Relay), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve #1/#2, Purge Control

Solenoid Valve, Oil Control Valve #1/#2/#3/#4 (Intake/Exhaust), PCM, Canister close valve

Fuel Pump Relay

HORN

B/ALARM

HORN

15A

10A

Horn Relay

Burglar Alarm Horn Relay

7 80

Relay NO.

E31

E32

E33

Relay Name

Blower Relay

START #2 Relay

Cooling Fan #1 Relay

Type

MICRO

MICRO

MINI

Maintenance

7 81

Maintenance

LIGHT BULBS

Please prepare lamps with appropriate standards in case of emergencies. (Refer to chapter 8 for further information)

When changing lamps and sorts, first turn off the engine at a safe place, firmly apply the side brake and take out the battery’s negative (-) terminal.

WARNING

-

Working on the lights

Prior to working on the light, firmly apply the parking brake, ensure that the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position and turn off the lights to avoid sudden movement of the vehicle and burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

Use only the bulbs of the specified wattage.

CAUTION -

Light replacement

Be sure to replace the burnedout bulb with one of the same wattage rating. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the fuse or electric wiring system.

CAUTION -

Headlamp

Lens

To prevent damage, do not clean headlamp lens with chemical solvents or strong detergents.

✽

NOTICE

• If the light bulb or lamp connector is removed from an operating lamp activated by electricity, the fuse box’s electronic device may scan it as a malfunction.

Therefore, a lamp malfunction history may be recorded in

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in the fuse box.

• It is normal for an operating lamp may blink temporarily. Since this occurrence is due stabilization function of the vehicle’s electronic control device, if the lamp lights up normally after temporary blinking, there is no problem in the vehicle.

However, if the lamp continues to blink several times or turn off completely, there may be an error in the vehicle’s electronic control device. So please have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer immediately.

7 82

Maintenance

If you don’t have necessary tools, the correct bulbs and the expertise, consult an authorized Kia dealer. In many cases, it is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb. This is especially true if you have to remove the headlamp assembly to get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing the headlamp assembly can result in damage to the vehicle.

If unauthentic parts or substandard lights are used when changing lights, it may lead to fuse disconnection and malfunction, and other wiring damages.

Do not install extra lamps or LED to the vehicle. If supplementary lights are installed, it may lead to lamp malfunction and flickering of the lights. In addition, the fuse box and other writing may be damaged.

Front lamp bulb replacement

■

Type A

■

Type B

OUMA074027

OUMA074114

(1) Headlamp (High and DRL)

(2) Headlamp (Low)

(3) Turn signal lamp

(4) Side marker lamp

(5) Position lamp

(6) Fog lamp (if equipped)

7 83

Maintenance

Headlamp bulb

OXM079200N

• Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids. Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit. A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlamp.

• If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.

• Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before handling it.

WARNING

- Halogen bulbs

Handle halogen bulbs with care.

• Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass if broken.

WARNING -

HID

Headlamp low beam

(if equipped)

Do not attempt to replace or inspect the low beam (XENON bulb) due to electric shock danger. If the light bulb does not operate, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

7 84

Maintenance

Headlamp (bulb type) -high/low

7. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly.

Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

8. Install the headlamp bulb cover by turning it clockwise.

Turn signal lamp

High lamp Low lamp

OUM074053L

1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the headlamp assembly from the body of the vehicle

3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

5. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.

6. Inset a new bulb into the socket.

Turn signal

OUM074108L

Follow the steps 1 to 3 from the previous page.


5. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket

7 85

Maintenance

6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.



✽

NOTICE

If bulb will not rotate inside socket, remove bulb, rotate 180°, and try again.

Front fog lamp bulbs

(if equipped)

OUMA074109

5. Install the new bulb-socket into the housing by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the housing. Push the socket into the housing and turn the socket clockwise.

6. Connect the power connector to the socket.

7. Reinstall the front bumper under cover.

✽

NOTICE

Always have the headlamp aiming adjusted after an accident or after the headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an authorized Kia dealer.

1. Remove the front bumper under cover.

2. Reach your hand into the back of the front bumper.

3. Disconnect the power connector from the socket.

4. Remove the bulb-socket from the housing by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the housing.

7 86

Maintenance

Headlamp low (HID), Position lamp (LED)/Side marker lamp(LED) replacement

If the light bulb does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

✽

NOTICE

HID lamps have superior performance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps are estimated by the manufacturer to last twice as long or longer than halogen bulbs depending on their frequency of use. They will probably require replacement at some point in the life of the vehicle. Cycling the headlamps on and off more than typical use will shorten HID lamps life. HID lamps do not fail in the same manner as halogen incandescent lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a period of operation but will immediately relamp when the headlamp switch is cycled it is likely the

HID lamp needs to be replaced. HID lamping components are more complex than conventional halogen bulbs thus have higher replacement cost.

Side repeater lamp replacement

OUM074028

If the light bulb does not operate,have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer. A skilled technician should check or repair the side repeater lamp, for it may damage related out side mirror parts of the vehicle.

7 87

Maintenance

Rear combination lamp bulb replacement

■

Type A

Side marker

Stop&tail Tail

Outside lamp

OUMA074031

Type A

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Open the service cover.

3. Remove the nuts from the vehicle.

4. Remove the rear combination lamp assembly from the body of the vehicle.

Back up

Turn signal

OUM074030L

■

Type B

Side marker

Stop&tail

Stop&tail

OUM074032

Turn signal

Back up

OUM074029

OUM074033

7 88

Maintenance

■

Type A

■

Type B

OUM074034

7. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.




10. Reinstall the light assembly to the body of the vehicle.

Inside lamp

■

Type A

OUMA074111

5. Disconnect the connector between lamp and the body.


* If your vehicle is equipped with LED type stop and tail lamps replace with LED assembled units. Please contact an authorized Kia dealer.

Type B (Stop and tail lamp)

If the lamp bulb does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

■

Type B

OUMA074035

OUMA074112

OUM074036

7 89

Maintenance


2. Remove the service cover.


4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.




7. Install the service cover by putting it into the service hole.

* If your vehicle is equipped with LED type stop and tail lamps replace with LED assembled units. Please contact an authorized Kia dealer.

High mounted stop lamp replacement

OUM074056L

ODMEMC2019


2. Gently remove the center cover of the rear tailgate trim.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

OUMA074232

4. Loosen the retaining nuts and remove the spoiler.

7 90

License plate lamp bulb replacement

A

B

OUMA074230

5. Remove the high mounted stop lamp assembly (A) after loosening the nuts and washer nozzle (B).

6. Reinstall a new lamp assembly in the reverse order of removal.

OUMA074231

1. Loosen the lens retaining screws with a phillips head screwdriver.

2. Remove the lens.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

4. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the lens securely with the lens retaining screws.

Maintenance

7 91

Maintenance

■

Map lamp

■

Room lamp

■

Glove box lamp

■

Luggage lamp

■

Vanity mirror lamp

OUM074039/OUM074040/OUM074041/

OYP074032K/OXM079041

Interior lamp bulb replacement

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens from the interior light housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

WARNING -

Interior lamps

Prior to working on the Interior

Lights, ensure that the “OFF” button is depressed to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interior light housing notches and snap the lens into place.

✽

NOTICE

If the LED lamp does not operate, we recommend that you checked on authorized Kia dealer.

7 92

Maintenance

APPEARANCE CARE

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.

CAUTION -

Headlight Lens

To prevent damage, do not clean headlight lens with chemical solvents or strong detergents.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicle’s finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

7 93

Maintenance

High-pressure washing

• When using high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle.

Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure can lead to component damage or water penetration.

• Do not spray the camera, sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.

• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or plastic covers) or connectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with high pressure water.

CAUTION -

Wet engine

• Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

OJB037800

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.

Do not apply wax on embossed unpainted unit, as it may tarnish the unit.

7 94

Maintenance

CAUTION -

Drying vehicle

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, acid detergents or strong detergents containing high alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts.

This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense.

If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of brightmetal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Road salt and other corrosive chemicals are used in cold weather states to melt snow and prevent ice accumulation. If these chemicals are not regularly removed, they will corrode the vehicle underbody and over time damage fuel lines, the fuel tank retention system, the vehicle suspension, the exhaust system, and even the body frame. The National

Highway Traffic Safety Administration has warned all vehicle owners of all brands of the need to take the following steps:

• Wash the undercarriage of your vehicle regularly during the winter and whenever your vehicle has been exposed to such salts or chemicals.

• Do a thorough washing of the undercarriage at the end of the winter.

7 95

Maintenance

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated with a clear protective finish.

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminum wheels.

They may scratch the finish.

• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels after driving on salted roads. This helps prevent corrosion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with highspeed vehicle wash brushes.

• Do not use any alkaline or acid detergents It may damage and corrode the aluminum wheels coated with a clear protective finish.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, we produce vehicles of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the vehicle.

• Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in contact with the vehicle’s surface by moisture that evaporates slowly.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it dries slowly and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle.

Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion.

7 96

Maintenance

High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your vehicle clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the vehicle.

Keep your vehicle clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your vehicle clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.

• When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from beginning by observing the following:

• If you live in a high-corrosion area

— where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your vehicle at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the vehicle, give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you wash your vehicle in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

7 97

Maintenance

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours.

Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible.

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration. If they do contact the interior parts, wipe them off immediately. If necessary, use a vinyl cleaner, see product instructions for correct usage.

CAUTION -

Electrical components

Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting and cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.

Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the vehicle.

These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried.

7 98

CAUTION -

Leather

When cleaning leather products

(steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.

Maintenance

CAUTION -

Prime Nappa leather seat cover

(If equipped)

Prime Nappa/semi-aniline leather is top-quality leather retaining the hide's natural texture. Pores, scars or blood vessels, etc. of the original animal's skin are visible. Pressure marks or wrinkles may be made when used. Prolonged exposure to sunlight or heat may cause discoloration. These things occur due to the natural characteristics of cowhides. If the leather is exposed to rain or gets wet, remove water with a dry cloth and dry the leather in the shade to minimize damage.

Make sure to keep sharp objects away from the leather as these can create scratches on the surface. For light-colored leather, be careful of spots or color transfer, such as from jeans.

CAUTION -

Nappa leather seat cover (If equipped)

Nappa leather retains the hide's own soft texture with visible pores, scars or blood vessels, etc. Pressure marks or wrinkles may be made when used.

Prolonged exposure to sunlight or heat may cause discoloration. These things occur due to the natural characteristics of cowhides. If the leather is exposed to rain or gets wet, remove water with a dry cloth and dry the leather in the shade to minimize damage.


CAUTION -

Natural leather seat cover (If equipped)

Natural leather has visible pores, scars or blood vessels, etc. Pressure marks or wrinkles may be made when used.

Prolonged exposure to sunlight or heat may cause discoloration. These things occur due to the natural characteristics of cowhides. If the leather is exposed to rain or gets wet, remove water with a dry cloth and dry the leather in the shade to minimize damage.


7 99

Maintenance

Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained.

Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric’s appearance and fireresistant properties.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with a glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION -

Rear window

Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage of the rear window defroster grid.

7 100

Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

The emission control system of your vehicle is covered by a written limited warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the

Warranty & Maintenance booklet in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable emission regulations.

There are three emission control systems, as follows.

Caution for the Inspection and

Maintenance Test (With Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESC system back on by pressing the ESC switch again.

(1) Crankcase emission control system

(2) Evaporative emission control system

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected and maintained by an authorized Kia dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

1. Crankcase emission control system

The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase.

This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, which then pass through the

PCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:

Onboard Refueling Vapor

Recovery) system

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.

(The ORVR system is designed to allow the vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station, preventing the escape of fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)

7 101

Maintenance

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister. When the engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control solenoid valve.

3. Exhaust emission control system

The Exhaust Emission Control

System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle performance.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve

(PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control

Module (ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warms up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

Vehicle modifications

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.

• If you use unauthorized electronic devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized electronic devices.

Engine exhaust gas precautions

(carbon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be present with other exhaust fumes.

Therefore, if you smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into your vehicle, drive it only with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately.

WARNING -

Exhaust

Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled. Follow the instructions on this page to avoid CO poisoning.

7 102

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as garages) any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running, adjust the ventilation system (as needed) to draw outside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)

WARNING

- Catalytic converter

Keep away from the catalytic converter and exhaust system while the vehicle is running or immediately thereafter.

The exhaust and catalytic systems are very hot and may burn you.

WARNING

- Fire

• Do not park, idle or drive the vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as grass, vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.

A hot exhaust system can ignite flammable items under your vehicle.

• Also, do not remove the heat sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of the vehicle or do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control.

It may present a fire risk under certain conditions.

7 103

Maintenance

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautions must be observed:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gasoline engines.

• Do not operate the vehicle when there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the ignition off and descending steep grades in gear with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 minutes or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by an authorized Kia dealer.

• Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle.

Additionally, such actions could void your warranties.

7 104

Specifications & Consumer information

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 8-6

• Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

8

Specifications & Consumer information

DIMENSIONS

ITEM

Overall length [mm (in.)]

Overall width [mm (in.)]

5 Seats

4,760 (187.4)

1,890 (74.4)

Overall height

[mm (in.)]

Without Roof rack

Tread

[mm (in.)]

With Roof rack

Front

235/65 R17

235/60 R18

Rear

235/55 R19

235/65 R17

235/60 R18

235/55 R19

Wheelbase [mm (in.)]

1,685 (66.3)

1,690 (66.5)

1,633 (64.2)

1,628 (64.0)

1,628 (64.0)

1,644 (64.7)

1,639 (64.5)

1,639 (64.5)

2,780 (109.4)

7 Seats

←

←

←

←

←

←

←

←

←

←

←

ENGINE

ITEM

Displacement

Bore x Stroke

Firing order

No. of cylinders

Gasoline

Theta II 2.0 T-GDI

Gasoline

Theta II 2.4

1,998 (121.92) 2,359 (143.95)

[cc (cu. in)]

[mm (in.)]

86x86 (3.39x3.39) 88x97 (3.46X3.81)

1-3-4-2

4. In-line

1-3-4-2

4. In-line

Gasoline

Lambda II 3.3

3,342 (203.94)

92x83.8

(3.62X3.29)

1-2-3-4-5-6

V - type

8 2


BULB WATTAGE

Light Bulb

Headlamps (Low)

Headlamps (Low) - HID type*

Headlamps (High)

Front turn signal lamps

Front position lamps

Bulb type

LED type

Front

Daytime running light

Front fog lamps

Side Repeater lamps

Type A

Type B

Type C

Bulb type

LED type

Rear

Interior

Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside)

Rear tail lamps (Inside)

Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside)

Rear tail lamps (Inside)

Rear turn signal lamps

Back-up lamps

High mounted stop lamp

License plate lamps

Map lamps

Room lamps

Rear Personal Lamps

Vanity mirror lamps

Glove box lamp

Luggage room lamp

Bulb type

LED type

Wattage (W)

55

35

55

27W

-

LED

55W

35

27

LED

-

LED

21/5

5

LED

LED

27

16

LED

10W

20 (LED*)

10

LED*

5

5

8

Bulb type

H7SPL

D3S

H7L

PY27/8W

-

LED

H7L

H8L

#881

LED

-

LED

P21/5

P21/5

LED

LED

PY27W

W16W

LED

C5W x 2

FESTOON (LED*)

FESTOON

LED*

FESTOON

FESTOON

FESTOON

* If equipped

8 3


TIRES AND WHEELS

Item Tire size

Wheel size

Supplier

Load

Capacity

Speed capacity

Inflation pressure [kPa (psi)]

Normal load * 3 Maximum load

Full size tire

235/65 R17

235/60 R18

235/55 R19

7.0JX17

7.5JX18

7.5JX19

LI * 1 Kg SS * 2 Km/h

Kumho 104 900 H 210

Hankook 104 900 H 210

Kumho 103 875 H 210

Nexen 103 875 H 210

Kumho 101 825 H 210

Michelin 101 825 H 210

Front Rear Front Rear

235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34)

235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34)

235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34)

Compact spare tire

T165/90 R17 4.0TX17

* 1 : Load Index

* 2 : Speed Symbol

* 3 : Normal load : Up to 3 persons

Kumho 116 1250 M 130 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)

Wheel lug nut torque

[Kgf·m

(lbf·ft, N·m)]

9~11

(65~79,

88~107)

CAUTION

When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.

Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make them work irregularly.

8

✽

NOTICE

• It is permissible to add 21 kPa (3 psi) to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon.

Tires typically loose 7 kPa (1 psi) for every -11°C (12°F) temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected, re-check your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.

• We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles. If not, that affects driving performance.

• When driving in high altitude grades, it is natural for the atmospheric pressure to decrease. Therefore, please check the tire pressure and add more air when necessary.

Additionally required tire air pressure per km above sea level: 10 kPa/km (1.5 lb/po²/km).

4


GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT

ITEM

Theta II 2.0

[kg (lbs.)]

Theta II 2.4

[kg (lbs.)]

Lambda II 3.3

[kg (lbs.)]

AT

AT

AT

5 Seats 7 Seats

2WD 2,320 (5,115) 2,470 (5,445)

4WD 2,380 (5,247) 2,530 (5,578)

2WD 2,280 (5,026) 2,420 (5,335)

4WD 2,340 (5,159) 2,490 (5,490)

2WD 2,490 (5,489)

4WD 2,550 (5,622)

LUGGAGE VOLUME

ITEM

SAE

MIN.

MAX.

5 Seats 7 Seats

1,099L (38.8 cu ft) 1,077L (38.0 cu ft)

2,082L (73.5 cu ft) 2,066L (72.9 cu ft)

MIN : Behind rear seat (2nd row)

MAX : Behind front seat (1st row)

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Refrigerant

Compressor lubricant

Item

FRONT A/CON

FRONT + REAR A/CON

FRONT A/CON

FRONT + REAR A/CON

Weight of volume

650 ± 25g

850 ± 25g

120 ± 10g

210 ± 10g

We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.

Classification

R-134a

PAG(FD46XG)

8 5


RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.

The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant

Engine oil * 1 * 2 (drain and refill)

Recommends (or equivalent)

Theta II 2.0

T-GDI

Volume

4.8

l

(5.07 US qt.)

Classification

ACEA A5 or above

* If the ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service

SL, IL SAC GF-3, ACEA A3.

Automatic transaxle fluid

Gasoline

Engine

Theta II 2.4 GDI 4.8

l

(5.07 US qt.)

API Service SM or above/

ILSAC GF-4 or above/ACEA A5 or above

* If the API service SM, ILSAC GF-4, ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL, IL SAC GF-3,

ACEA A3.

Lambda II 3.3

GDI

5.7

l

(6.02 US qt.)

ACEA A5 or above

* If the ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service

SL, IL SAC GF-3, ACEA A3.

Gasoline

Engine

Theta II 2.0

T-GDI

7.8

l

(8.24 US qt.)


l

(7.50 US qt.)

Lambda II 3.3

GDI

7.8

l

(8.24 US qt.)

ATF SP-IV or equivalent

8 6


Coolant

Brake fluid

Lubricant Volume

Theta II 2.0

T-GDI

Lambda II 3.3

GDI

7.3

Gasoline

Engine


l

(8.35 US qt.)

9.3

l l

(7.71 US qt.)

(9.83 US qt.)

0.41~0.45

l

(0.445~0.485 US qt.)

Rear differential oil (AWD)

Classification

Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water

(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)

FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

0.53 ~ 0.63

l

(0.56 ~ 0.67 US qt.)

HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90

(SHELL HD AXLE OIL 75W90 or equivalent)

Transfer case oil (AWD)

Fuel

Theta II 2.0

T-GDI

Gasoline

Engine

Theta II 2.4 GDI

Lambda II 3.3

GDI

0.34 ~ 0.36

l

(0.36 ~ 0.38 US qt.)

0.34 ~ 0.36

l

(0.36 ~ 0.38 US qt.)

0.67 ~ 0.73

l

(0.70 ~ 0.77 US qt.)

71

l

(75 US qt.)

HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90

(SHELL HD AXLE OIL 75W90 or equivalent)

Refer to Fuel requirements in section 1

* 1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

* 2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

8 7


Recommended SAE viscosity number

Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged. Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability).

Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage. When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.

8 8

Temperature

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

°C

(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

20W-50

Gasoline Engine Oil

(Theta II 2.0 T-GDI) * 1

15W-40

10W-30

5W-30, 5W-40

Gasoline Engine Oil

(Theta II 2.4 GDI) * 2

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30

Gasoline Engine Oil

(Lambda II 3.3 GDI) * 3

5W-30

10W-30

* 1 : For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (ACEA A5). However, if the engine oil

* 2 is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4 / ACEA A5).

However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

*

3

: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (ACEA A5). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

■

Frame number

■

VIN label


VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

LABEL

OUM084001

The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floor under the front passenger seat.

OUM084005

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windshield from outside.

OUM084004

The vehicle certification label attached on the driver’s side center pillar gives the vehicle identification number (VIN).

8 9


TIRE SPECIFICATION AND

PRESSURE LABEL

ENGINE NUMBER

■

Gasoline engine (THETA 2.0L T-GDI)

■

Gasoline engine (THETA 2.4L GDI)

OYF081013N

OUM084002

The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver's side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.

■

Gasoline engine (Lambda 3.3L GDI)

OUM084007

OYP084003K

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.

8 10

Index

I

Index

I 2

A

Advanced smart cruise control system (ASCC). . . . . . 5-65

Limitations of the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

Speed setting (ASCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66

To adjust the sensitivity of advanced smart cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74

To convert to cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

Vehicle to vehicle distance setting (ASCC). . . . . . . 5-70

Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system . . . 3-44

Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag . . 3-62

Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Side air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Filter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

All wheel drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

All wheel drive (AWD) transfer mode selection . . . 5-22

For safe all wheel drive operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Tight corner brake effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91

Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91

Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB)/

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

AEB warning message and system control . . . . . . . 5-52

Brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

Limitation of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Recognizing pedestrians. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in front (front radar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

System setting and activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172

AUX, USB and iPod ® port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174

How vehicle audio works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175

Steering wheel remote controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173

Using iPod ® device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180

Using the USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179

Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141

3rd row air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149

Automatic heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . 4-143

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . 4-153

Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152

Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150

Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Automatic transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

B

Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Recharging battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /

LCA (Lane Change Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

Non-operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

AUTO HOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Electronic parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Good braking practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

Index

Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Parking brake – Foot type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

C

Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Child restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158

Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

To cancel cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

To decrease the cruising speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

To resume cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

To turn cruise control off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

I 3

Index

D

Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Impact sensing door unlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle . . . . . 4-23

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-22

Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81

Drive mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81

E

Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Push-starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-101

Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-101

Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:

Onboard refueling vapor recovery) system . . . . . 7-101

Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

I 4

Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Checking the coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Checking the engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

ENGINE START/STOP button position . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . 5-9

Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . 7-29

Exterior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171

Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171

Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

F

Folding key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

Emergency fuel filler lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Opening the fuel filler lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . 1-3

Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66

Engine compartment fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . 7-69

Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71

Inner panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

G

Gross vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

H

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

I

If the engine overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4

If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4

If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Index

Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing . . . . . . 6-3

If the engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75

Icy Road Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

Instrument cluster control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

LCD display control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Transaxle shift indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Interior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161

AC inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165

Bottle holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162

Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168

Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161

Floor mat anchor (s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168

Luggage net holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164

Seat cooler (air ventilation seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163

Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162

Side curtain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169

Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164

USB charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

I 5

Index

Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

Luggage lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126

Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

K

Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Ignition switch position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

L

Lane departure warning system (LDWS). . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

The LDWS does not operate when . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

LCD modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

Liftgate (for manual liftgate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Closing the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Emergency liftgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Opening the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82

Front lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83

High mounted stop lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90

I 6

Interior light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92

License plate light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91

Rear combination lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-88

Side repeater lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87

Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

Check headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119

Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118

High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117

Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118

Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

M

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Manual climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

3rd row air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139

Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139

Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69

O

Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

P

Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

Sunshade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Checking the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Power liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Closing the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Emergency liftgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Opening the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Smart power liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

R

Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109

Non-operational conditions of rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110

Index

Operation of the rear parking assist system. . . . . . 4-109

Rear parking assist system precautions . . . . . . . . . 4-111

Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112

Rearview camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113

Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

S

Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Driver position memory system (for power seat) . . . 3-9

Front seat adjustment - manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Front seat adjustment - power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Headrest (for front seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Headrest (for rear seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

I 7

Index

Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98

Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100

Driving in flooded areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98

Highway driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98

Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99

Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100

Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159

Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159

Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159

Luggage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160

Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160

T

Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Disarmed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

Low aspect ratio tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65

Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures. . . . . . . 7-52

Snow tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

Tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56

Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54

Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55

Wheel replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

I 8

Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108

Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

If you do decide to pull a trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112

Maintenance when trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111

Safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

Trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

Trip modes (trip computer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

A/V mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

One time driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

ASCC/LDWS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

Trip Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

Turn by turn mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

User settings mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

V

Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . . . . . . 1-6

Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114

Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114

Index

Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114

Vehicle weight glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

GVW (Gross vehicle weight). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

W

Warning and indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Checking the washer fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Headlight (headlamp) escort function . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154

Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155

Defogging logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154

Winter driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103

I 9

Index

Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . 5-104

Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

Check spark plugs and ignition system . . . . . . . . . 5-104

Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . 5-105

Don't let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105

Snowy or icy conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103

To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant. . . . . . . . 5-104

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Blade inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121

Front windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123

Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . 4-124

Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121

ETC

360° camera monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114

I 10